Maxium

Electrosurgical Unit
with maxium Beamer
Service manual
Version 5.0-EN (08.10)
Valid from HW00 up to HW06
KLS Martin maxium / maxium Beamer

Service Manual
Table of Contents
1
Product Liability & Warranty ......................................................... 6
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
General Information .............................................................................. 6

Warranty ............................................................................................. 6
Users Inspection of Delivered Spare Parts ............................................... 6
Hotline................................................................................................. 7
Transportation and Packaging ....................................................... 7
2.1
2.2
Users Inspection .................................................................................. 7

Return of Goods .................................................................................... 8
Warnings & Safety Instructions ..................................................... 8
Service Functions ........................................................................ 9
4.1
Service Menu........................................................................................ 9
4.1.1
Program Handling............................................................................................ 9
4.1.2
Beamer Parameters ........................................................................................ 13
4.1.3
Settings ........................................................................................................19
4.1.4
Status Information ......................................................................................... 25
4.1.5
Calibration .....................................................................................................30
4.1.6
maxium Update ............................................................................................ 31
4.2
Updating the Operating Program ........................................................... 32
4.2.1
Aids Required for the Update ...........................................................................32
4.2.2
Normal Software Updating Procedure ................................................................ 32
4.2.3
Extended Software Updating Procedure ............................................................. 33
4.2.4
The marFlash Program ....................................................................................35
4.2.5
Updating the Subsystems of the ME402 and MB402 ............................................36
4.3
Readout and Transfer of the Units Settings ............................................ 36
4.3.1
Transfer from one ME402 Unit to Another (Back2Back) .......................................36
4.3.2
The maxiumPC Program ..................................................................................38
4.3.3
Transfer from a maxium Unit to a PC or Vice Versa (Back2Laptop) .....................39
Hardware and Software Statuses, Spare Parts Lists ........................ 39
5.1
5.2
5.3
General Procedure............................................................................... 39
Hardware Status ................................................................................. 40
ME402 Hardware Configurations and their Components ........................... 41
5.3.1
Hardware Configurations HW00 and HW01 ........................................................ 41
5.3.2
Hardware Configuration 02 ..............................................................................53
5.3.3
Hardware Configuration HW03 .........................................................................62
5.3.4
Hardware Configurations HW04 and HW05 ........................................................ 71
5.3.5
Hardware Configuration HW06 .........................................................................83
V 5.0

Service Manual
5.4
Software Status and Software Version Numbers...................................... 94
5.4.1
General Information ....................................................................................... 94
5.4.2
Software Version 0.247 ...................................................................................95
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
5.4.10
5.4.11
Software Version 0.331b .................................................................................99
5.4.12
5.4.13
Software Version 1.343 ................................................................................. 100
5.4.14
5.4.15
5.4.16
5.4.17
5.4.18
5.4.19
Software Version 2.369b ............................................................................... 109
5.4.20
Replacing Modules and Components on the ME402 ....................... 112
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
Opening and Closing the Unit ............................................................. 112

Replacing the Front Part..................................................................... 112
Replacing the Socket Panel................................................................. 113
Replacing the HF Output Sockets ........................................................ 114
Replacing the Socket Module Indicators and Backlights .......................... 114
Replacing the Rotary Switch and its Backlight ....................................... 115
Replacing the ON-OFF Button ............................................................. 116
Replacing the Front Board .................................................................. 117
Replacing the Screen Module and the Protective Glass Pane ................... 118
Replacing the Controller Board............................................................ 119
Replacing the Power Manager Board .................................................... 121
Replacing the Monopolar Board ........................................................... 123
Replacing the Bipolar Board................................................................ 124
Replacing the Main Board ................................................................... 126
Replacing the Footswitch Sockets or Loudspeakers ................................ 128
Replacing the Power Supply Socket, the Serial Interface Unit or the Argon
Beamer Connector ............................................................................ 129
V 5.0

Service Manual
Technical Description of the ME402 with MB402 Option ................. 130
7.1
7.2
7.3
General Information .......................................................................... 130

Design and Servicing Concept............................................................. 131
Functional Description of the ME402 .................................................... 131
7.3.1
Power Supply Units (PSUs) ............................................................................ 131
7.3.2
HF Generator ............................................................................................... 148
7.3.3
Monopolar Applied Part ................................................................................. 149
7.3.4
Bipolar Applied Part ...................................................................................... 155
7.3.5
The Main Controller and its Interfaces ............................................................. 159
7.3.6
Front Part .................................................................................................... 168
7.4
Functional Description of the MB402 maxium Beamer .......................... 170
7.4.1
General Information ..................................................................................... 170
7.4.2
Argon ......................................................................................................... 171
7.4.3
Gas Flow Control Block Diagram ..................................................................... 172
7.4.4
Measuring the Filling Level of the Gas Cylinder ................................................. 174
The Argon Beamer MB402 and its Components ............................ 177
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
Parts and Components of the MB402 maxium Beamer ......................... 177

Opening and Closing the Beamer ........................................................ 179
Replacing the Front Part..................................................................... 179
Replacing the Main Board ................................................................... 180
Replacing the Instrument Connector.................................................... 181
Replacing the Purge Button ................................................................ 182
Replacing the Front Board .................................................................. 182
Replacing the Gas Inlet Connector....................................................... 182
Replacing the Connecting Socket ........................................................ 183
Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 184
9.1
9.2
Text Messages .................................................................................. 184

Module Status Lamps and Their Functions ............................................ 194
9.2.1
Main Board .................................................................................................. 194
9.2.2
Controller Board ........................................................................................... 194
9.2.3
Power Manager Board ................................................................................... 194
9.2.4
Monopolar Board .......................................................................................... 197
9.2.5
Bipolar Board ............................................................................................... 200
9.3
9.4
9.5
Faults in the Power Supply System of the ME402 .................................. 203

Faults in the HF Generator and the Energy Flow Path of the ME402 ......... 204
Activation Path Faults ........................................................................ 205
V 5.0

Service Manual
10
Settings and Checks & Tests ...................................................... 207
10.1
10.2
Adjusting Positions of the ME402 ........................................................ 207

Setting the Power Manager Board ....................................................... 207
10.2.1
Power Manager Boards I and II in HW00, HW01 and HW02 ............................... 208
10.2.2
Power Manager Boards III (from HW03) and IV (from HW06) ............................ 209
10.3
Setting the Monopolar Board .............................................................. 212
10.3.1
Setting the Monopolar Boards I and II for HW00, HW01 and HW02 .................... 213
10.3.2
Setting the Monopolar Boards III (from HW03) and IV (from HW06) ................... 214
10.4
Setting the Bipolar Board ................................................................... 215
10.4.1
Setting the Bipolar Board I for HW00 and HW01............................................... 216
10.4.2
Setting the Bipolar Board II from HW02 to HW05 ............................................. 217
10.4.3
Setting the Bipolar Board III (from HW06) ...................................................... 221
10.5
10.6
Checking HF Output Power ................................................................. 223

Checking Compliance with High-Frequency Leakage Current Limits ......... 224
11
Recurrent Safety Checks according to IEC/EN 62353 .................... 226
V 5.0

Service Manual
Product Liability & Warranty
1.1
General Information
We thank you for having decided to buy a KLS Martin product. This product bears the CEmark, which means that it satisfies the essential requirements laid down in the EC Directive
relating to medical devices.
We are the manufacturer of this product:
Gebrder Martin GmbH & Co. KG
Ludwigstaler Strasse 132 Postfach 60
D-78501 Tuttlingen Germany
Phone: +49 74 61 706-0 Fax: +49 74 61 706-193
E-mail: info@klsmartin.com Website: www.klsmartin.com
1.2
Warranty
Our Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale effective at the time shall apply. Agreements diverging from these Standard Terms and Conditions do not restrict the legal rights of the buyer.
Any warranty exceeding the above provisions shall require a contractual form and shall exclude
component-related vandalism, software updates and consumables.
Important Notices
The product may only be repaired by Gebrder Martin or a qualified person or firm expressly
authorized by Gebrder Martin to perform such work.
If the repair is carried out by a person or firm specially authorized by Gebrder Martin, the
operator of the product is required to obtain from the repairer a certificate with details about
the nature and scope of the repair work done. This certificate must be dated and signed and
include the firms details.
In all cases where a party other than the product manufacturer performed the work, repaired
products must be additionally marked with the repairers ID label.
Improper interventions or alterations performed by third parties during the period of limitation
shall void any and all warranty claims. Unauthorized actions performed on the product shall
invalidate any liability claims against Gebrder Martin.
1.3
Users Inspection of Delivered Spare Parts
Immediately upon receipt, check the goods for completeness and integrity. Any damage or loss
in transit must be reported without delay.
V 5.0

Service Manual
1.4
Hotline
Should you have any technical questions, please contact our hotline.
Gebrder Martin
Hotline
Technical Questions
Phone: +49 74 61 706-343
Fax: +49 74 61 706-190
E-mail: msc@klsmartin.com
Should you have any questions concerning maintenance contracts or training courses, please
call our Technical Service Manager (+49 74 61 706-332), or send an e-mail to:
msc@klsmartin.com.
Transportation and Packaging
2.1
Users Inspection
Scope of Delivery & Damage in Transit

The unit and its accessories must be checked for potential shipping damage and other defects
immediately upon receipt.
Scope of delivery of maxium packaging unit:
KLS Martin maxium ME402
Power cord
Operating Instructions (user manual)
Optional:
Standard accessories set
Scope of delivery of maxium Beamer packaging unit:

KLS Martin maxium Beamer MB402
Connecting cable
Mounting kit for connecting Beamer with maxium and maxium Cart
Compensation Claims
Claims for damages shall only be accepted if the seller or carrier is notified immediately. In
such a case, a damage report must be drawn up without delay and sent to the nearest
Gebrder Martin representative or to Gebrder Martin directly so that the claims involved can
be duly filed with the insurer.
V 5.0

Service Manual
2.2
Return of Goods
When returning a unit to Gebrder Martin or a Gebrder Martin service point, use the original
packaging material (cardboard box) if possible, and add the following information (accompanying documents):
name and address of owner
type and serial numbers
description of the defect(s)
Warnings & Safety Instructions
The unit incorporates components that are directly connected to the power supply network.
The rear section of the main board and the covered left section of the power manager board
remain energized even after the unit has been turned off. The voltages present in this section
of the circuit are the line voltage and the pre-stabilized direct voltage (which amounts to 390 V
after the unit has been switched on and drops to the peak value of the mains voltage after the
unit has been turned off). This section is specially marked on the main board. Three other voltages can be present as well: the medium-frequency supply voltage for the screen illumination
after the unit has been turned on, the power controllers output voltage of up to 200 VDC as
soon as the unit is activated, and the HF output voltage of up to 12 kVpp.
Therefore, be sure to disconnect the power cord from the power supply before performing any repairs. This is the only way to de-energize all components inside the
unit!
For certain servicing tasks, it is necessary to operate the ME402 in an open condition because
measurements or settings must be carried out. In such cases, be sure to observe the usual
safety guidelines for preventing electric shocks.
Since the switching power supply unit incorporates capacitors that may remain energized for
some time after the unit has been turned off, an electric shock may be caused if you touch
them. This danger is particularly high in the event of internal faults.
V 5.0

Service Manual
Service Functions
4.1
Service Menu
The maxium offers basic setting and service functions. These are grouped in the Service
submenu.
MENU
Service menu
Pressing the MENU button on the maxium and selecting the Setup menu item takes you to
the Setup submenu. Selecting the last item, Service, takes you to the text editor, which is
usually used for entering program names. In this context, the editor is used for restricting
access to the Service functions, as some of them can lead to irreversible actions that are possibly unintended by normal users. Therefore, you must first enter 2020 and select the Enter
button in order to access the Service menu. Selecting Escape takes you to the next higher
menu level. Pressing the MENU button a little longer returns you directly to the top or main
level.
4.1.1
Program Handling
The Program Settings service menu item allows you to make program-specific basic settings,
as well as to restore factory settings.
V 5.0

Service Manual
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Start with standard program (instead of last used program)
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Cancel
Yes
No
Service menu
Service menu
Standard program can be edited until unit is turned off!
Basic settings
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Service menu
Please enter service password:
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Service menu
Basic settings
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Service menu
Service menu
Service
Selection of program to be locked
Basic settings
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Setup
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
...
Service menu
Servicemenu
Service menu
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
...
...
Servicemenu
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
10
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
Selection of program to be unlocked
Basic settings
Service menu overview

Program settings
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
...
Servicemenu
Servicemenu
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
...
...
V 5.0

Service Manual
Start-up with Standard program (from SW0.331)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Service menu
Service menu
Start with standard program (instead of last used program)
Basic settings
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Cancel
Yes
No
This function allows you to decide whether the maxium is to be started with the last-used
program or with the Standard program. If you select Yes, the maxium will start up with the
Standard program. If the factory presetting is used, the last-used program is offered upon
turning on the unit.
Edit Standard Program (from SW0.331)

Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Standard program can be edited until unit is turned off!
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
While the Standard program can be modified on other menu levels during work, it cannot be
saved in modified form. However, if the user wishes to adjust the Standard program to individual needs, the Edit function can be used to release the Standard program for modification
and saving the changed parameters temporarily until the unit is turned off. After turning the
unit on again, the Standard program will again be available with the previous restrictions.
V 5.0
11

Service Manual
Reset Programs (up to SW2.347: Create programs)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
This function deletes any user-defined settings and restores the factory presettings. In this
way, it is easily possible to reset units to their original state, e.g. if they have been temporarily
handed over to customers (e.g. on a hiring or testing basis, or for temporary replacement of a
unit returned for repair). Calling up this function irreversibly deletes all user-defined settings
without any warning being displayed!
Lock Programs (from SW2.360)

Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Service menu
Standard Program
Basic settings
Selection of a program to be locked
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
12
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
...
Standard Program
Standard Program
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
...
...
V 5.0

Service Manual
This function allows locking programs in order to prevent their being saved in modified form. If
the user wishes to prevent any changes in a user-defined program, he/she can use the menu
path Program Settings / Lock Program to have a list of programs displayed (note, however,
that the access code is required for this!). The program of interest can then be selected and
locked by pressing the rotary switch axially. This causes a lock symbol to be displayed next to
the program preview. The lock symbol will also be shown in the normal program selection preview mode, but not in the list of last-used programs (LUPs) displayed on the main level. You
can also use this function to lock several programs one after another, without any need to
change the menu level.
Unlock Programs (from SW2.360)

This function allows you to unlock programs that have previously been locked to prevent their
being saved in modified form. Use Program Settings / Unlock Program to call up the list of programs, then select the program of your choice and confirm by pressing the rotary switch.
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Standard Program
Basic settings
Selection of a program to be unlocked
Escape
Power up w.std prg
Edit standard prog
Reset programs
Lock program
Unlock program
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
...
Standard Program
Standard Program
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
Cancel
Standard program
Gen.Surg.w.Beamer
General Surgery
...
...
This deletes the lock symbol next to the program parameter preview (as well as in the preview
of the normal program selection mode where it is also indicated whereas it is not indicated in
the list of last-used programs (LUPs) on the main level). In this way, it is also possible to unlock several programs one after another, without any need to change the menu level.
Note that the Standard program cannot be unlocked with this function, as unlocking is only
temporarily possible using the Edit Standard Program function.
4.1.2
Beamer Parameters
This menu allows you to set and check parameters of the MB402 maxium Beamer. However,
this menu can be accessed only if a Beamer with gas supply has been connected.
V 5.0
13

Service Manual
Service menu
Service menu
Service menu
Please connect Argon Beamer with gas cylinder filled!
Service menu
Cal. of argon filling level indicator at two test pressures
Please open argon gas cylinder briefly, then close it again!
Reading at max. pressure: 3541 mV

Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Value measured at 100 bar: missing

Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Service menu
Basic settings

Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Please reduce argon pressure to 100 bar with purge button!
Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Value measured at 100 bar: 3795 mV

Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Service menu
Service menu

Service menu
Escape
Open/close cylin.
Service menu
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard

Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Service menu

Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Service menu
Service menu
Service
Setup
Service menu
Please press ENTER button as soon as measured value is stable
Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard

Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Pressure alarm threshold : 30 bar
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Beamer Parameters
Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Servicemenu
Service menu
Argon Beamer error log: Cons. no.
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
14
Cycle Power:
783
Cut Activations with Argon:
168
Coag Activations with Argon: 4437
ID
Quantity
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
V 5.0

Service Manual
Beamer Parameters (gas supply status) (from SW0.311)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log

Please open argon gas cylinder briefly, then close it again!
Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Reading at max. pressure: 3541 mV

Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
This menu item allows you to check the maxium Beamer gas connection status and the filling
level of the gas cylinder (if used). For the following menu item, Filling Level Calibration, a
filling level of at least 100 bar is required in the argon gas cylinder.
Filling Level Calibration (from SW0.311)

Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log

Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Service menu
Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Service menu
Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard

Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
Service menu

V 5.0
Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
15

Service Manual
The filling level of the argon gas cylinder is displayed on the screen. The parameter used for
deriving the indicated filling level is the gas pressure present at the input of the Beamer. However, this is not a constant value, as the output pressure of the pressure reducer which is
identical with the input pressure of the Beamer varies with the input pressure of the pressure
reducer. Such input pressure, in turn, is identical with the current pressure of the gas cylinder
which also represents the filling level of the cylinder.
To make sure that the filling level of the cylinder is indicated correctly, the symbol displayed
can be adjusted to reflect actual conditions. Proceed as follows:
First, open the corner valve on the gas cylinder. The gas pressure reading on the manometer of the pressure reducer must be at least 100 bar for the procedure to be carried out.
Subsequently, close the corner valve again.
Via the menu path Beamer Parameters / Filling Level Calibration, select the item Measure
100 bar and press the rotary switch. This calls up a numerical display.
Use the PURGE button on the MB402 to activate a gas flow, thereby observing the manometer on the pressure reducer. Hold the button down until the indicated residual pressure
has dropped to 100 bar with the corner valve closed. Wait until the display has settled to
show a stable value, then press the rotary switch to log the value.
Select the Measure 30 bar menu item and press the rotary switch.
Again, use the PURGE button on the MB402 to activate a gas flow, thereby observing the
manometer on the pressure reducer. Hold the button down until the residual pressure indicated has dropped to 30 bar with the corner valve closed. Wait until the display has settled
to show a stable value, then press the rotary button to log the value.
Select the Ready menu item and press the rotary switch for confirmation.
This terminates the procedure.

Reset to Standard (from SW0.311)
Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log

Please press ENTER button as soon as measured value is stable
Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard

Escape
Open/close cylin.
Measure @ 100 bar
Measure @ 30 bar
Ready
Reset to Standard
If the gas cylinder pressure has already dropped below 100 bar, a standard setting can be selected instead of calibration via the two pressure levels (as described above). This means using
fixed values good enough for sufficiently precise pressure indication. Select Beamer Parameters / Filling Level Calibration from the menu, then select Reset to Standard and press the rotary switch for confirmation.
16
V 5.0

Service Manual
Set Alarm Threshold (from SW0.311)
Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Pressure alarm threshold : 30 bar
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
If the filling level drops below the set minimum value, a warning signal is automatically emitted. The minimum value (or alarm threshold) can be adjusted by selecting Beamer Parameters
and then the Alarm Threshold item and confirming by pressing the rotary switch. Thereafter,
you can adjust the alarm threshold across a range of 30 to 80 bar by turning the rotary switch.
The factory presetting is 30 bar a level that provides sufficient reserve when using a 10-liter
gas cylinder. When using smaller gas cylinders, the alarm threshold should be set higher.
Display Accumulated Activation Data (from SW1.343)

Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Cycle Power:
547
Cut Activations with Argon: 112
Coag Activations with Argon: 3794
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
The unit automatically counts the number of activations in the Cut and Coag operating modes,
as well as the number of times the unit has been turned on. The corresponding totals can be
displayed. To do this, select Beamer Parameters and then Activation Data and confirm by
pressing the rotary switch. The values displayed are merely for information and cannot be adjusted.
V 5.0
17

Service Manual
Error Log (from SW1.343)
Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Argon Beamer error log: Cons. no.
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
ID
Quantity
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
The maxium & maxium Beamer system also registers operating troubles and malfunction
incidences and saves this information in error logs. The error log for Argon Beamer operating
troubles can be displayed by selecting Beamer Parameters and Error Log and pressing the rotary switch for confirmation. The values displayed are merely for information and cannot be
adjusted. The log is based on a cyclical (ring-type) memory, which means that the oldest values are overwritten upon reaching the capacity limit.
Clear Error Log (from SW1.343)

Service menu
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Escape
Filling Level Cal.
Alarm Threshold
Activation Data
Error Log
Clear Error Log
After repairing the unit, it may make sense to clear the error log. To do this, select Beamer
Parameters and then the Error Log item. Subsequently pressing the rotary switch deletes all
error log entries irreversibly.
18
V 5.0

Service Manual
4.1.3
Settings
This submenu provides access to some background functions such as clock setting, HF voltage
limitation and activation tone setting (sound scheme selection).
Service menu
Service menu
Servicemenu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Setting time and date

2008-04-03 Thursday 08:52:50
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Set clock
Escape
Clock
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock pow during act
Tone settings
Representative
Service menu
Escape
Basic settings
Service menu
Service menu

2008-04-03 Thursday 08:52:50
2008-04-03 Thursday 08:52:50
Escape
Set clock
Program
E sSettings
cape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Cancel
Yes
No
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Bar graph: Measured power instead of set power
Cancel
Yes
Escape
Clock
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock pow during act
Tone settings
Representative
Service menu
Service
Service menu
Basic settings
Lock power adjustments during all activation phases!
Escape
Clock
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock pow during act
Tone settings
Representative
Setup
8
52
0
Escape
set year
set month
set date
set weekday
set hour
set minute
Service menu
Escape
Clock
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock pow during act
Tone settings
Representative
Service menu
2008
4
3
Block all currents with output voltages > 4 kVp
Basic settings
YYYY
MM
DD
wd
Thursday
hh
mm
ss
Service menu
Cancel
Yes
Service menu
Basic settings
Sound of activation tones and of channel differentiation
Escape
Clock
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock pow during act
Tone settings
Representative
Escape
Sound Scheme 1
Sound Scheme 2
Sound Scheme 3
Sound Scheme 4
Service menu
Basic settings
Escape
Clock
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock pow during act
Tone settings
Representative
V 5.0
Overview Service menu

Basic settings
19

Service Manual
Time (from HW02 and SW1.343)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Clock
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Low pow during act
Tone settings
Representative
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings

2008-04-03 Thursday 08:52:50
Escape
Clock
4kVp Limitation
Spannungsbgr.4kVp
Power Bar Graph
Low
pow during act
Leistungssperre
Akt
Tone settings
Representative
Escape
Set clock
Service menu
Service menu
2008-04-03 Thursday 08:52:50
2008-04-03 Thursday 08:52:50
Escape
Set clock
YYYY
MM
DD
wd Thursday
hh
mm
2008
04
03
08
52
Escape
set year
set month
set date
set weekday
set hour
set minute
From HW02, the maxium features a clock with calendar function supporting the log functions.
Once the unit has been switched off, this clock is powered by a battery located on the controller board. As the clock is not required for operating the unit as intended, a discharged battery
does not restrict its usability in any way.
The clock is set to Central European daylight saving time (CET) ex factory. There is no automatic changeover from daylight saving time to standard time. The time is also displayed, together with the battery status, via the Device Status / System Information menu path.
To set the clock via the path Device Settings / Time, select the Set Time menu item. The parameters year, month, day of month, hour and minute can then be individually selected and adjusted.
20
V 5.0

Service Manual
Voltage Limitation to 4 kV (from SW0.331)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Clock / Date
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock power
Tone settings
Representative
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Block all currents with output voltages > 4 kVp
Escape
Clock / Date
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock power
Tone settings
Representative
Cancel
Yes
No
This menu item allows you to limit the maximum output voltage to 4 kV for all currents, e.g. in
order to protect endoscopic accessories against overload. However, this setting option makes
sense only for units up to (and including) HW02. In higher hardware versions, the newly implemented HF output voltage control function ensures that output voltages exceeding 4 kV are
limited to open-surgical spray and argon coagulation currents.
V 5.0
21

Service Manual
Power Bar Graph (switchable from SW1.343)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Clock / Date
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock power
Tone settings
Representative
Service menu
Service menu
Bar graph: Measured power instead of set power
Basic settings
Escape
Clock / Date
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock power
Tone settings
Representative
Cancel
Yes
No
If used in the factory-preset mode, the horizontal bar graph below the dosage indicator shows
the current dosage setting relative to the maximum value available. As the rotary switch has
no left or right end stop indicating the minimum and maximum positions of the adjusting
range, the bar graph is intended to keep users informed about their currently set output power
level relative to the overall adjusting range.
The menu item YES allows you to switch the bar graph from indication of the set power to
indication of the actual HF output power relative to the set power. In this mode, the bar lights
up on only when HF power is actually emitted. This function is useful in cases where the user is
in doubt about the correct power setting for an application. For automatic cutting processes,
the preset power should always be higher than the power actually required for the task at
hand, as this provides reserve for controlling power peaks. If the indicated actual value constantly reflects the maximum level, then the preset power is possibly too low.
Selecting the No menu item returns you to the original bar graph mode (setpoint indication).
22
V 5.0

Service Manual
Lock Power Adjustment During Activation (from SW1.343)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Clock / Date
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock power
Tone settings
Representative
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Lock power adjustments during all activation phases!
Escape
Clock / Date
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock power
Tone settings
Representative
Cancel
Yes
No
During HF current activation, the unit is locked against changes in its settings except for HF
output power adjustments, which are possible also during activation (when using the factory
presetting). By selecting Yes, however, this menu function allows you to lock the unit against
output power adjustments during activation as well. The previous function (power adjustment
during activation enabled) can be restored at any time by selecting the No item, thus releasing the lock.
V 5.0
23

Service Manual
Tone Settings (from SW02.360)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Clock / Date
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock power
Tone settings
Representative
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Sound of activation tones and of channel differentiation
Escape
Clock / Date
4kVp Limitation
Power Bar Graph
Lock power
Tone settings
Representative
Escape
Sound Scheme 1
Sound Scheme 2
Sound Scheme 3
Sound Scheme 4
Previously, the activation tone for cutting was lower-pitched than that for coagulation, while
there was no difference in pitch between the monopolar and bipolar operating modes. With the
implementation of SW2.360, this system has been changed. Now there are four different
sound schemes as follows:
Sound scheme 1: This is the new default sound set: Cut = high pitch, Coag = lower pitch, plus
pitch difference between monopolar and bipolar, i.e. 4 different acoustic activation signals altogether.
Sound scheme 2: Same as scheme 1: Cut = high pitch, Coag = lower pitch, but no pitch difference between monopolar and bipolar, i.e. 2 different acoustic activation signals altogether.
Sound scheme 3: Same as scheme 1, but additional differentiation between M1 and M2, B1
and B2, and monopolar and bipolar, i.e. 8 different acoustic activation signals altogether. The
difference between Bipol Cut B1 and B2 has been made particularly noticeable in response to
user requests.
Sound scheme 4: Martin Classic: Coag = high pitch, Cut = lower pitch. This setting corresponds to the previous maxium sounds used up to software version V1.357, reflecting the delivery status of all units with hardware versions up to HW03 inclusive. This means that
KLS Martin customers can set their familiar sounds.
Sound scheme 1 is automatically activated during software updates (default setting). Users
who wish to work with their familiar sound configuration therefore must switch over to sound
scheme 4 in a one-time action.
24
V 5.0

Service Manual
4.1.4
Status Information
This menu allows you to check the hardware and software configurations of the maxium, as
well as to access the activation and error logs.
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Service menu
Basic settings
Anzeige der Softwareversionen
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
ME402 MAXIUM Softw.: S00 02.368 Serie

Build: Dec 13 2007 Time: 16:40:45
This software does not support Beamer MB181 anymore!
This software does not support CAN Smoke Evac.Mod!
Digital Pattern Generator: V 01.00
Digital Tone Generator: V 00.00
Mono Contr.: V12.04 (upd to V11.02 avail.) Bootl.V01.00 found
No CAN-Bus Adapter detected! (Smoke Evac.)
Servicemenu
Service menu
Basic settings
Anzeige
Info tableder
of hardware
Hardwareversionen
versions
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Service menu
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Info table of hardware versions
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Service menu
Service
2008-04-03 Thursday 08:52:50

Battery checked ok!
No Maxium Argon Beamer MB 402 detected!
Bipolar Instrument Code: #00
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Service menu
Basic settings
Setup
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Service menu
Service menu
Activation request log
Basic settings
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
Service menu
V 5.0
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
Service menu
List of stored error events
Basic settings
Overview Service menu

Device Status
Total # of activations:
20
Page 1 / 3 C 0
src
date
time
msec Watt channel ID current mode
P-On 2008-04-03 Donnerstag 08:52:50
Pedal 2008-04-03 Donnerstag 08:55:43
670 050 BICUT2 021 Forfex: Mechanisc
420 040 BICOAG1 026 Macro Auto Stop:
260 050 BICOAG1 026 Macro Auto Stop:
4900 080 MOCUT1 002 Blend Cut:
Ve
Ve
Ve
2400 080 MOCOAG1 044 Clamp Coag: Monop
Ve
Ve
Ve
Ve
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:33:44
Versch
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:37:36
Versch
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:37:49
3340 080 MOCOAG1 044 Clamp Coag: Monopolar
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:37:56
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:38:05
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:43:48
Versch
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:44:12
Versch
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:53:51
Versch
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:54:11
3280 080 MOCOAG1 044 Clamp Coag: Monopoplar
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:54:38
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:54:43
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:57:17
Versch
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:54:43
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:55:01
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:55:23
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
25

Service Manual
Software Releases (from HW 1.343)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Info table of software versions
Basic settings
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
ME402 MAXIUM Softw.: S0 0 02.368 Serie

Built: Dec 13 2007 Time: 16:40:45
This software does not support Beamer MB181 anymore!
This software does not support CAN smoke Evac.Mod.!
Digital Pattern Generator: V 01.00
Digital Tone Generator: V 00.00
Mono Contr.: V12.04 (upd to V11.02 avail.) Bootl.V01.00 found
No CAN-Bus Adapter detected! (Smoke Evac.)
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
This menu item allows you to check the release status of the software of all the programmable
systems of the unit. Apart from the main controller, programmable systems are the two CPLDs
(complex programmable logic devices) for the sound generator and the HF current pulse pattern generator located on the controller board, the controller on the patient circuit side of the
monopolar board, and the Argon Beamer. These programmable peripheral systems can also be
supplied with program updates by the main controller. However, the patient-circuit and Argon
Beamer controllers require a bootloader for this purpose (a bootloader is a program part that
maintains communication with the main controller independent of the main program while the
old main program is being erased and the new main program installed). Whether the bootloader is installed or not is indicated here as well. The updating process is carried out automatically where possible. If not possible because there is no bootloader installed, both the current
version and the new version (the one that could be installed with a bootloader) are displayed.
The controllers can only be programmed with a bootloader from outside, using the programming interface provided on the respective board.
A CAN bus adapter for smoke evacuator control is recognized as well and indicated here if
connected.
26
V 5.0

Service Manual
Hardware Releases (from SW1.343)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Hardware Level: HW05 [05]

Total # of Board-ID ROMs detected: 7
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
ID HV HR Board KW/SN MIN-Sw Hw Fw

01 00 02 C40-2346 0607/041 S0001350 03
02 00 02 C40-2337 0607/021 S0001350 03
03 00 00 C40-2327 1107/009 S0001356 04 02.368
MONOPOLARMOD. 04 00 01 C40-2281 1806/007 S0001350 03 11.002
BIPOLARMODULE 05 00 02 C40-2155 0305/038 S0001332 02
KEYBOARD
06 00 00 C40-2471 1107/042 S0001256 05
OUTP.CONNECTRs 07 00 01 C40-2425 2207/017 S0001356 04
ROM size: 2 MBytes
This unit uses standard HW00/01 AC-controller
This hardware features backup battery support
Output connector configuration: M
MAINBOARD
POWERMANAGER
CONTROLLER
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Starting with hardware version HW02, all electronic components are equipped with identifiers,
i.e. small, non-volatile memories in which the modules ID number, serial number and version
number are stored. All of this information can be displayed in this menu. From HW04,
SW2.360, the unit automatically recognizes and displays the socket version as well. The identifier data is used to determine and display the hardware version of the unit. In this process,
non-permitted module combinations are detected as well in which case an error message is
displayed and the unit blocked as a result.
The size of the main-board program memory is displayed in addition. Up to HW01, the respective storage space was only 1 MB; from HW02, 2 MB are now available. This larger memory
size is required for software updates for V2.368 or higher versions.
V 5.0
27

Service Manual
System Information (from SW1.343)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
2008-04-03 Thursday 08:52:50

Battery checked OK!
No Maxium Argon Beamer MB402 detected!
Bipolar Instrument Code: #00
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
This menu item offers additional system status information such as date and time regarding
the internal clock, the charge status of the clocks buffer battery, the maxium Beamer connection status and the code of an instrument connected to output B2. If no instrument is connected to B2, or one that lacks an instrument identifier, the code 00 is displayed.
28
V 5.0

Service Manual
Logs (from SW1.343)
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Basic settings
Escape
Software releases
Hardware releases
System Information
Logging
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
Service menu
Service menu
Basic settings
Activation request log
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
Total # of activations:
20
src
date
time
msec
P-On 2008-04-03 Donnerstag 08:52:50
670
490
510
420
260
490
210
710
4900
620
470
2400
2980
1840
1110
50
70
1210
1350
1610
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:33:44
840 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:37:36
770 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:37:49
3340 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:37:56
2740 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:38:05
2540 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:43:48
630 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:44:12
720 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:53:51
960 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:54:11
3280 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:54:38
2910 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:54:43
1230 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:57:17
640 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:54:43
1390 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:55:01
3550 080
Pedal 2008-03-31 Montag 14:55:23
2040 080
Service menu
Page 1 / 3 C 0
Watt channel ID current mode
050 BICUT2 021Forfex: Mechanisc
050 BICUT2 021Forfex: Mechanisc
040 BICUT2 021 Forfex: Mechanisc
040 BICOAG1 026 Macro Auto Stop:
050 BICOAG1 026 Macro Auto Stop:
080 MOCUT1 002 Blend Cut:
Ve
Ve
Ve
080 MOCOAG1 044 Clamp Coag: Monop
Ve
Ve
Ve
Ve
MOCUT1 002 Blend Cut:
Versch
Versch
MOCOAG1 044 Clamp Coag: Monopolar
Versch
Versch
Versch
Versch
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
Service menu
Basic settings
List of stored error events

error# count
>>>EOL<<<
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
file
at line
error message
(if applicable)
Escape
Activation logging
Error logging
Activations and error statuses are also registered by the system. Activations are displayed
chronologically, including activation source, duration, power, operating mode, and type of current used. Once the available memory space has been used up, the oldest entries are subsequently overwritten. However, as it would not be possible to locate the beginning of the log in
cases where there are no date and time entries (either because the current hardware does not
support a clock function or because the battery is discharged), the end of the log is marked
with a black bar.
Errors are stored in the sequence of their first occurrence. If they occur repeatedly, the counter of the existing entry simply counts up. The corresponding dates are not registered in this
case.
V 5.0
29

Service Manual
4.1.5
Calibration
Service menu
Service menu
Device calibration. Please follow instructions!
Device settings
Spray Frequency = 0
Escape
Spray Frequency
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service menu
Device settings
Service menu
Spray Frequency = 0
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Spray Frequency = 2
Cancel
Spray Frequency
Cancel
Spray Frequency
Service menu
Service
Setup
With some HW00 and HW01 versions, there may be problems with nominal power setting for
high-voltage coagulation currents, notably spray coagulation. In such cases, the menu now
(SW0.251 or higher) allows switching over to another setpoint table to achieve the desired
output power. There are two alternatives available in addition to the standard table (index 0).
The high spray output power spread is due to an insufficiently dimensioned HF generator
control circuit. However, this problem was already detected and cleared during HW01 production and therefore is no longer relevant to subsequent hardware releases. For maxium versions HW02 or higher, access to this function therefore has been blocked.
30
V 5.0

Service Manual
maxium Update
4.1.6
Service menu
Device settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Device settings
Escape
Program Settings
Beamer Parameters
Device Settings
Device Status
Device Calibration
MAXIUM Update
Service menu
Service
Setup
To update the operating program of the main controller, it is normally enough to connect the
ME402 to the RS232 interface of a PC and then start the marFlash tool. With HW00 and HW01
units, as well as in cases where it is not possible, for whatever reason, to start the updating
process directly (USB RS232 adapters tend to cause problems, for example), the unit must be
set to boot mode manually by selecting the corresponding menu function. This clears the
screen, causing it to turn violet or dark. If no data transfer takes place, the unit will remain in
this state, but restarting it is enough to make it ready for operation again. For more detailed
information on the topic of updating, please see the following section.
V 5.0
31

Service Manual
4.2
Updating the Operating Program
On the maxium, updating the operating program (software update) requires no program
memory exchange. Rather, this can be done externally by simply overwriting the memory contents by data transfer from a PC. As from software status 1.336, even the memory contents of
the patient circuit controller and the maxium Beamer controller can be updated in this way in
addition to those of the main controller. However, this presupposes a bootloader in these controllers (see section 4.1.4). For a detailed description of the updating process, please refer to
the CD which, among other material, contains the new operating software and can be obtained
from the Martin Service Center.
4.2.1
Aids Required for the Update
To update the internal maxium software, the following equipment is required:
A serial RS232 modem cable (1:1) with male DSUB9 connector at one end and a female
one at the other end. Do not confuse this with a null modem cable used for connecting two
PCs. Such cables have female connectors at both ends and cannot be used even with an
adapter (gender changer)!
This cable must be connected to the female 9-pin DSUB9 socket designated RS232 on
the maxium, and to the PCs socket that is either designated Serial, RS232 or labeled
I0I0I (usually a male DSUB9 socket or, in the case of laptops, frequently a PS/2 socket
(such as the mouse connector)). In the latter case, you also need a PS/2-DSUB9 adapter.
For portable PCs that no longer feature an RS232 serial interface, a USB-RS232 adapter
must be used.
A laptop/PC with Microsoft Windows operating system and a free serial interface that
can be used by the operating system, e.g. COM1.
Program marFlash, which is also available from the CD containing the current software.
For installation and troubleshooting, please refer to section 4.2.4. The previously used Flashit tool should not be used anymore since it does not support the program memory extension to 2 MB. As a result, software version 2.368 or higher versions can no longer be
programmed with that tool.
The current operating program for the ME402 maxium in the form of a
me402_VX.XXX.h86 file, with X.XXX standing for the current version. This program is
available on a CD together with the installation program.
If a maxium Beamer is available, you should connect it, although this is not mandatory because from version 1.335, the maxium can automatically update the Beamer later.
4.2.2
Normal Software Updating Procedure
Once the PC and the maxium have been connected with each other via the specified serial
cable, and after the current download program has been installed from the CD if necessary,
proceed as follows:
1. Turn on the PC and the ME402.
32
V 5.0

Service Manual
2. Call up the marFlash program and load the file with the new software via the File dropdown menu item.
3. On HW00 or HW01 versions of the ME402, select the Setup menu item and then the Service item as described in section 4.1.6. This activates the text editor. Enter the access
code 2020 and confirm with Enter. Now select the item Program update in the Service
menu and confirm by pressing the rotary switch. The screen will now turn completely blue
and then dark a normal process. The ME402 is now in boot mode and awaits commands
and data via the serial interface. This step is obsolete with units from HW02, since the boot
mode will be activated directly from the PC via the serial interface in this case.
4. Click Upload in the marFlash dialog box to start the updating process. After deleting the
old program memory contents, the new data will be transferred and burnt in. The whole
process will take approximately four minutes for the ME402.
Upon completion of the reprogramming process, the ME402 should be automatically restarted.
If this is not the case, switch the unit off and on again. The program version indicated on the
starting screen should now be the new one. Thereafter, perform the periodic safety checks as
specified in section 11. For units with hardware status HW00 and partly HW01, the basic
setting (calibration) for the monopolar high-voltage coagulation currents must be checked in
addition, following the instructions given in section 4.1.5.
4.2.3
Extended Software Updating Procedure
If the normal updating procedure is interrupted (due to an interruption of the data transmission process or some other malfunction that causes a data transmission breakdown), turn off
the ME402 maxium and restart it again. If the unit can be switched on again in the normal
way, with the old software version indicated on the starting screen, you can simply repeat the
normal updating process described in section 4.2.2. However, if the screen remains dark, the
reprogramming had already been started but could not be completed, with the consequence
that the program memory contains only a non-executable fragment of the new software. In
this case, it is no longer possible to prepare the unit for the updating process via the operator
interface. Instead, proceed as follows:
1. Open the unit as described in section 6.1.
2. Using a pointed object, shift one of the two slide switches of the boot mode switch to the
ON position. If necessary, disconnect the X4 connector (which connects the front board to
the controller) from the controller board to facilitate access to the boot mode switch. The
two slide switches have the same function; their contacts are connected in parallel. Then
reconnect the cable to X4.
3. Reconnect the serial connecting cable to the PC, then start the marFlash program.
4. Reconnect the mains cable to the PC. CAUTION! The units rear section is now energized even if the unit is turned off!
5. Turn on the unit. The display screen remains dark now.
6. Click Upload in the marFlash dialog box. This starts the updating procedure. After deleting
the old program memory contents, the new data will be transferred and burnt in. The
whole process will take approximately four minutes for the ME402. Upon its completion, a
V 5.0
33

Service Manual
text message must occur indicating successful termination of the process. In case the data
transfer would not start, operate the RESET key and click Upload again.
501
10
101
101
471
10
471
ME402 Controllermodul 3 Xnummeriert.dsf 14.01.08
from HW04
ON
OFF
Boot mode switch
ON
RESET key
up to HW03
101
lt 1
86 1
93 042
93 337
10
STS 0848
PBRM0816
939387
10
471
501
101
471
471
ME402 Controllermodul 2 Xnummeriert dsf 04 09 06
7. The unit will not be restarted automatically. Once marFlash indicates that the data transfer
has been successfully completed, switch off the ME402 and disconnect the power cord as
well as the connecting cable to the PC from the unit.
8. Reset both slide switches of the boot mode switch to their OFF position. If necessary, again
disconnect the front boards connecting cable to X4 and reconnect it afterwards.
9. Perform functional check. Reconnect the power cord to the unit and turn it on. The self-test
screen must now indicate the new software version.
10. Disconnect the power cord again, then close the unit as described in section 6.1.
11. Thereafter, perform the periodic safety checks specified in section 11. For units with hardware status HW00 and partly HW01, the basic setting (calibration) for the monopolar
high-voltage coagulation currents must be checked in addition, following the instructions
given in section 4.1.5.
34
V 5.0

Service Manual
4.2.4
The marFlash Program
In principle, the marFlash program does not require installation marFlash can be started
also from the CD/DVD directly. Nonetheless, it certainly makes sense to test the software first
because access to the serial port can cause problems. Once the system has been configured
successfully, experience shows that it runs very smoothly.
The marFlash program can only be used for updating Martin units of type ME402 maxium
with the associated maxium Beamer. Neither a dongle nor licenses are required for this.
When starting the program, the following problems can occur:
Despite the fact that a serial port is available on the PC, this port may not be available
because it is used/blocked by another software. The culprit may also be the
maxiumPC program described in section 4.3! In all other cases, try to find out which software is currently using the port, then cause it to unblock it. A typical representative of such
programs is the Nokia Communicator, which is a self-triggering program and blocks the
serial port permanently. It is easy to deactivate such programs via the task bar. This reliably unblocks the port.
Whether a RS232 serial port is really available or not can best be checked with the terminal
program Hyperterm, a Microsoft Windows accessory. The baud rate should be left at
57,600 BAUD.
Find out the correct serial port (COM port). This requires some testing on a trial-and-error
basis. Note that this involves some traps. Other programs that use the serial interface can
block marFlash e.g. the mouse driver or unintentionally opened programs (e.g. mobile
address management via Outlook, or the Nokia Communicator software), internal modems
or IrDAs (changeover switch often hidden in the PCs setup). Normally, however, it should
be possible to run the program with any serial port that can be opened with Hyperterm,
the Microsoft Windows terminal program.
Note: Be sure to terminate Hyperterm prior to starting marFlash! If not terminated,
Hyperterm itself could block the serial port!
Advanced portable PCs no longer have an obligatory RS232 interface. Rather, they use adapters that can be operated at the USB port and provide a RS232 cable connector. However, experience shows that these adapters do not always work properly. Especially in light of the
great number of possible combinations between PC models and adapter models, it is hard to
give reliable advice regarding the best choice. In case of problems with a USB adapter, the
following tricks might help:
Terminate all other programs: Messenger, Firewall and any other tool that sporadically
draws on the computers resources (e.g. disconnect from network).
Use a different make of RS232/USB adapter.
Reset the protocol of the serial interface used (but only this one!!) from None to Hardware flow control. (This is not really logical, but it may help!)
In a nutshell: Just find out whether the adapter really holds out to the end of the programming process in a given configuration without any communication error or breakdown. Otherwise, only the use of a PC with RS232 interface will help.
V 5.0
35

Service Manual
4.2.5
Updating the Subsystems of the ME402 and MB402
The ME402 maxium with MB402 maxium Beamer features several programmable subsystems. While previous software updates lacked the software required for these subsystems,
software versions 1.336 or higher are capable of updating some of these subsystems as well if
necessary. This applies to the monopolar patient circuit controller, the CPLDs on the controller
board and the maxium Beamer. The version check is carried out during the initial self-test.
The subsystem updating process takes place only once (if required), namely immediately after
the first restart of the system following updating of the main controllers operating program (as
described above). Of course, such subsystem updates require some additional time during the
first restart. It also presupposes that the software of these subsystems already includes a
bootloader. The presence of a bootloader can be checked via the Service menu as described in
section 4.1.4. HW00 and HW01 units do not have a bootloader as a serial feature; programming of a bootloader is possible only directly via the programming interface of the module or
the main board of the Beamer, respectively. This also requires special programming adapters
and tools. If installation of bootload capability on such a system is required, please contact the
Martin Service Center.
4.3
Readout and Transfer of the Units Settings
From SW2.368, the settings of a unit can be transferred to another ME402 unit or be stored on
a PC or loaded/restored from a PC. This is done via the serial RS232 interface that is also used
for software updates.
The minimum software status required for transferring settings from or to a ME402 is V2.368.
The software status is displayed during power-on or may be checked as described in section
4.1.4. If a software version lower than V2.368 is used, then a software update has to be performed in the first place. However, this requires an extended program memory of 2 MB, which
is a serial feature only in units with HW02 or higher hardware versions.
4.3.1
Transfer from one ME402 Unit to Another (Back2Back)
If a units settings are to be copied to another unit, then the serial RS232 interfaces of the two
units have to be connected with each other. To do this, please use the serial connection cable (which is also used for software updates) in combination with a null modem adapter that
changes the gender of the cable plug from female to male. Do not connect the female end
of the cable without adapter to the adjacent CAN socket! A standard null modem cable
as commonly used for connecting two PCs cannot be used here since it features female connectors at both ends.
36
V 5.0

Service Manual
As soon as both units are connected to each other, a menu appears on both screens which is
not accessible via the other menu levels. Selecting the appropriate menu item enables you to
decide whether to transfer or receive only the stored programs, only the settings (preferences)
associated to the stored programs, or both together. To transfer the units complete setup to
another unit, choose the item Send both for uploading or Receive both for downloading.
Note that the function of your choice needs to be selected only on one of the two units. Subsequently pressing the rotary switch for confirmation automatically sets the other unit to the
complementary operating mode, no separate setting required.
Transfer starts upon pressing the rotary switch, type and status are displayed.
V 5.0
37

Service Manual
At the end, a message is displayed informing the user about success or failure of the data
transfer. If the transfer failed, the procedure has to be repeated, else the receiving unit cannot
be operated.
To exit the transfer operating mode, the two units must be separated again by disconnecting
the serial cable and pressing the rotary switch.
4.3.2
The maxiumPC Program
maxiumPC is a simulation of the ME402 on a PC. Along with other tools, the simulation program is available on the software update CD, together with a detailed description.
maxiumPC simulates the ME402 with the same software version with which it is stored on the
CD. Consequently, maxiumPC always has the same version status as the simulated software.
The hardware to be simulated can be selected, which enables simulation of older hardware
versions as well. Among other options, maxiumPC can be used for the following:
Learning and demonstration of the functions and the handling/operation of the ME402
without any need for a physical unit.
Generation of graphics of the screen contents (screenshots) for use in user manuals,
service manuals and sales/marketing literature.
Generation of user-specific settings on a PC, which can then be uploaded to the maxium.
38
V 5.0

Service Manual
Reading out user-specific settings for filing them or transferring them to other maxium
units.
The program can be run on any PC with Microsoft Windows operating system and can be
started from the CD directly. No special installation is required.
4.3.3
Transfer from a maxium Unit to a PC or Vice Versa (Back2Laptop)
The transfer of settings from a ME402 to a PC or vice versa is done in the same way as described in section 4.3.1 for two maxium units, with one of the units simulated on a PC using
the maxiumPC program.
In a first step, using the serial connection cable without null modem adapter, connect the
ME402 to the PC in the same way as for software updates, then start the maxiumPC program.
The data transfer menu must now be displayed on both the ME402 and the simulated unit. You
can now set the transfer mode either on the ME402 or on the simulated unit. The simulated
unit can be loaded with a stored setup from the PC in order to transfer it to the ME402.
Conversely, a setup can be transferred from the ME402 to the PC and can be stored there.
MaxiumPC generates setup files with the X icon of the maxium logo and the extension .EPM.
The files for setting the hardware configuration have the extension .HWC and are also marked
with the X icon.
The programs maxiumPC and marFlash should not be opened simultaneously on the PC since
both of them use the serial interface independently and therefore may impede each other in
accessing the serial interface.
Hardware and Software Statuses, Spare Parts Lists
5.1
General Procedure
Most technical products offered on the market are subject to a continuous process of improvement that leads to technical changes at more or less regular intervals. This poses a problem for the service technician insofar as he must be able to deal with several versions of the
same type of unit. Before starting any repair or servicing work, therefore, it is mandatory to
determine the version status of the unit at hand!
In the case of KLS Martin ME units, you can easily check this via the serial number, which has
the following structure:
ME402 m XX XX XXXXXX
Type of unit
Type of socket module
Hardware status
Software status (not identical w. version number!)
Consecutive production number
In addition, ME402 units indicate the current software version number (a consecutive number)
on the screen during the initial self-test (carried out after turning on the unit).
V 5.0
39

Service Manual
5.2
Hardware Status
The hardware status is determined by:
Revision status of the boards
Revision status of the mechanical construction
Adjustment revision status
The boards feature one or two labels with the module ID number (C40 number or 6-digit
item number), a 6-digit serial number and a version number. As from hardware (HW) status
02, some ME402 boards are additionally equipped with an electronic identifier, i.e. a small
memory that also stores this data and can be accessed by the main controller. From HW02,
the hardware status of any such board therefore can be easily checked via the Service menu.
If the hardware of a board is changed in the way of a technical improvement that does not
affect the interfaces or the intended use of any of the features of the unit, then the version
number is simply incremented and the HW status remains the same. Only if the new version is
no longer connection-compatible to the previous hardware, or if it provides modified or new
features, the module is assigned a new item number and the hardware status is incremented
in addition.
If a board is repaired by the manufacturer, it is marked with an additional repair label. Where
possible, such boards are upgraded to current revision status and are then used as replacement boards (exchange boards) for repairs following comprehensive testing.
The following paragraphs are intended to give you an overview of the various configurations,
with details on the differences as well as the compatibilities between the various revision statuses. If revised boards are released, this is always accompanied by a description of the new
configuration. The corresponding documentation is distributed by the Martin Service
Center through the same channels as this service manual.
40
V 5.0

Service Manual
5.3
ME402 Hardware Configurations and their Components
5.3.1
Hardware Configurations HW00 and HW01
The hardware version 00 (HW00) is the first serial hardware configuration.

HW01 was mainly motivated by the launch of the maxium Beamer MB402. To this end, the
maxium ME402 had to be fitted with a Beamer connector. In addition, the connector for the
screen connecting cable was transferred to the rear side of the controller board.
Apart from general optimizations, the following functions have been newly integrated:
maxium Beamer operation (from SW00.296), new monopolar coagulation currents with lower
output voltages (from SW00.311), improved regime for the SealSafe currents (from
SW00.263), new argon coagulation currents with time regime (Pulsed Argon, from SW00.325),
and an optional baby neutral electrode (from SW00.331). With SW00.331 and higher software versions, the output voltage can be limited to 4 kV by way of a special Service menu
function; besides, the Standard program and the factory-preset (suggested) programs have
been revised, with inclusion of a new Service menu function that allows modification of the
Standard program.
HW00 serial numbers:
ME402x0000 040100 to ME402x0000 040149
ME402x0100 040149 to ME402x0100 040599
First software version in HW00:
00.247
First software version in HW01:
0.263 (does not support the maxium Beamer yet!)

0.296 (supports maxium Beamer)
Upgrade options: Use of the new bipolar board II (C40-2155) with improved impedance
monitoring and bipolar expander support. This requires version 5 or higher for both the main
board and the controller board (so a board upgrade will be necessary if this requirement is not
met). The bipolar board II is supported from SW01.333 onwards.
V 5.0
41

Service Manual
Spare Parts List for HW00 and HW01
No.
Designation
Item/Order
No.
Housing top, preassembled
08-012-00-50
Housing bottom, preassembled
08-012-00-51
Power cord connector assembly
08-024-00-60
Fuse holder for power cord connector assembly
08-034-00-01
Footswitch socket for double-pedal footswitch w. cable
08-010-01-03
Footswitch socket for single-pedal footswitch w. cable
08-010-01-04
Connecting socket for maxium Argon Beamer w. cable (HW01 only)
08-001-00-62
Serial interfaces connector assembly w. cable
08-001-00-63
Equipotential bonding connector
08-027-00-01
10
Loudspeaker w. cable
08-020-00-21
11
Fan w. cable
08-020-00-22
12
Housing foot
08-012-00-52
13
Printed circuit board guide
08-020-00-23
14
Plastic optical fiber
08-018-00-58
15
Internal connecting cable (mains connector socket to power electronics 08-041-00-51

boards)
16
High-voltage cable to monopolar board
08-024-00-66
17
Insulating cover for power manager board
08-016-01-01
18
Set of PE cables
08-032-00-20
20
Front frame w. MENU membrane button
08-010-01-05
21
Front glass w. gaskets
08-010-01-06
22
ON/OFF button w. cable
08-008-00-44
23
Connecting cable for display screen
08-001-00-64
24
Connecting cable for front board
08-001-00-65
25
Connecting cable for activation indicators (LEDs)
08-001-00-66
26
Connecting cable for NE status indicators (LEDs)
08-001-00-67
27
Connecting cable for rotary switch backlight
08-001-00-68
28
Pressure plate for screen cable
08-001-00-69
30
Rotary switch unit, complete
08-006-00-21
31
Rotary switch
08-006-00-22
32
Rotary button
08-006-00-23
33
Hub for rotary button
08-024-00-61
34
Backlight ring for rotary switch
08-003-00-33
35
Radial bearing socket for rotary switch
08-025-00-05
36
Fixing bracket
08-024-00-63
42
V 5.0

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order
No.
40
Socket panel I for Martin accessories (m version), complete
08-003-00-26
41
Socket module carrier, m version, with membrane foil and channel

selector buttons
08-003-01-01
42
Light distributor, m version
08-021-00-03
43
Monopolar socket module I, m version (M1 and M2)
08-022-00-30
44
Bipolar connecting socket (B1), small, m version, w. cable and flange 08-003-00-24
45
Bipolar connecting socket for instruments (B2), m version, w. cable
08-003-00-25
46
NE connecting socket, m/e versions, w. cable and insulating cup
08-024-00-34
47
Optical guide for NE status indicator, m/e versions
08-021-00-03
48
Optical guide for activation indicators
08-021-00-02
49
Insulating cover for monopolar HF socket module
08-016-01-02
50
Socket panel I for international and US-market accessories, i version, complete
08-003-00-27
51
Socket module carrier, i version, with membrane foil and channel

selector buttons
08-003-01-02
52
Light distributor, i version
08-021-00-04
53
Monopolar socket module I, i version (M1 and M2)
08-022-00-31
54
Bipolar connecting socket (B1), single, i version, w. cable
08-003-00-28
55
Bipolar connecting socket for instruments (B2), i version, w. cable
08-003-00-29
56
NE connecting socket, i version, w. cable
08-024-00-62
57
Optical guide for NE status indicator, i version
08-021-00-01
58
08-021-00-02
59
08-016-01-02
60
Socket panel I for Erbe accessories, e version, complete
08-003-00-30
61
Socket module carrier, e version, with membrane foil and channel

selector buttons
08-003-01-03
62
Light distributor for socket module, e version
08-021-00-05
63
Monopolar socket module I, e version (M1 and M2)
08-022-00-32
64
Bipolar combination connecting socket (B1), e/i versions, w. cable
08-003-00-31
65
Bipolar combination connecting socket (B2), e/i versions, w. cable
08-003-00-40
66
NE connecting socket, e/m versions, w. cable and insulating cup
08-024-00-34
67
Optical guide for NE status indicator, e/m versions
08-021-00-03
68
08-021-00-02
69
08-016-01-02
V 5.0
43

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order
No.
70
Main board I, C40-1925, w/o guide rails
08-024-00-64
71
Controller board I, C40-1926
08-005-00-11
72
Power manager board I, C40-1927, w/o insulating cover
08-027-00-17
73
Monopolar board I, C40-1929
08-022-00-33
74
Bipolar board I, C40-1930
08-003-00-32
75
TFT screen module I, w. fluorescent tubes
08-038-00-14
76
Front board II
08-010-01-13
77
Activation indicator board II *
08-027-00-18
78
NE status indicator board II
08-027-00-19
79
Rotary switch backlight board II
08-006-00-27
80
Socket illumination board II*
08-003-00-51
90
ME402 small parts kit
08-018-00-57
T6.3A fuse cartridge for mains connector socket
08-034-00-12
M1.6A fuse cartridge
08-034-00-28
08-034-00-62
Protective cover for bipolar socket B2, w. opening for 8mm plug
08-027-00-20
Current data carrier for software update

* Items 77 and 80 must be replaced pair-wise if version I has still been used!
44
V 5.0

Service Manual
08-020-00-21
08-032-00-20
08-024-00-60
08-027-00-17
08-027-00-01
08-001-00-63
08-001-00-62*
08-010-01-03
08-010-01-04
15 17 10
18
72
B82625-B2602-M1
6A / 250V~
2 x 0,18mH
16 14 74
08-016-01-01
73
08-041-00-51
08-003-00-32
08-024-00-66
08-018-00-57
08-022-00-33
Bottom Part of Unit, HW00 and HW01, with Boards
913046
lt1057 0406
47 M SD
530-030 10
V 15487
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
47 M SD
530-030 10
F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
913046
530-030 10
530-030 10
lt1057 0406
913046
lt1057 0406
STS 0504
1278637
X17
GT1
lt 2022
lt 2022
0443
X18
GT2
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
0443
X16
C40-1925
0605/038 VXX
X15
VDC
GND
STS 0550 'LF'

1278636
70
13
11
71
12
08-012-00-51
08-024-00-64
08-020-00-23
08-020-00-22
08-005-00-11
08-012-00-52
STS 0606
1348633 'LF'
* HW01 only
V 5.0
45

Service Manual
Main board I: 08-024-00-64, spare part no. 70 (C40-1925)
X1
Only version V03, as part of

HW01, features the interface
required for connection of the
maxium Beamer MB402. Older versions do not support the
Beamer. The version with
Beamer interface is backwardcompatible and as such available also as a spare part for
HW00.
F1
47 M SD
X7 monopolar board connector
47 M SD
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
X6 bipolar board connector
F2
F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
X21
X2
X3 Power Manager board connector 1
to X2 at
bipolar board
STS 0504
1278637
X17
to X3 at
Monopolar Board
Spare boards are delivered

without guide rails. Therefore,
these rails must be transferred
from the old part to the replacement part.
X13
to X4 and X5 at
monopolar board
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
X18
X15
X16
GND
X8
The main board does not provide any adjusting positions. If

it is replaced, the setting of the
power manager board must be
checked, however.
X12
X5 controller board connector

X9
X14
to X1 at
connector module
Controller board I: 08-005-00-11, spare part no. 71 (C40-1926)

X10
X4
X5
X9
X2
X8
X11
X1 Board connector
STS 0848
PBRM0816
939387
X500
X6
With HW00, the X2 connector

for the LCD screen is still located on the upper side (board
version V02).
From HW01, this connector is
located on the underside of the
board in standing position in
version V03, lying from V04
onwards. Only the latter version (connector fitted to rear
side, lying) is available as a
spare part, which can also be
used for HW00.
The one-wire bus function which is required for HW01 if this version is to be equipped with a
bipolar board II (HW01b) is not available on this controller board but can be added as part of
the HW01b upgrade.
The software versions 2.368 or higher cannot be installed on the controller board I because the
program memory space of this board is limited to 1 MB. Therefore, all functions newly added
with SW2.368 or higher software versions, such as transferring the units settings to another
ME402 or to a PC (Back2Back function), are only available for HW00 and HW01 if the program
46
V 5.0

Service Manual
memory has previously been expanded. This can be done in two ways: the unit can be subjected to a hardware upgrade by the manufacturer, or the controller board I can be replaced
with a new board having an expanded memory. In this latter case, however, all user-specific
settings will be lost.
The controller board I has no battery backup and therefore no clock. Consequently, it is not
possible to use service functions requiring time management. This cannot be upgraded either.
Power manager board I: 08-027-00-17, spare part no. 72 (C40-1927)

DC -
+15V +5V FR DCM
PSO
PR UR
REL USO
xxxx
VH
X11
SFH 350 V
X8
PSO
X9
GND
101
X6
DCM
X7
USO
101
WDC
CNY65
V415 J 19
X5
CNY65
V415 J 19
CNY65
V415 J 19
C40-1927
1205/031 VXX
200071-10
0.125mH
2.0 A
10
X1
X4
PVW
X2
ME402 Powermanager 1
Xnummeriert.dsf 27.08.06
GND
X3
I2
This spare part is shipped without protective cover and corresponding

mounts. These as well as the plastic
optical fiber must be transferred from
the old part to the new part.
The power manager board may never
be plugged into the main board if the
unit has already been connected to the
mains!
The spare part comes pre-adjusted.
The settings must be checked during
installation and corrected if necessary.
For procedure, see section 10.2.1.
Monopolar board I: 08-022-00-33, spare part no. 73 (C40-1929)

This spare part comes fully adjusted,
so no readjustment is necessary during installation. However, it is necessary to check the optical receiver on
the power manager board for correct
adjustment. For procedure, see
section 10.2.1.
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
X1 Board connector
V 5.0
47

Service Manual
Bipolar board I: 08-003-00-32, spare part no. 74 (C40-1930)
X4
X3
X2
C40-1930
4904/015 VXX
IMP2 IMP1 IC
F2
IMP2

so no readjustment is necessary during installation. As, however, the optical link must be interrupted during
board replacement, its setting must be
checked for correctness in acc. with
section 10.2.1.
IMP1 IC
X1 Board connector
F1
48
V 5.0
V 5.0
46
44
45
08-024-00-34
08-003-00-24
08-003-00-25
Socket module
m version 08-003-00-26
57 78 52
56
54
55
08-003-00-28
08-003-00-29
Socket module
i version 08-003-00-27
67 78 62 66
64
65
08-003-00-40
08-027-00-18*
08-021-00-02
08-022-00-31
08-003-01-03
08-003-00-51*
08-027-00-18*
08-021-00-02
08-022-00-32
08-021-00-01
08-003-00-25
08-003-00-24
08-024-00-34
08-027-00-19
08-001-00-67
08-038-00-14
47 46
08-003-00-31
08-003-00-51*
08-032-00-20
08-001-00-64
08-001-00-65
08-010-01-13
08-001-00-66
08-003-00-51*
23
24
76
25
80 42 77 48 43 41
08-003-01-01
08-022-00-30
08-021-00-02
08-027-00-18*
08-021-00-03
08-001-00-69
08-001-00-68
08-008-00-44
08-010-01-05
27 28
44
08-024-00-34
C40-2006
0405/017 VXX
26 78
08-021-00-05
08-003-01-02
08-006-00-21
75
08-027-00-19
08-022-00-30
C40-2175
4806/040 VXX
C 40-1928
XXXX/XXX
08-021-00-02
08-021-00-02
08-006-00-27
18
08-024-00-62
08-027-00-18*
30
08-021-00-04
08-003-00-51*
79
08-027-00-19
08-003-01-01
20 22
08-021-00-01
08-021-00-01
08-027-00-19
47 78 42
08-021-00-01

Service Manual
Front Part for HW00 and HW01, Socket Modules and Other Assemblies
C40-2006
0405/017 VXX
45
Rear side of front part with m-version socket module
41
80
77 48
43
51
80
77 58
53
61
80
77 68
63
C40-2006
0405/034 VXX
Socket module
e version 08-003-00-30
49
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DISCONNECT THE ELECTRIC
POWER BEFORE SERVICE
H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N

Service Manual
Front board I: (C40-1928)
X1
X13
X4
X8
X5
X7
X6
C40-1928
4503/008 VXX
This board is no longer available as a

spare part. If it needs to be replaced,
use the following connection- and
function-compatible board:
X9
X2
Front board II: 08-010-01-13, spare part no. 76 (C40-2175-10)

X4 X10
X1
X13
X7
C40-2175
4806/040 VXX
X8
X5
X6
ME402 Frontplatine 2 Xnummeriert.dsf 16.01.08
X2
X9
The spacer on the rear side of the

board is not included in the spare part
delivery and therefore must be transferred from the old board to the new
board. X4 occupies a slightly different
position.
Screen module I: 08-038-00-14, spare part no. 75

This spare part is delivered complete
with two fluorescent tubes. Note that
the screen module is not an exchange
part (i.e. not available as a repaired
part).

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N
THE TFT COLOR LCD CONTAINS

COLD CATHODE FLUORESCENT
LAMPS. PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL
ORDINANCES OR REGULATIONS
FOR ITS DISPOSAL.
A2013X0702174
SERIAL : B3A21050
PANEL : A2013X0702174
MODEL: NL6448BC26-01
H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N
50
V 5.0

Service Manual
Activation indicator board I:
(C40-1928-B)
Socket illumination board I:
(C40-1928-A)
C40-1928-B
X14
X10
C40-1928-A
X15
The socket illumination board is powered by the

activation indicator board via a plug-and-socket
connection. Owing to the design of this connection, both boards must be dismounted if one of
them needs to be replaced. As this process involves disassembly of the entire socket module,
the plug-in connection has been modified.
Both of these boards are no longer available as
spare parts.
The following items should be used as spare parts instead:

Activation indicator board II:
08-027-00-18, spare part no. 77 (C40-2173-11) and
Socket illumination board II:
08-003-00-51, spare part no. 80 (C40-2173-14)
Please note that these two boards are not conX10
nection-compatible with the previous models! If
one of them needs to be replaced, the other one
must be replaced as well!
C40-2173-11
X4
X3
C40-2173-14
NE status indicator board I: C40-1928-C

C40-1928-C
X1
This board is no longer available as a spare part.

If it needs to be replaced, the following board of
identical design should be used:
NE status indicator board II: 08-027-00-19, spare part no. 78 (C40-2173-12)

C40-2173-12
Spare part for NE status indicator board I

X1
V 5.0
51

Service Manual
Rotary switch backlight board I: (C40-1928-D)
C40-1928-D
This board is no longer available as a spare part.

If it needs to be replaced, the following board of
identical design should be used:
X11
Rotary switch backlight board II: 08-006-00-27, spare part no. 79 (C40-2175-11)
C40-2175-11
Spare part for rotary switch backlight board I.
X11
52
35 90 34
33
32
30
08-024-00-63
08-025-00-05
08-024-00-61
08-006-00-23
08-006-00-21
08-003-00-33
36
08-018-00-57
31
08-006-00-22
Rotary switch assembly I: 80-006-00-21, spare part no. 30

The rotary switch unit is available either complete or in individual components. The rotary button is simply plugged in place
and can be removed with little
effort.
When replacing the rotary
switch, it is also necessary to
remove the backlight board,
which must subsequently be
reinserted correctly into the optical guide.
V 5.0

Service Manual
5.3.2
Hardware Configuration 02
The main board C40-1925 has been replaced by the new version C40-2165 which, however, is
not backward-compatible with HW00 and HW01, and the power manager board C40-1927 has
been replaced by the new version C40-2169 (also not backward-compatible with HW00 and
HW01). Apart from a newly added electronic version recognition function, these two modules
do not provide any new functions. The connector plugs of choke L6 have been modified. This
also necessitated a new version II of the monopolar board (C40-2224), which differs from version I only with regard to plug connector X4, and a new version II of the monopolar socket
module, also fitted with a new connector.
The bipolar board I (C40-1930) has been replaced with the bipolar board II (C40-2155). Board
II has a new impedance monitor offering a higher resolution for higher tissue resistances a
change necessitated by the introduction of the Auto Start/Stop functions. Moreover, the bipolar
board II supports the use of the bipolar port expander, which allows connecting two instruments (for bipolar cutting and bipolar coagulation) to the bipolar output B2 in the Martin (m)
version. This is controlled via the instrument recognition function that is available from
SW1.336.
To ensure that the old hardware configuration can be distinguished from the new one, an electronic module recognition function has been integrated for the major boards. This function also
allows displaying the hardware versions and serial numbers of the various modules for servicing purposes.
Serial numbers:
ME402x0201 050600 to ME402x0201 071499
Lowest software version required: 1.336
V 5.0
53

Service Manual
Spare Parts List for HW02
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
08-012-00-50
08-012-00-51
08-024-00-60
08-034-00-01
08-010-01-03
08-010-01-04
Connecting socket for maxium
08-001-00-63
08-027-00-01
10
08-020-00-21
11
Fan w. cable
08-020-00-22
12
Housing foot
08-012-00-52
13
08-020-00-23
14
08-018-00-58
15
Internal connecting cable (mains connector socket to power electronics boards)
08-041-00-51
16
08-024-00-66
17
08-016-01-01
18
Set of PE cables
08-032-00-20
20
08-010-01-05
21
08-010-01-06
22
08-008-00-44
23
08-001-00-64
24
08-001-00-65
25
08-001-00-66
26
08-001-00-67
27
08-001-00-68
28
08-001-00-69
30
08-006-00-21
31
Rotary switch
08-006-00-22
32
Rotary button
08-006-00-23
33
08-024-00-61
34
08-003-00-33
35
08-025-00-05
36
Fixing bracket
08-024-00-63
54
Argon Beamer w. cable
08-001-00-62
V 5.0

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
40
Socket panel II for Martin accessories (m version), complete
08-003-01-26
41
Socket module carrier, m version, with membrane foil and

channel selector buttons
08-003-01-01
42
08-021-00-03
43
Monopolar socket module II, m version (M1 and M2)
08-022-01-30
44
Bipolar connecting socket (B1), small, m version, w. cable and

flange
08-003-00-24
45
Bipolar connecting socket for instruments (B2), m version, w.

cable
08-003-00-25
46
NE connecting socket, m/e versions, w. cable and insulating

cup
08-024-00-34
47
Optical guide for NE status indicator, m/e versions
08-021-00-01
48
08-021-00-02
49
08-016-01-02
50
Socket panel II for international and US-market accessories, i

version, complete
08-003-01-27
51
Socket module carrier, i version, with membrane foil and channel selector buttons
08-003-01-02
52
Light distributor, i version
08-021-00-04
53
Monopolar socket module II, i version (M1 and M2)
08-022-01-31
54
08-003-00-28
55
Bipolar connecting socket for instruments (B2), i version, w.

cable
08-003-00-29
56
08-024-00-62
57
Optical guide for NE status indicator, i version
08-021-00-01
58
08-021-00-02
59
08-016-01-02
60
Socket panel II for Erbe accessories, e version, complete
08-003-01-30
61
Socket module carrier, e version, with membrane foil and

08-003-01-03
62
Light distributor for e version socket module
08-021-00-05
63
Monopolar socket module II, e version (M1 and M2)
08-022-01-32
64
Bipolar combination connecting socket (B1), e/i versions, w.

cable
08-003-00-31
65
Bipolar combination socket (B2), e/i versions, w. cable
08-003-00-40
66
NE connecting socket, e/m versions, w. cable and insulating

cup
08-024-00-34
67
Optical guide for NE status indicator, e/m versions
08-021-00-01
68
08-021-00-02
69
08-016-01-02
V 5.0
55

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
70
Main board II, C40-2165, w/o guide rails
08-024-00-65
71
Controller board II, C40-2217
08-005-00-12
72
Power manager board II, C40-2169, w/o insulating cover
08-027-01-17
73
Monopolar board II, C40-2224
08-022-01-33
74
Bipolar board II, C40-2155
08-003-00-34
75
08-038-00-14
76
Front board II, C40-2175-10
08-010-01-13
77
Activation indicator board II, C40-2173-11
08-027-00-18
78
NE status indicator board II, C40-2173-12
08-027-00-19
79
Rotary switch backlight board II, C40-2175-11
08-006-00-27
80
Socket illumination board II, C40-2173-14
08-003-00-51
90
08-018-00-57
08-034-00-12
08-034-00-28
08-034-00-62
08-027-00-20
Current data carrier for software update*
56
V 5.0
13
11
71
12
08-020-00-23
08-020-00-22
08-005-00-12
08-012-00-52
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
STS 0547 'LF'

1278637
530-030 10
530-030 10
530-030 10
47 M SD
47 M SD
70
08-024-00-65
V 15487
08-012-00-51
B82625-B2602-M1
6A / 250V~
2 x 0,18mH
16 14 74
08-032-00-20
08-024-00-60
08-027-01-17
08-027-00-01
08-001-00-63
08-001-00-62
08-010-01-03
08-010-01-04
15 17 10
18
3
72
9
8
7
5
6
08-016-01-01
08-020-00-21
08-041-00-51
08-003-00-34
08-018-00-57
08-024-00-66
73
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
STS 0606
1348633 'LF'
V 5.0
08-022-01-33

Service Manual
Bottom Part of Unit, HW02
lt1057 0406
913046
530-030 10
F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
lt1057 0406
913046
lt1057 0406
913046
GT1
X17
lt 2355
0523
lt 2355
0523
X18
GT2
C40-2165
0606/029 VXX
STS 0550 'LF'

1278636
GND
X16
VDC
X15
57

Service Manual
Main board II: 08-024-00-65, spare part no. 70 (C40-2165)
X1
Spare boards are delivered without

guide rails. Therefore, these must be
transferred from the old board to the
new one.
F1
47 M SD
47 M SD
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
F2
F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
X21
The main board does not provide any

adjusting positions. If it is replaced,
the setting of the power manager
board must be checked for correctness, however.
X2
to X2 at
bipolar board
STS 0547 'LF'

1278637
X17
X18
X13
to X4 and X5 at
monopolar board
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
to X3 at
Monopolar Board
X15
X16
GND
X12

X9
X14
to X1 at
connector module
Controller board II: 08-005-00-12, spare part no. 71 (C40-2217)

X10
X4
X5
X9
X2
X11
X1 Board connector
STS 0848
PBRM0816
939387
X500
58
X8
The first version (V00) does not include a backup battery yet and
therefore no clock. This also means
that service functions involving time
management are not available. Moreover, version V00 cannot be upgraded
in this respect.
X6
V 5.0

Service Manual
Power manager board II: 08-027-01-17, spare part no. 72 (C40-2169)
DC -
15V 5V FR DCM
PSO
PR UR
REL USO
xxxx
X11
SFH 350 V
101
X6
DCM
WDC
CNY65
V415 J 19
X8
X7
USO
PSO
X9
GND
101
VH
GND
X5
CNY65
V415 J 19
CNY65
V415 J 19
5VW
X3
I2
X4
PVW
C40-2169
0406/034 VXX
10
200071-10
0.125mH
2.0 A
10
10
X1

Note that the power manager board
may never be plugged into the main
board if the unit has already been
connected to the mains!
X2
The spare part is delivered pre-adjusted. Its setting must be checked during installation and
corrected if necessary. For procedure, see section 10.2.1.
Monopolar board II: 08-022-01-33, spare part no. 73 (C40-2224)

The only difference between versions I
and II consists in the design of connector X4.
so no readjustment is required during
installation. However, it is necessary
to check the optical receiver located
on the power manager board for correct setting. For procedure, see
section 10.2.1.
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
X1 Board connector
Bipolar board II: 08-003-00-34, spare part no. 74 (C40-2155)

X4
X3

so no readjustment is necessary during installation.
X2
However, as the optical link must be

interrupted during board replacement,
correct setting must subsequently be
checked on the power manager board
in acc. with section 10.2.1.
C40-2155
3805/045 VXX
GND
GND
X1 Board connector
V 5.0
59
60
46
44
45
08-024-00-34
08-003-00-24
08-003-00-25
Socket module
m version 08-003-01-26
57 78 52
56
54
55
08-003-00-28
08-003-00-29
Socket module
i version 08-003-01-27
67 78 62 66
64
65
08-003-00-31
08-003-00-40
08-003-00-51
08-027-00-18
08-021-00-02
08-022-01-31
08-003-01-03
08-003-00-51
08-027-00-18
08-021-00-02
08-022-01-32
08-021-00-01
08-003-00-25
08-003-00-24
08-024-00-34
08-027-00-19
08-001-00-67
08-038-00-14
08-032-00-20
47 46
44
08-024-00-34
C40-2225
2106/015 VXX
26 78
08-021-00-05
08-003-01-02
08-006-00-21
75
08-027-00-19
08-022-01-30
C40-2175
4806/040 VXX
C 40-1928
XXXX/XXX
08-021-00-02
08-021-00-02
18
08-024-00-62
08-027-00-18
08-006-00-27
30
08-021-00-04
08-003-00-51
79
08-027-00-19
08-003-01-01
08-001-00-65
08-010-01-13
08-001-00-66
08-003-00-51
27 28
23
24
76
25
80 42 77 48 43 41
08-003-01-01
08-022-01-30
08-021-00-02
08-027-00-18
08-021-00-03
08-001-00-64
08-001-00-68
08-008-00-44
08-010-01-05
08-001-00-69
20 22
08-021-00-01
08-021-00-01
08-027-00-19
47 78 42
08-021-00-01

Service Manual
Front Part, HW02
C40-2225
2106/015 VXX
45
Rear side of front part with m-version socket module
41
80
77 48
43
51
80
77 58
53
61
80
77 68
63
C40-2225
2106/024 VXX
Socket module
e version 08-003-01-30
V 5.0

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N

Service Manual

X1
X4 X10
X13
X7
C40-2175
4806/040 VXX
X8
X5
X6
X2
X9

board.

This spare part is delivered complete
with two fluorescent tubes.
Note that the screen module is not an
exchange part (i.e. not available as a
repaired part).

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N

FOR ITS DISPOSAL.
A2013X0702174
SERIAL : B3A21050
PANEL : A2013X0702174
H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N
Activation indicator board II 08-027-00-18, spare part no. 77 (C40-2173-11)

X10
C40-2173-11
X4
To facilitate installation, the plug and the socket

of the connection between the activation indicator board and the socket illumination board have
been interchanged. In all other respects, board
II is identical with its predecessor.
Socket illumination board II: 08-003-00-51, spare part no. 80 (C40-2173-14)

To facilitate installation, the plug and the socket
of the connection between the activation indicator board and the socket illumination board have
X3
C40-2173-14
been interchanged. In all other respects, board
II is identical with its predecessor.
V 5.0
61

Service Manual
C40-2173-12
Version II is connection- and functioncompatible with version I.
X1
C40-2175-11
Version II is connection- and functioncompatible with version I.
X11
35 90 34
33
32
30
08-024-00-63
08-025-00-05
08-024-00-61
08-006-00-23
08-006-00-21
5.3.3
08-003-00-33
36
08-018-00-57
31
08-006-00-22

effort.
reinserted correctly into the optical guide.
Hardware Configuration HW03
This hardware configuration does not represent a production status of its own. Rather, some
HW02 devices have been rebuilt for limitation of the monopolar output voltage a feature that
is a regular part of serial production only in units with hardware status 04 or higher.
The HW03 configuration was built only in the KLS Martin (m) version. Nonetheless, it is possible to retrofit the front part with connections for other accessories. As the HW03 front is identical with that of HW02, the HW02 spare part numbers are to be used when changing over to a
different socket module.
62
V 5.0

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
08-012-00-50
08-012-00-51
08-024-00-60
08-034-00-01
08-010-01-03
08-010-01-04
08-001-00-63
08-027-00-01
10
08-020-00-21
11
Fan w. cable
08-020-00-22
12
Housing foot
08-012-00-52
13
08-020-00-23
14
08-018-00-58
15
08-041-00-51
16
08-024-00-66
17
08-016-01-01
18
Set of PE cables
08-032-00-20
20
08-010-01-05
21
08-010-01-06
22
08-008-00-44
23
08-001-00-64
24
08-001-00-65
25
08-001-00-66
26
08-001-00-67
27
08-001-00-68
28
08-001-00-69
30
08-006-00-21
31
Rotary switch
08-006-00-22
32
Rotary button
08-006-00-23
33
08-024-00-61
34
08-003-00-33
35
08-025-00-05
36
Fixing bracket
08-024-00-63
V 5.0
08-001-00-62
63

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
40
Socket panel II for Martin accessories (m version), complete
08-003-01-26
41

08-003-01-01
42
08-021-00-03
43
08-022-01-30
44

flange
08-003-00-24
45

cable
08-003-00-25
46

cup
08-024-00-34
47
Optical guide for NE status indicator, m version
08-021-00-01
48
08-021-00-02
49
08-016-01-02
50
Socket panel for international and US-market accessories, i

version, complete
08-003-01-27
60
Socket panel for Erbe accessories, e version, complete
08-003-01-30
70
Main board III, C40-2346, w/o guide rails
08-024-00-67
71
Controller board II, C40-2217
08-005-00-12
72
Power manager board III, C40-2337, w/o insulating cover
08-027-02-17
73
Monopolar board III, C40-2281
08-022-00-34
74
08-003-00-34
75
08-038-00-14
76
Front board II, C40-2175-10
08-010-01-13
77
Activation indicator board II, C40-2173-11
08-027-00-18
78
NE status indicator board II, C40-2173-12
08-027-00-19
79
Rotary switch backlight board II, C40-2175-11
08-006-00-27
80
Socket illumination board II, C40-2173-14
08-003-00-51
90
08-018-00-57
08-034-00-12
08-034-00-28
08-034-00-62
08-027-00-20
Current data carrier for software update*
64
V 5.0
13
11
71
12
08-020-00-23
08-020-00-22
08-005-00-12
08-012-00-52
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
STS 0547 'LF'

1278637
530-030 10
530-030 10
47 M SD
47 M SD
70
08-024-00-67
530-030 10
V 15487
08-012-00-51
B82625-B2602-M1
6A / 250V~
2 x 0,18mH
16 14 74
08-032-00-20
08-024-00-60
08-027-02-17
08-027-00-01
08-001-00-63
08-001-00-62
08-010-01-03
08-010-01-04
15 17 10
18
3
72
9
8
7
5
6
08-016-01-01
08-020-00-21
08-041-00-51
08-003-00-34
08-018-00-57
08-024-00-66
73
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
STS 0606
1348633 'LF'
V 5.0
08-022-00-34

Service Manual
lt1057 0406
913046
530-030 10
F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
lt1057 0406
913046
lt1057 0406
913046
GT1
X17
lt 2355
0406
lt 2355
0406
X18
GT2
C40-2346
1906/004 VXX
X16
GND
STS 0550 'LF'

1278636
X15
VDC
65

Service Manual
Main board III: 08-024-00-67, spare part no. 70 (C40-2346)
X1

guide rails.
F1
F2
47 M SD
47 M SD
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
X27

F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
X21
X2
to X2 at
bipolar board
STS 0547 'LF'

1278637
X17
X18
X13
to X4 and X5 at
monopolar board
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
to X3 at
Monopolar Board
X16
GND
X15
X8
X12

X9
X14
to X1 at
connector module
Controller board II: 08-005-00-12, spare part no. 71 (C40-2217)

X10
X4
X5
X9
X2
X8
X11
X1 Board connector
STS 0848
PBRM0816
939387
X500
66
The HW02 controller board is used in

this configuration.
X6
V 5.0

Service Manual
Power manager board III: 08-027-02-17, spare part no. 72 (C40-2337)
DCB
DC -
DCM
USO
X7
xxxx
SFH 350 V
VH
X11
PSO
X8
xxxx
USO
X9
5V
15V
GND
DCM
SFH 350 V
X13
DCB
10
101
PSO
X14
CNY65
V415 J 19
WDC
REL
CNY65
V415 J 19
C40-2337
2606/001 VXX
10
X4 X3
I2
PVW
200071-10
0.125mH
2.0 A
10
WD5
101
CNY65
V415 J 19
10
X1
X5
GND

Note that the power manager board
may never be plugged into the main
board if the unit has already been
X2
The spare part is delivered pre-adjusted. Its setting must be checked during installation and
Monopolar board III: 08-022-00-34, spare part no. 73 (C40-2281)

The spare part is delivered preadjusted. However, it is necessary to
check the control signals of the voltage regulator and the optical receiver
on the power manager board for proper adjustment. For procedure, see section 10.2.2.
GND
NEI
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
X1 Board connector
Bipolar board II: (08-003-00-34, spare part no. 74 (C40-2155)

X4
X3

X2

correct adjustment must subsequently
be checked in acc. with section 10.2.2.
C40-2155
3805/045 VXX
GND
GND
X1 Board connector
V 5.0
67

Service Manual
08-003-01-01
08-003-00-51
08-022-01-30
08-001-00-66
08-021-00-02
08-010-01-13
08-027-00-18
08-001-00-65
08-021-00-03
08-001-00-64
20 22
08-001-00-69
08-001-00-68
08-008-00-44
08-010-01-05
Front Part of HW03, Boards and Modules
27 28
23
24
76
25
80 42 77 48 43 41

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N
C40-2175
4806/040 VXX
C 40-1928
XXXX/XXX
C40-2225
2106/015 VXX

44
45
08-003-00-24
08-003-00-25
08-024-00-34
47 46
08-021-00-01
08-038-00-14
26 78
08-027-00-19
75
08-001-00-67
18
08-032-00-20
08-006-00-27
30
08-006-00-21
H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N
79
08-003-01-01
08-003-00-51
08-027-00-18
08-021-00-02
08-022-01-30
The HW03 front part is identical with that of HW02.
41
80
77 48
43
In the HW03 configuration, the socket module is

available only in the KLS Martin (m) version,
since the HW03 configuration is the result of a
modification of m-version HW02 units; no i
or e versions of the unit have been built in
this configuration. However, just as with HW02,
the m-type HW03 units can be retrofitted with
other socket modules. For corresponding spare
parts, see the HW02 spare parts list.
68
44
45
08-024-00-34
08-003-00-24
08-003-00-25
08-021-00-01
46
08-027-00-19
47 78 42
08-021-00-01
C40-2225
2106/015 VXX
V 5.0

Service Manual
X1
X4 X10
X13
X7
C40-2175
4806/040 VXX
X8
X5
X6
X2
X9

board.

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N

FOR ITS DISPOSAL.
A2013X0702174
SERIAL : B3A21050
PANEL : A2013X0702174
H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N
Activation indicator board II 08-027-00-18, spare part no. 77 (C40-2173-11)

The HW02 board is used in this configuration.
X10
C40-2173-11
X4
Socket illumination board II: 08-003-00-51, spare part no. 80 (C40-2173-14)

X3
V 5.0
C40-2173-14
69

Service Manual
C40-2173-12

X1
C40-2175-11
X11
70
35 90 34
33
32
30
08-024-00-63
08-025-00-05
08-024-00-61
08-006-00-23
08-006-00-21
08-003-00-33
36
08-018-00-57
31
08-006-00-22

effort.
reinserted correctly into the optical guide!
V 5.0

Service Manual
5.3.4
Hardware Configurations HW04 and HW05
Compared with HW02, this configuration newly offers the additional option of limiting the monopolar HF output voltage to defined levels. Besides, the properties of some monopolar currents have been optimized by a general improvement of the HF output current regulators.
Moreover, relative to HW02, a new main board III (C40-2346), a new power manager board
III (C40-2337) and a new monopolar board III (C40-2281) have been used in this configuration. These three boards had already been introduced with HW03.
Due to the manufacturers discontinuation of an electronic component, the controller board has
been redesigned (version III, C40-2327). This included a modification of the screen connecting
cable and its connector. Besides, the converter for the fluorescent lamps of the screen module
has been transferred from the controller board to the front board. And taking future extensions
into consideration, SPI bus addressing has also been changed to allow connection of additional
users.
All LEDs located on the boards of the front part have been replaced with SMD versions. This
also necessitated changes regarding the optical guides of the front part. The board with the NE
status indicators has been additionally equipped with a hardware identifier to enable the operating program to identify the socket configuration.
The front board IIIa (C40-2424) now features the converter for the fluorescent lamps, which
was previously located on the controller board.
As a new screen module with a different connector for the fluorescent tubes was needed, the
front board had to be adapted as well (version IIIb, C40-2471). These changes resulted in the
HW05 system configuration.
ME402x0402 071500 to ME402x0201 071699
from ME402x0402 071700
V 5.0
71

Service Manual
Spare Parts List for HW04 and HW05
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
08-012-00-50
08-012-00-51
08-024-00-60
08-034-00-01
08-010-01-03
08-010-01-04
08-001-00-63
08-027-00-01
10
08-020-00-21
11
Fan w. cable
08-020-00-22
12
Housing foot
08-012-00-52
13
08-020-00-23
14
08-018-00-58
15
08-041-00-51
16
08-024-00-66
17
08-016-01-01
18
Set of PE cables
08-032-00-20
20
08-010-01-05
21
08-010-01-06
22
08-008-00-44
23
08-001-00-26
24
08-001-00-27
25
08-001-00-66
27
Connecting cable for rotary switch backlight and NE status

indicators
08-001-00-68
30
Rotary switch unit II, complete
08-006-00-28
31
Rotary switch
08-006-00-22
32
Rotary button
08-006-00-23
33
08-024-00-61
34
08-003-00-36
35
08-025-00-05
36
Fixing bracket
08-024-00-63
72
08-001-00-62
V 5.0

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
40
Socket panel III for Martin accessories (m version), complete
08-003-01-28
41

08-003-01-01
42
Light distributor, SMD, m version
08-021-00-26
43
08-022-01-30
44

flange
08-003-00-24
45

cable
08-003-00-25
46

cup
08-024-00-34
47
Optical guide for NE status indicator, SMD, m version
08-021-00-07
48
Optical guide for activation indicators, SMD
08-021-00-08
49
Insulating cover for HF sockets
08-016-01-02
50
Socket panel III for international and US-market accessories, i

version, complete
08-003-00-35
51
08-003-01-02
52
Light distributor, SMD, i version
08-021-00-09
53
08-022-01-31
54
08-003-00-28
55
Bipolar connecting socket for instruments (B2), i version, w.

cable
08-003-00-29
56
08-024-00-62
57
Optical guide for NE status indicator, SMD, i version
08-021-00-07
58
08-021-00-08
59
08-016-01-02
60
Socket panel III for Erbe accessories, e version, complete
08-003-02-30
61
Socket module carrier, e version, with membrane foil and chan- 08-003-01-03
nel selector buttons
62
Light distributor, SMD, for e version socket module
08-021-00-10
63
08-022-01-32
64
08-003-00-31
65
08-003-00-40
66

cup
08-024-00-34
67
Optical guide for NE status indicator, SMD, e/m versions
08-021-00-07
68
08-022-00-08
69
08-016-01-02
V 5.0
73

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
70
Main board III, C40-2346, w/o guide rails
08-024-00-67
71
Controller board III, C40-2327
08-005-00-13
72
Power manager board III, C40-2337, w/o insulating cover
08-027-02-17
73
Monopolar board III, C40-2281
08-022-00-34
74
08-003-00-34
75
TFT screen module I with 2 separate fluorescent tubes for

HW04*
08-038-00-14
75
TFT screen module II w. duplex fluorescent tube for HW05*
08-038-00-15
76
Front board IIIa, C40-2424, for HW04*
08-010-01-14
76
Front board IIIb, C40-2471 for HW05*
08-010-01-15
77
Activation indicator board III, C40-2425-11
08-027-00-23
78a
NE status indicator board III, C40-2425-21, Martin ID*
08-027-00-24
78b
NE status indicator board III, C40-2425-22, International ID*
08-027-00-25
78c
NE status indicator board III, C40-2425-23, Erbe accessories

ID*
08-027-00-27
79
Rotary switch backlight board III, C402423
08-006-00-29
80
Socket illumination board III, C40-2425-14
08-003-00-55
90
08-018-00-57
08-034-00-12
08-034-00-28
08-034-00-62
08-027-00-20
74
V 5.0
13
11
71
12
08-020-00-23
08-020-00-22
08-005-00-13
08-012-00-52
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
STS 0547 'LF'

1278637
530-030 10
530-030 10
47 M SD
47 M SD
70
08-024-00-67
530-030 10
V 15487
08-012-00-51
B82625-B2602-M1
6A / 250V~
2 x 0,18mH
16 14 74
08-032-00-20
08-024-00-60
08-027-02-17
08-027-00-01
08-001-00-63
08-001-00-62
08-010-01-03
08-010-01-04
15 17 10
18
3
72
9
8
7
5
6
08-016-01-01
08-020-00-21
08-041-00-51
08-003-00-34
08-018-00-57
08-024-00-66
73
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
STS 0606
1348633 'LF'
V 5.0
08-022-00-34

Service Manual
Bottom Part of Unit, HW04 and HW05
lt1057 0406
913046
530-030 10
F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
lt1057 0406
913046
lt1057 0406
913046
GT1
X17
lt 2355
0406
lt 2355
0406
X18
GT2
C40-2346
1906/004 VXX
X16
GND
STS 0550 'LF'

1278636
X15
VDC
75

Service Manual
Main board III: 08-024-00-67, spare part no. 70 (C40-2346)
X1

guide rails.
F1
F2
47 M SD
47 M SD
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
X27

F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
X21
X2
to X2 at
bipolar board
STS 0547 'LF'

1278637
X17
X18
X13
to X4 and X5 at
monopolar board
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
to X3 at
Monopolar Board
X16
GND
X15
X8
X12

X9
X14
to X1 at
connector module
Controller board III: 08-005-00-13, spare part no. 71 (C40-2327)

X10
X4
X2
X8
X9
X11
X3
Due to discontinuation of the graphics

controller, this board had to be redesigned. In this process, the converter
for the fluorescent tubes has been
transferred to the front board and the
X2 connector for the display screen
has been refitted with a new plug. This
board is not backward-compatible.
X1 Board connector
76
V 5.0

Service Manual
DCM
DCB
DC -
USO
X7
xxxx
SFH 350 V
VH
X11
PSO
X8
xxxx
USO
X9
5V
15V
GND
DCM
SFH 350 V
X13
DCB
10
101
PSO
X14
CNY65
V415 J 19
WDC
REL
C40-2337
2606/001 VXX
101
CNY65
V415 J 19
10
PVW
200071-10
0.125mH
2.0 A
10
I2
X4 X3
CNY65
V415 J 19
10
WD5
X1
X5
GND
This redesigned module offers additional monitoring and improved control

functions, compared with its predecessors.
The spare part is shipped without protective cover and corresponding
X2
Note that the power manager board may never be plugged into the main board if the unit has
already been connected to the mains!
The spare part is delivered pre-adjusted. The settings must be checked during installation and
Monopolar board III: (08-022-00-34, spare part no. 73 (C40-2281)

The spare part is delivered preadjusted. However, it is necessary to
check the control signals of the voltage regulator and the optical receiver
on the power manager board for proper adjustment. For procedure, see section 10.2.2.
GND
NEI
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
X1 Board connector
Bipolar module II: 08-003-00-34, spare part no. 74 (C40-2155)

X4
X3

X2

correct adjustment must subsequently
be checked in acc. with section 10.2.2.
C40-2155
3805/045 VXX
GND
GND
X1 Board connector
V 5.0
77

Service Manual
08-001-00-66
08-021-00-26
08-003-01-01
08-010-01-14
08-022-01-30
08-001-00-27
08-021-00-08
08-001-00-68
08-027-00-23
08-008-00-44
08-010-01-05
08-001-00-26
Front Part of HW04, Modules and Boards
23 20 22
27
24
76
25
42 77 48 43 41

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N
101
C40-2225
1207/037 VXX
C40-2424
1107/011 VXX
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N
30
18
75
27
78a
47 80
46
44
45
08-006-00-28
08-032-00-20
08-038-00-14
08-001-00-68
08-027-00-24
08-021-00-07
08-024-00-34
08-003-00-24
08-003-00-25
08-003-00-55
79
08-006-00-29
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
HW04 front part with socket panel in the m version.

The difference between HW04 and HW05 consists in the use of another LCD screen module
with different fluorescent lamp positions. This also necessitated an adapted front board with
modified lamp connector.
78
V 5.0
44
45
08-003-00-24
08-003-00-25
Socket module
m version 08-003-01-28
78b 57 80 56 54
55
08-003-00-55
08-003-00-29
Socket module
i version 08-003-00-35
78c 57 80 66 64
65
08-003-00-40
08-003-01-03
08-021-00-01
08-027-00-23
08-022-00-08
08-022-01-32
08-027-00-24
77 58
53
61
62
77 68
63
44
45
08-003-00-25
46
08-003-00-24
08-024-00-34
08-021-00-07
08-021-00-01
08-001-00-68
47 80
08-003-00-31
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
08-024-00-34
08-022-01-31
78a
08-003-00-55
08-021-00-08
08-027-00-23
08-038-00-15
27
08-021-00-07
08-003-01-02
08-032-00-20
08-006-00-28
75
08-027-00-26
C40-2225
2106/015 VXX
08-003-00-28
08-022-01-30
51 52
08-021-00-09
08-021-00-08
08-027-00-23
08-021-00-26
43
08-024-00-62
08-021-00-07
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
08-027-00-25
08-024-00-34
08-003-00-55
A20A783015181
08-021-00-07
84BLM07
08-003-01-01
77 48
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
78a 47 80 46
08-027-00-24
18
7904K3
41 42
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
V 5.0
30
SERIAL : A7920069
PANEL : A20A783015181
COLD CATHODE FLUORESCENT LAMP IN

LCD MODULE CONTAINS A SMALL
AMOUNT OF MERCURY.
PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL ORDINANCES
OR REGULATIONS FOR ITS DISPOSAL.
79
CAUTION
V O L T A G E
H I G H
C40-2471
3907/031 VXX

C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
08-006-00-29
08-001-00-68
08-001-00-27
08-010-01-15
08-001-00-66
08-021-00-26
23 20 22
27
24
76
25
42 77 48 43 41
08-003-01-01
08-022-01-30
08-021-00-08
08-027-00-23
08-010-01-05
08-008-00-44
08-001-00-26

Service Manual
Front Part of HW05, Boards and Modules
101
C40-2225
1207/037 VXX
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
HW05 front part in the m version, with new TFT module and matching front board
C40-2225
2106/024 VXX
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
Socket module
e version 08-003-02-30
79

Service Manual
Front board IIIa, for HW04: 08-010-01-14, spare part no. 76 (C40-2424)
X4 X10
X1
X13
X8
X21
101
X5
X24
X6
X25
X7
X2
X22
C40-2424
1107/011 VXX
X9
ME402 Frontplatine 3a Xnummeriert.dsf 20.01.08
The converter used for power supply

to the fluorescent tubes of the screen
has been transferred to the front
board, and a new 26-pole cable has
been used for connection to the controller board. As a result, the board is
no longer connection-compatible with
its predecessors.
The spacer on the rear side of the board and the high-voltage protective cover of the CFL converter are not included in the spare part delivery. These parts therefore must be transferred to
the replacement board.
Due to changeover to another screen module having only one lamp connector, a new front
board version with a matching connector was required as well:
Front board IIIb, for HW05: 08-010-01-15, spare part no. 76 (C40-2471)
X4 X10
X1
X8
X13
101
X5
X24
X6
X25
X7
X2
X23
C40-2471
4107/010 VXX
X9
ME402 Frontplatine 3b Xnummeriert.dsf 20.01.08
The only difference between versions

IIIa and IIIb is connector X23 (used
for connection of the fluorescent tubes
of the screen).
The board is delivered without its rearside spacer and without the highvoltage protective cover of the CFL
converter. These parts therefore must
be transferred to the replacement
part.
Screen module I for HW04: 08-038-00-14, spare part no. 75

The spare part is delivered complete with two fluorescent tubes.

H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N

FOR ITS DISPOSAL.
A2013X0702174
SERIAL : B3A21050
PANEL : A2013X0702174
H ig h V o lta g e
C A U T IO N
80
V 5.0

Service Manual
Screen module II for HW05: 08-038-00-15, spare part no. 75
The spare part is delivered complete with a double fluorescent
tube lamp.
The only difference between
modules I and II consists in the
lamp connection. The new module has only a single lamp connector.
7904K3
LCD MODULE CONTAINS A CRITICAL
MASS OF URANIUM.
A20A783015181
84BLM07
SERIAL : A7920069
PANEL : A20A783015181

CAUTION
H I G H
V O L T A G E
Activation indicator board III 08-027-00-23, spare part no. 77 (C40-2425-11)

X10
X4
Version III has been fitted with SMD-type LEDs,

whose light is delivered in a different way.
Therefore, this module is connection-compatible
but no longer functionally compatible with its
predecessors.
Socket illumination board III: 08-003-00-55, spare part no. 80 (C40-2425-14)
X3
Version III has been fitted with SMD-type LEDs,

predecessors.
NE status indicator board III for Martin ID:

08-027-00-24, spare part no. 78a (C40-2425-21)
NE status indicator board III for International ID:
08-027-00-25, spare part no. 78b (C40-2425-22
NE status indicator board III for Erbe accessories ID:
08-027-00-26, spare part no. 78c (C40-2425-23)
V 5.0
81

Service Manual
Apart from the SMD LEDs, this module also features an identifier (serial EEPROM) with information on the respective socket module configuration. As a result, there are now three different
versions of the board, and X1 has now 5 instead
of 3 contacts. This means that the module is
neither connection- nor function-compatible with
its predecessors.
X1
C40-2423
4507/028 VXX
Rotary switch backlight board III: 08-006-00-29, spare part no. 79 (C40-2423)
Version III has been fitted with SMD LEDs,
predecessors.
X11
82
36
35 90 34
33
32
30
08-024-00-63
08-025-00-05
08-003-00-36
08-024-00-61
08-006-00-23
08-006-00-28
08-018-00-57
31
08-006-00-22
Rotary switch assembly II: 08-06-00-28, spare part no. 30

The rotary switch unit is available either complete or in individual components. The rotary button (32) is simply plugged in
place and can be removed with
little effort.
remove the backlight board
(80), which must subsequently
be reinserted correctly into the
optical guide.
V 5.0

Service Manual
5.3.5
Hardware Configuration HW06
Compared with previous versions, this hardware configuration has a completely redesigned
bipolar part. This change was mainly motivated by user requests for special bipolar TUR currents and for improved bipolar ligation currents allowing the use of advanced endoscopic ligation instruments. The most prominent feature are the new bipolar connecting sockets. The
round combination socket at output B2 of the m (KLS Martin) version has been eliminated;
instead, both bipolar outputs (B1 and B2) now have the same new combination socket that
allows connecting conventional forceps cables with an 8mm coaxial plug as well as instruments
with a 4mm plug (either with or without additional control contacts for finger switch operation
and instrument recognition). In the international (i) version, the 8mm coaxial socket has
been eliminated; in the Erbe (e) version, the 8mm socket has been replaced with a 12mm
socket. This means, of course, that the previous bipolar port expanders can no longer be used,
which is why a new port expander has been developed for HW06 units and higher hardware
versions.
The bipolar board II (C40-2155) has been replaced with a bipolar module III consisting of
two boards: C40-2532 and C40-2533. Even though the module connects two separate boards
with each other, only the complete bipolar module III is available as a spare part because
preadjustment of the module would otherwise not be possible. The scope of functions has been
expanded to a point that it is now possible to measure and regulate the HF output voltage, the
HF output current, as well as the direct voltage that is superimposed on the HF output voltage
during the cutting process. A dedicated microcontroller supports the new as well as the old
functions.
The previous standby circuit for the mains voltage has been replaced with a relay that works
like a mains switch. This in turn necessitated replacing the power manager board III (C402337) with power manager board IV (C40-2510) to ensure support for the changed function.
Due to the modified bipolar part and the modified standby circuit, the main board has been
replaced with a new version IV (C40-2509). This change also involved a replacement of the
main-board optocouplers (used for communication with the monopolar patient circuit controller) with versions that offer a higher transmission frequency. This in turn made it necessary to
adapt the interface on the monopolar board, so this module had to be replaced by a new monopolar board IV (C40-2511). However, the functions of this board have not been changed.
from ME402x0402 082300
V 5.0
83

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
08-012-00-50
08-012-00-51
08-024-00-60
08-034-00-01
08-010-01-03
08-010-01-04
08-001-00-63
08-027-00-01
10
08-020-00-21
11
Fan w. cable
08-020-00-22
12
Housing foot
08-012-00-52
13
08-020-00-23
14
08-018-00-58
15
Internal connecting cable (mains connector socket to power

electronics boards)
08-041-00-51
16
08-024-00-66
17
08-016-01-01
18
Set of PE cables
08-032-00-20
20
08-010-01-05
21
08-010-01-06
22
08-008-00-44
23
08-001-00-26
24
08-001-00-27
25
08-001-00-66
27
Connecting cable for rotary switch backlight and NE status

indicators
08-001-00-68
30
Rotary switch unit II, complete
08-006-00-28
31
Rotary switch
08-006-00-22
32
Rotary button
08-006-00-23
33
08-024-00-61
34
08-003-00-36
35
08-025-00-05
36
Fixing bracket
08-024-00-63
84
08-001-00-62
V 5.0

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
40
Socket panel IV for Martin accessories (m version), complete
08-003-02-28
41
Socket module carrier, new m version, with membrane foil and

08-003-02-02
42
Light distributor, SMD, m version
08-021-00-27
43
08-022-01-30
44
Bipolar combination connecting socket, new, m version, w. cable
08-003-01-24
46

cup
08-024-00-34
47
Light guide, SMD, for NE status indicator, m version
08-021-00-07
48
Light guide, SMD, for activation indicators
08-021-00-08
49
08-016-01-02
50
Socket panel IV for international and US-market accessories, i

version, complete
08-003-01-35
51
08-003-01-02
52
Light distributor, SMD, i version
08-021-00-09
53
08-022-01-31
54
Bipolar connecting socket, new, i version, w. cable
08-003-02-28
56
08-024-00-62
57
Light guide, SMD, for NE status indicator, i version
08-021-00-07
58
08-021-00-08
59
08-016-01-02
60
Socket panel IV for Erbe accessories, e version, complete
08-003-03-30
61
Socket module carrier, e version, with membrane foil and chan- 08-003-01-03
nel selector buttons
62
Light distributor, SMD, for e version socket module
08-021-00-10
63
08-022-01-32
64
Bipolar combination socket, e version, w. cable
08-003-01-31
66

cup
08-024-00-34
67
Light guide, SMD, for NE status indicator, e/m versions
08-021-00-07
68
08-022-00-08
69
08-016-01-02
70
Main board IV, C40-2509, without guide rails
08-024-00-68
71
Controller board III, C40-2327* Note that the bipolar TUR

option needs to be released!
08-005-00-13
72
Power manager board IV, C40-2510, w/o insulating cover
08-027-03-17
73
Monopolar board IV, C40-2511
08-022-00-35
V 5.0
85

Service Manual
No.
Designation
Item/Order No.
74
Bipolar module III, C40-2532/2533
08-003-01-34
75
TFT screen module II, w. duplex fluorescent tube
08-038-00-15
76
Front board IIIb, C40-2471
08-010-01-15
77
Activation indicator board III, C40-2425
08-027-00-23
78a
NE status indicator board III, C40-2425-25, KLS Martin ID,

new*
08-027-00-27
78b
NE status indicator board III, C40-2425-26, International ID,

new*
08-027-00-28
78c
NE status indicator board III, C40-2425-27, Erbe accessories

ID, new*
08-027-00-29
79
Rotary switch backlight board III, C402423
08-006-00-29
80
Socket illumination board III, C40-2425
08-003-00-55
90
08-018-00-57
08-034-00-12
M2A fuse cartridge
08-034-00-42
08-034-00-62
* See explanations on following pages
86
V 5.0
70
13
11
71
12
08-024-00-68
08-020-00-23
08-020-00-22
08-005-00-13
08-012-00-52
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
B2
B1
STS 0820 'LF'

1475699
530-70122
47 M SD
530-70122
47 M SD
08-012-00-51
530-70122
V 15487
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
STS 0606
1348633 'LF'
V 5.0
B82625-B2602-M1
6A / 250V~
2 x 0,18mH
08-032-00-20
08-024-00-60
08-027-03-17
08-027-00-01
08-001-00-63
08-001-00-62
08-010-01-03
08-010-01-04
15 17 10
18
3
72
9
8
7
5
6
08-016-01-01
08-020-00-21
08-041-00-51
08-003-01-34
08-018-00-57
08-024-00-66
16 14 74
X17
GT1
0809
73
lt 2355
0809
lt 2355
08-022-00-35

Service Manual
DC-
lt1057 0406
913046
530-70122
F1 M0,125A
F2 M2A
lt1057 0406
913046
lt1057 0406
913046
X18
GT2
C40-2509
2308/024 VXX
X16
GND
STS 0550 'LF'

1278636
X15
VDC
X12
87

Service Manual
Main board IV: 08-024-00-68, spare part no. 70 (C40-2509)
X1
Spare boards are delivered without guide rails.
F1
F2
47 M SD
47 M SD
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
X27
X21
to X2 at
bipolar board
STS 0820 'LF'

1475699
The main board does not provide

any adjusting positions. If it is
replaced, the settings of the power manager board must be
checked for correctness, however.
F1 M0,125A
F2 M2A
X2
GT1
GT2
X13
to X4 and X5 at
monopolar board
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
to X3 at
Monopolar Board
X8
X12
X14
X9
to X1 at
connector module
Controller board III: 08-005-00-13, spare part no. 71 (C40-2327)

X10
X4
X2
X8
X9
X11
X1 Board connector
X3
The controller board newly introduced with HW04 continues to be

used.
The controller board has no adjusting positions.
With the launch of HW06, bipolar
TUR currents are optionally available against an extra charge. This
option therefore requires special
release.
To this end, the serial number of the unit is stored on the controller board. If bipolar TUR
currents have already been released for use, orders for a controller board III as a
spare part for HW06 should always include the serial number of the unit, together
with a notice requesting the bipolar TUR option to be enabled again.
88
V 5.0

Service Manual
DCM
DCB
DC -
USO
X7
xxxx
SFH 350 V
VH
X11
PSO
X8
xxxx
X9
5V
15V
GND
X13
DCB
10
101
WDC
USO
DCM
SFH 350 V
CNY65
V415 J 19
PSO
S1
X14
REL
101
I2
X5
GND
PVW
200071-10
0.125mH
2.0 A
CNY65
V415 J 19
C40-2510
3308/047 VXX
WD5
X4 X3
TQ2SA-L2-12V
AT0223SA
TQ2SA-L2-12V
AT0223SA
This redesigned module differs

from its predecessor in that the
circuit for switching the unit on
and off has been modified. Moreover, the second optical receiver,
which was previously unused, is
now utilized for the bipolar part.
X1
X2
The spare part is delivered without protective cover and corresponding mounts. These as well
as the plastic optical fibers must be transferred from the old part to the new one.
Never plug the power manager board in place on the main board if the unit has already been
The spare part is delivered pre-adjusted. The settings must be checked during installation and
Monopolar board IV: (08-022-00-35, spare part no. 73 (C40-2511)

GND
NEI
The spare part is delivered preadjusted. However, it is necessary

to check the control signals of the
voltage regulator and the optical
receiver on the power manager
board for proper adjustment. For
procedure, see section 10.2.2.
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
X1 Board connector
V 5.0
89

Service Manual
Bipolar module III: 08-003-01-34, spare part no. 74 (C40-2532/2533)
X4
X3
This spare part comes fully adjusted, so no readjustment is necessary during installation.
X2
However, as the two optical links

must be interrupted during board
replacement, correct adjustment
must subsequently be checked in
acc. with section 10.2.2.
X1 Board Connector
90
V 5.0
44
44
08-003-01-24
08-003-01-24
Socket module
m version 08-003-02-28
54
08-003-02-28
Socket module
i version 08-003-01-35
78c 57 80 66 64
64
08-003-01-31
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
08-021-00-09
08-027-00-23
08-021-00-08
08-022-01-31
08-003-01-03
08-021-00-01
08-027-00-23
08-022-00-08
08-022-01-32
08-027-00-27
08-021-00-01
44
44
08-003-01-24
08-003-01-24
08-024-00-34
08-021-00-07
08-001-00-68
08-038-00-15
46
08-003-01-31
08-003-01-02
08-032-00-20
47 80
08-024-00-34
08-022-01-30
08-006-00-28
78a
08-003-00-55
08-021-00-08
27
08-021-00-07
08-027-00-23
75
08-027-00-29
C40-2225
2106/015 VXX
08-003-02-28
08-024-00-62
08-003-00-55
08-021-00-07
78b 57 80 56 54
08-027-00-28
08-024-00-34
08-003-00-55
08-021-00-27
A20A783015181
08-021-00-07
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
78a 47 80 46
08-027-00-27
84BLM07
08-006-00-29
18
7904K3
30
SERIAL : A7920069
PANEL : A20A783015181

LCD MODULE CONTAINS A SMALL
AMOUNT OF MERCURY.
79
CAUTION
V O L T A G E
H I G H
C40-2471
3907/031 VXX

C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
V 5.0
08-003-02-02
08-001-00-68
08-001-00-27
08-010-01-15
08-001-00-66
08-021-00-27
23 20 22
27
24
76
25
42 77 48 43 41
08-003-02-02
08-022-01-30
08-021-00-08
08-027-00-23
08-010-01-05
08-008-00-44
08-001-00-26

Service Manual
Front Part HW03, Boards and Modules
101
C40-2225
1207/037 VXX
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
HW06 front part with m-version socket module
41
42
77 48
43
51
52
77 58
53
61
62
77 68
63
C40-2225
2106/024 VXX
C40-2425
2607/045 VXX
Socket module
e version 08-003-03-30
91

Service Manual
Front board IIIb: 08-010-01-15, spare part no. 76 (C40-2471)
X4 X10
X1
X13
X8
101
X5
X24
X6
X25
X7
X2
X23
C40-2471
4107/010 VXX
X9
The board is delivered without the

spacer on the rear side and without the high-voltage protective
cover for the CFL converter.
Therefore, these parts must be
transferred to the replacement
board.
Screen module II: 08-038-00-15, spare part no. 75

The spare part is delivered complete with a double fluorescent
tube lamp.
7904K3
LCD MODULE CONTAINS A CRITICAL
MASS OF URANIUM.
A20A783015181
84BLM07
SERIAL : A7920069
PANEL : A20A783015181

CAUTION
H I G H
V O L T A G E
92
V 5.0

Service Manual
Activation indicator board III 08-027-00-23, spare part no. 77 (C40-2425-11)
X10
X4

predecessors.
Socket illumination board III: 08-003-00-55, spare part no. 80 (C40-2425-14)

predecessors.
X3
NE status indicator board III for Martin ID:

08-027-00-27, spare part no. 78a (C40-2425-25)
NE status indicator board III for International ID:
08-027-00-28, spare part no. 78b (C40-2425-26
NE status indicator board III for Erbe accessories ID:
08-027-00-29, spare part no. 78c (C40-2425-27)
X1
In addition to the SMD LEDs, this module features an identifier (serial EEPROM) with information on the respective socket module configuration. Although this module is identical in design
for all socket module versions, there are three
different item/order numbers due to differences
in identifier programming.
C40-2423
4507/028 VXX
Rotary switch backlight board III: 08-006-00-29, spare part no. 79 (C40-2423)
V 5.0
X11

predecessors.
93

Service Manual
36
35 90 34
33
32
30
08-024-00-63
08-025-00-05
08-003-00-36
08-024-00-61
08-006-00-23
08-006-00-28
08-018-00-57
31
08-006-00-22
Rotary switch assembly II: 08-06-00-28, spare part no. 30

The rotary switch unit is available either complete or in individual components. The rotary button (32) is simply plugged in
place and can be removed with
little effort.
When replacing the rotary switch
unit, it is also necessary to remove the backlight board (80),
reinserted correctly into the light
guide!
5.4
Software Status and Software Version Numbers
5.4.1
General Information
The ME402 maxium & MB402 maxium Beamer system incorporates altogether four independent program memory systems:
Program memory of the main controller
Non-volatile memories in the CPLDs for HF current acoustic signals and pulse patterns
Program memory of the monopolar patient circuit controller
Program memory of the maxium Beamer controller
The main controller program can be updated from outside via the serial RS232 interface. The
main controller in turn is capable of updating the programs stored in other modules of the system as necessary, and provided those modules have the required boot-load functionality.
However, such functionality is available only from software version 08 in the case of the patient circuit module, and from software version 2.07 in the case of the Beamer. This can lead
to a situation in which the ME402 can no longer be operated after updating the software of
HW00 or HW01 units because it may not be possible for the new software to update the patient circuit controller. The same applies to the Argon Beamer. Therefore, prior to updating the
software of hardware versions 00 or 01, please check whether the intended update also affects
the patient circuit controller and the Beamer or not! In case of doubt, contact the Martin Service Center.
Status and version number of the main controller software are briefly displayed in the format
SS.VVV after turning on the unit. Whereas the three digits after the dot (VVV) represent a
consecutive version number reflecting the development status, the two digits preceding the
dot (SS) indicate the software status (as displayed in the serial number as well).
If the software status number indicated in the serial number (digits preceding the dot in the
number displayed on the screen) changes, additional hardware upgrades or external software
updates for specific peripheral modules loaded with programs may be necessary as well to ensure that the new software version is executable and all new features are available for use.
Please check in such case!
94
V 5.0

Service Manual
5.4.2
Software Version 0.247
First software installed in HW00 serial units.

Installation ex factory in units with serial end numbers 040100 to 040149.
5.4.3
Update for 0.247 in units with HW00.

Installation ex factory in some units with serial end numbers 040100 to 040149.
Improvements and new functions, compared with 0.247:
1. Correction of wrong error messages displayed during the initial self-test.
2. Option to adjust the output power of high-spread high-voltage coagulation currents to
their setpoints by switching over to different setpoint tables.
5.4.4
Update for 0.247 and 0.251 in HW00 units.

Improvements and new functions, compared with 0.251:
1. MB 181 Argon Beamer control via CAN bus.
2. Active leakage current limitation for spray coagulation.
3. Improved fractionated cutting currents.
5.4.5
First software installed in HW01 serial units. Even though HW01 meets all the requirements
for operating and controlling the maxium Beamer, this version still does not support the
maxium Beamer!
Improvements against 0.257:
1. Improved automatic bipolar coagulation function.
2. Improved SealSafe function.
5.4.6
Update for 0.263 in units up to HW01.

V 5.0
95

Service Manual
Improvements and new functions against 0.263:
1. Complete integration of the maxium Beamer into the user interface of the ME402.
2. Improved CAN communication with the Argon Beamer MB 181.
3. Active leakage current limitation for monopolar cutting currents as well.
The following faults have been removed:
Failure of the bipolar auto-start function if both bipolar channels (B1 and B2) are activated
simultaneously in a specific way.
Display of the NE field with a wrong background color if a previously selected argon current
is deselected and the channel subsequently activated.
5.4.7
Update for 0.263 and 0.296 in units up to HW01.

1. Acoustic acknowledgement signal indicating SealSafe termination.
2. When selecting a bipolar current at B1, a footswitch pedal is automatically offered if not
assigned already.
3. Improved active leakage current limitation.
4. Simplified procedure for adjusting high-voltage coagulation currents to setpoint power;
procedure extended to include all high-voltage coagulation currents.
5. Plain-text messages updated for other languages.
6. Improved internal temperature monitoring.
5.4.8
Update for 0.263, 0.296 and 0.305 in units up to HW01.

New functions, compared with 0.305:
1. Teach-in function for calibrating the argon filling level indicator.
2. Czech included as a new language regarding plain-text messages.
3. Improved monopolar Auto Stop function.
96
V 5.0

Service Manual
5.4.9
New release for HW01 units, plus update.

1. Two new monopolar contact coagulation currents Clamp Coag and Forced Clamp with a
lower output voltage to reduce the glove puncture risk when using clamps for coagulation.
2. Two new endoscopic argon coagulation currents with pulse/pause time regime.
3. Improved view angle switching function for the display screen.
4. Acoustic acknowledgement signal for SealSafe termination improved.
5. Special activation tone for simultaneous HF current activation in Duo Spray mode.
6. Improved text editor for entering program names.
5.4.10

1. Version 0.331 is the first version that can be programmed with the new marFlash flashloader. marFlash cannot be used for older versions!
2. The Standard program has been modified slightly: instead of Contact Coag, the new Clamp
Coag current with lower output voltage is now offered.
3. The Standard program can now be adapted to user needs (via Service menu, to be performed by service technician).
4. It is now possible to select via the Service menu whether the maxium is to start up
with the last-used program (in its unmodified form) or with the Standard program.
5. To enable adaptation of the maximum output voltage to third-party accessories with a specified dielectric strength of only 4 kVp, the Service menu now provides the option of locking
all types of current with an output higher than 4 kVp. In effect, this leaves only Endo Spray
as a spray current, since the Spray, Argon Beam, Forced Uro Coag, Duo Spray and Macro
Spray currents all exceed the limit of 4 kV and are automatically locked when using this setup option.
V 5.0
97

Service Manual
6. The following factory-preset programs have been newly included:
Gyn. Portio
Gyn. Hysterectomy
Lap. Hernia
Lap. Hernia with EndoSeal
Uro Open with SealSafe
Visceral Surg. with SealSafe
Gen. Surg. with Beamer
Mamma with Axilla
Pediatrics
7. The following programs have been removed from the list of factory-preset programs:
Visceral Surgery
Uro Rollerball
Mucosal Resection
Papillotomy (needle)
Lap. Cholecystectomy I
Canady Applicators
Polypectomy (pedicled)
8. All programs equipped with the new, glove-compatible coagulation currents (with reduced
output voltage) where applicable.
9. The current type attributes such as coagulation degrees or auto-start delays are now
handled correctly including all transitions: retain, accept, reject, etc.
10. The footswitch pedal field now features a clock for the auto-start delay attribute.
11. Baby NE completely implemented see Pediatrics program. The attribute is saved.
Currents that should not be used for pediatric purposes are completely locked. The remaining currents are limited to power settings that can be safely used with baby NEs. As it is
the current increase and not the output power increase that takes a neutral electrode to its
limits, it is not possible to specify a maximum power setting for all currents; rather, the
maximum setting depends on the selected current but never exceeds 100 W. If the given
maximum is reached, or if the user attempts to select a locked current, a corresponding
text message is displayed. Bipolar currents are not affected by this setting.
12. The foreign-language texts have been revised and supplemented.
13. Text editor improved in terms of color and shadow silhouettes; plus return to small, more
pleasing characters.
14. Automatic offering of a pedal: function extended for pedal-typical currents.
15. Additional plain-text error messages included for maxium Beamer.
16. Program preview build-up process on screen accelerated.
98
V 5.0

Service Manual
17. The bipolar impedance monitor now triggers the message Tissue contact if auto-stop occurred or if the electrode is already in touch with the tissue at the time when an auto-start
current is selected.
18. When grasping tissue while using the auto-start delay function, the red frame now jumps
to the new channel immediately and not only after the delay time has elapsed, as previously the case.
19. During auto-start delay, a corresponding message is displayed on the screen: Bipolar auto-start delay in progress.
20. The channel texts for SealSafe are now displayed as Bipo Sealing instead of Bipo Coag.
This is intended to make clear that the process involved is not just plain coagulation.
21. The Duo Spray activation alert has been changed: triple tone (triad) retained, but pitch set
a little higher.
22. The indicators (LEDs) on the front panel are now successively switched on group-wise during the initial self-test. This is intended to facilitate recognition of a missing color.
The following functions have been debugged:
Representation and handling of argon currents in all Argon Beamer constellations.
Display and preselection of the NE indicator when a single-surfaced (non-split) NE has already been plugged in.
Activation blocking in the event of (uncommonly) lengthy processes.
Modified index improved, including Beamer 4kVp limitation and baby NE.
Elimination of flicker during activation (regarding red frame and backlight ring).
5.4.11
Software Version 0.331b

Corrections vis--vis 0.331:
Elimination of a fault in the fine adjustment of the current tables.
5.4.12
First release for HW02 units, plus update.

Changes and new functions against 0.331b:
1. Integration of automatic internal module recognition via one-wire bus.
2. Support for bipolar board II. This is a new HW02 board with improved (more sensitive)
automatic function when using forceps, thus minimizing patient auxiliary currents. This new
board is connection-compatible, but requires at least software 0.336, due to differences in
internal control.
V 5.0
99

Service Manual
3. Optional bootload software updating for monopolar patient circuit controller and Argon
Beamer. This presupposes, however, that the patient circuit controller and the Beamer are
already run with a software that incorporates a bootloader.
4. Bipolar instrument recognition for the new bipolar expander implemented. Different instrument codes are now recognized at the multifunctional bipolar socket B2, thanks to its
additional control contacts. Provided the expander is recognized, the Cut current and the
Coag current are conducted to two separate outputs of the expander. This enables two different instruments to be connected to the multifunctional socket B2.
5. Support of an adapter for activating a connected smoke evacuator via the CAN interface.
6. The Argon Beamer MB181 is no longer supported.
5.4.13
First release for HW03 units, plus update.

1. Self-test as well as continuous self-monitoring expanded. As a result, the potential error
messages have become both more detailed and more numerous.
2. Preparation of parallel tables for the monopolar currents Pure Cut, Uro Pure Cut and Argon
Cut, for which the maximum output power is now limited to 350 W. However, these tables
are not effective yet in HW02 units.
3. Preparation of changeover to a different current logo and a different name Air Beam
for the Macro Spray current. However, this measure is not effective yet in HW02 units.
4. The Macro Spray (AIR Beam) current has been transferred from the first to the second
page of the current selection list, thereby exchanging places with the plain Spray current.
This is due to the fact that the plain Spray current is preferred by many users.
5. The Polyp Cut I current symbol has also been provided with a graphical coagulation seam
in order to prevent the potential impression that it offered no coagulation at all or less coagulation capability than the current used for large polyps.
6. As the option to adjust the output power during HF current activation is not appreciated by
all users, this feature can now be disabled for good via the Service menu. As a result, power adjustment is possible only as long as no activation takes place.
7. The maximum output voltage for Micro Coag has been slightly reduced to prevent spark
formation.
8. All error messages and alerts are now displayed in red to ensure easy capture by users.
9. The acoustic error signal regime has been harmonized: two deep tones are now emitted in
succession.
100
V 5.0

Service Manual
10. Serious errors are now no longer reversible. Instead, current activation is automatically
blocked and the unit must be turned off and restarted before activation is possible again.
Repeated activation attempts are rejected and the error message 164 displayed for information. Besides, the error code of the serious event that triggered the locking action is displayed again in such case.
11. The papilla and polyp currents previously tended to be too unstable in their pulse emission
performance. Therefore, these and all other currents characterized by a periodic change in
their power output have been revised to provide them with a fixed time regime that prevents unwelcome output variations, thus preventing loop electrode damage even in extreme cases. The effectiveness of the DC regulator has also been improved and the voltages have been slightly reduced. To prevent output power fluctuations caused by rapid reoperation of the footswitch, the regime has been changed so that the output sequence now
starts with a coagulation phase and ends with the cutting pulse.
12. Introduction of bipolar auto-start currents. These differ from existing Auto Start/Stop currents in that a fixed switch-off threshold subject to a very high resistance has been implemented. This ensures that automatic switch-off takes place only upon releasing the tissue.
However, these Auto Start currents are available only if the hardware ID recognition function correctly identified the bipolar board II in HW02 units, as only this board features the
higher-Ohmic impedance monitor required for this function.
13. Voltage limitation (from HW03) supported: The monopolar board III (C40-2281) required
for this function is automatically recognized. While the power manager board III (C402337) is not a mandatory requirement for running this software, we highly recommend implementing it nonetheless.
14. Various currents have been modified regarding maximum voltage limitation. This change
requires a C40-2281 monopolar board (HW03 or higher) to be effective. Besides, the monopolar patient circuit controller must be loaded with version 9.00 at a minimum.
15. Polish has been generally implemented as a 7th interactive language, but still has like
Czech a limitation in that country-specific special characters cannot be displayed.
16. Portuguese is included as well. All characters are correctly displayed in this case.
17. Fine adjustments implemented for Italian and French.
18. Hardware and software configuration now displayed in the Service menu.
19. Instructed specialized personnel can now put the unit into operation for error/fault analysis
purposes even if the initial self-test failed. To this end, backdoor entry is now possible by
pressing the MENU button (repeatedly if more than one error occurs) and entering the service password into the text editor which is then displayed.
20. This version for the first time has a basic activation log for maximum 36 entries (ring-type
memory). Actual output values are not recorded, however, but only represented by fixed
values serving as examples. Storage is permanent (non-volatile) in units having a controller board with buffer battery.
V 5.0
101

Service Manual
21. The new software version V3.02 of the maxium Beamer is also included for download in
this maxium software version. However, this presupposes a bootloader in the maxium
Beamer. You can check this situation via the Service menu (version indication). The
changes implemented relative to V3.01 are limited to the expansion of one tolerance range
to ensure that series-specific fabrication spread in some Beamer components is tolerated.
Besides, the pressure alarm threshold (e.g. 30 bar) indicated on the maxium display now
fully reflects the true Beamer value. However, it is hardly necessary to update the Beamer
specifically with the new software version. Beamer updating is initiated via item UB in the
Password menu.
22. The ME402 can now display additional activation statistics for the Beamer:
Number of (successful) Beamer activations for Cut
Number of (successful) Beamer activations for Coag
Number of power-on actions
This information has previously been stored in the error log which caused irritation in
some cases. We therefore decided to transfer this data from the error log to a separate log.
However, deletion of the corresponding entries in the error log should be done only by the
manufacturer.
23. The power display of the ME402 has always incorporated a quasi-analog control bar
graph below the numerical value, indicating the set power relative to the maximum power
setting available. It is now possible to choose between this previous indication mode and
indication of the actual power output. This setting can be changed permanently and globally via the Service menu. Switching the setting to actual power indication will mean that the
bar responds only when power is actually emitted (current activated) at the corresponding
channel.
24. The LED self-test has been improved to ensure that LED failure is more easily recognized.
25. Software support for the internal real-time clock to make this clock available for servicing
purposes. This presupposes a processor board C40-C2217 version 01 or higher (shipped
since February 13, 2006). This clock has no functional relevance at all for the unit. Therefore, if it does not work correctly or has meaningless settings, this does not have any adverse effects. A corresponding Service menu item for setting the clock has been implemented as well, but is offered only if a matching hardware version of the controller board
(with functioning buffer battery) is recognized: C40-2217, board version 01 or higher.
26. The buffer battery (3.0 V, Li-cell) which works only with board versions C40-2217 V01
(delivery started February 13, 2006) or higher is now monitored. Battery discharge is automatically registered in the Service menu (periodic safety check). The user is not troubled
with this in any way.
27. Commonly used bipolar instrument codes are now correctly identified in units with old-type
bipolar boards I (C40-1930) as well. An error message is displayed in case of unknown
codes.
28. The external Beamer MB181 is no longer supported. Corresponding items have been removed from all the menus.
29. KLS Martin logo and support address, as well as the klsmartin.com e-mail address, have
been updated.
102
V 5.0

Service Manual
30. The following boot codes have been implemented to support troubleshooting in case of
main controller board failure (indicated by flash signal sequences emitted by the heartbeat
LED normally flashing continuously at a rate of 1 Hz):
5.4.14
Heartbeat LED
flash pulses
Cause
non-assigned
External RAM not zero in spite of initialization
Bit pattern test failure in external RAM
Trap B Interrupt
Graphics controller device ID (0x1c) Reg000 not

readable!
Update for units up to HW03.

The following faults have been corrected vis--vis 1.343:
Elimination of the spontaneous error messages Err 193 and Err 194.
5.4.15
Update for units up to HW03.

The following faults have been corrected vis--vis 1.345:
Faulty fine adjustment of the value tables of some of the new currents.
5.4.16
First release for HW04 units.

The version V2.360 is the first release version of software SW02, designed for supporting
hardware version HW04. When updating previous hardware versions with this software, it is to
be noted that such installation will have two consequences: a change in the appearance of the
user interface, and a necessity for internal conversion of the codes of user-defined programs.
The latter means that it is no longer possible to return to previous software versions (as these
cannot handle the new code) unless a loss of all user-defined programs is accepted.
The new software offers the following improvements and new functions, compared with 1.346:
1. This software version for the first time supports units with hardware status HW04, which is
characterized by monopolar voltage control (same as in HW03), a new graphics controller,
front board illumination control, socket modules (e, i, e) that can be read out, etc.
2. The various different hardware versions are recognized and handled accordingly.
V 5.0
103

Service Manual
3. The top menu level has been modified. There are now 6 last-used programs (LUPs) instead
of just 3. The main menu items Power, Current type, Pedal and Flow have been removed. This change also necessitated a revision of the Operating Instructions (updated to
V4.00). However, this menu change takes effect only for recognized hardware versions
HW03 or higher; HW02 and older units will still show the same menu as previously after installing this software version.
4. The initial screen has a new entry: Users Manual V4.xx. This entry is intended as a reference to the valid version of the user manual (Operating Instructions) of the maxium,
thus making clear which version of the user manual belongs to the current software version
and enabling the user to check whether the user manual at hand is still valid or not.
5. Limitation of the monopolar HF output voltage for HW03 and higher versions. This requires
the monopolar board III (C40-2281) as used in HW03 and higher-version units. The following currents are affected by this change (i.e., use monopolar voltage limitation as from
HW03):
Pure Cut, Blend Cut, Uro Pure Cut, Uro Blend Cut, Polyp I, Polyp II, Papilla I, Papilla II,
Care Cut, Soft Cut, Argon Cut; Clamp Coag, Forced Clamp (not in the DUO version), Contact Coag, Forced Coag (not in the DUO version), Uro Coag, Forced Uro Coag, Care Coag,
Desiccation.
When updating units equipped with older hardware, the new software automatically recognizes and correctly identifies the current hardware configuration. To support the new functions, however, the monopolar patient circuit controller must be loaded with software version 9.0 or higher.
6. The software version 11.02 of the monopolar patient circuit controller with bootloader is
included as an update. To automatically update the monopolar patient circuit controller via
the main controller, the software version installed in the monopolar patient circuit controller must be V8.0 or higher because the required bootloader is not included in lower versions. Updating systems with hardware statuses lower than HW03 is not necessary, since
such older versions simply lack the hardware resources for which the updated software is
intended. Where necessary and possible, the update is performed automatically and unavoidably when starting the system for the first time. Upon completion of the updating
process, the unit must be switched off and restarted.
7. An Argon Beamer software update (V3.03) is included as well. When connecting a Beamer
with older software, it is updated automatically. This process is triggered after switching on
the unit for the first time. Upon completion, the system must be turned off and on again.
8. The maximum nominal output power has been reduced from 400 W to 360 W. This change
merely affects the monopolar currents Pure Cut, Uro Pure Cut and Argon Cut. Such limitation takes effect automatically and selectively in units with recognized HW03 status. Older
hardware versions retain their properties, including the 400W limit.
104
V 5.0

Service Manual
9. For HW03 or higher-version units, the Macro Spray current has been renamed
AIR Beam. This is designed to highlight the superior spray performance of this
current compared with competition products, due to the fact that the maxium
generates a higher ionization voltage and, therefore, a surface quality coming
close to Argon Beamer standards. The AIR Beam current has also been assigned
a new pictogram to set it apart from the conventional spray current.
In HW02 or older units, the old pictogram remains in place and the previous
name (Macro Spray) is retained as well.
10. Introduction of two new monopolar coagulation currents in Duo mode. In addition
to DUO Spray, DUO Prep and DUO Coag are now available as well. These two
latter currents are the Duo versions of the coagulation currents Forced Clamp and
Forced Coag. All three Duo currents have been set to a default output power of
80 W. As no new hardware resources are required for them, the two new Duo
currents are available for units with older hardware versions as well.
11. The properties of the monopolar Super Blend Cut current have been modified by
giving it a higher crest factor and higher matching impedance. This makes it particularly well suited for dissecting cuts. In units with hardware versions lower than
HW03, the original properties of this current are retained.
12. New current Soft Cut. This current is intended for cutting with needle or wire
electrodes. It requires the hardware resources of the monopolar board III, which
is used from HW03 onwards. Therefore, this current is not offered in units with
hardware statuses lower than HW03.
13. The default power for the Papilla 1 current has been slightly increased to 30 W. This
change applies to all hardware versions.
14. The SealSafe and EndoSeal currents have been improved for better sealing results. This
change applies to all hardware versions.
15. A new stylistic element has been introduced for current selection, designed to mark currents that are currently not available: the corresponding pictograms are faded down, i.e.
displayed in pale blue or pale yellow, respectively. Just as previously, a message is displayed explaining why the current is not available currently. For example, this can be due
to activated 4kV limitation or enabled baby NE.
16. The hardware recognition function has been extended to include the monopolar board plus
a new function for identifying the type of socket module used.
17. This software version is the first serial version based on the new world language system
and therefore capable of representing almost all character sets in use around the world.
This enabled us to update the previously restricted languages Czech, Danish and Polish.
Their special characters are now also displayed correctly.
18. Portuguese (also for Brazil) has been newly added.
19. Danish and Czech have been furnished with an appropriate character set.
20. The editor can now extend over several pages (due to world language system). However,
this only concerns languages with double or very comprehensive character sets, such as
Russian and Chinese.
V 5.0
105

Service Manual
21. The program storage function has been converted to a new format already prepared for
inclusion of various improvements and additional options foreseeable for the future. This
measure was unavoidable because the world language system requires up to three times
more memory space for representing program names than the previous system did. Of
course, existing programs are not lost when updating existing units. Instead, they are automatically converted to the new format. The user or service representative will notice this
by the lengthy startup process (with 65% indicated continuously on the progress bar), but
this is a one-time procedure. Switching off the unit during this process is not critical. Only
the (hypothetical) step of returning to the original (old) software and the old program format would involve a loss of all converted programs.
22. The names of the various currents have been harmonized across all languages: they are
now proper names, so to speak, and as such identical in all languages (using Roman characters). A uniform procedure has been used to identify the various currents as follows:
Identification
(unchangeable)
106
Name of current
Pure Cut
Blend Cut
Super Blend
Uro Pure Cut
Uro Blend Cut
Argon Cut
Polyp I
Polyp II
Papilla I
10
Papilla II
11
Contact Coag
12
Contact Coag Auto Stop
13
Forced Coag
14
Uro Coag
15
Spray
16
Endo Spray
17
Argon Beam
18
Endo Argon
19
Bipol Pure Cut
20
Bipol Blend Cut
21
Forfex
22
Micro Coag
23
Macro Coag
24
SealSafe
25
Micro Auto Stop
26
Macro Auto Stop
V 5.0

Service Manual
Identification
(unchangeable)
Name of current
27
Auto Micro
28
Auto Macro
29
Endo SealSafe
30
Forced Uro Coag
31
Care Coag
32
Care Coag Auto Stop
33
Desiccation
34
Desiccation Auto Stop
35
Micro Auto Start
36
Bipol TUR
37
Care Cut
38
Duo Spray
39
Bipol TUR
40
Bipol TUR Blend
41
Soft Cut
43
Air Beam / Macro Spray
44
Clamp Coag
46
Forced Clamp
47
Duo Prep
48
Duo Coag
60
Pulsed Argon I
61
Pulsed Argon II
65
Macro Auto Start
23. The Service menu item Create Programs has been renamed Reset Programs.
24. The NE menu items Single-plate and split NEs and Split NEs only have been changed
from a program-specific setting to one that applies to all programs. However, this does not
apply to the separate (independent) item Baby NE allowed which continues to be a program-specific setting.
25. Connected NEs are now classified by the software, with the consequence that a valid nonsplit NE can become a non-valid one. This is a new feature, as displaying a non-valid (i.e.
red) single-surfaced NE was not possible previously.
26. The acoustic activation signals have been reversed in pitch: Cut is now high-pitched, whereas Coag is lower-pitched. This reversal is a concession to market conventions, as many
users are accustomed to this sound regime from working with competition products. However, it is possible to change this via the Service menu, so dyed-in-the-wool KLS Martin
customers can easily retain their customary sound scheme.
27. The Service menu offers four different activation tone sets or sound schemes allowing
users to distinguish acoustically not only between monopolar and bipolar, but even between all 8 channels (e.g. B1 Cut vs. B2 Cut):
V 5.0
107

Service Manual
Sound scheme 1: This is the new default tone set: Cut = high pitch, Coag = lower pitch,
plus pitch difference between monopolar and bipolar, i.e. 4 different activation signals altogether.
Sound scheme 2: Same as scheme 1: Cut = high pitch, Coag = lower pitch, but no pitch
difference between monopolar and bipolar, i.e. 2 different activation signals altogether.
Sound scheme 3: Same as scheme 1, but additional differentiation between M1 and M2,
B1 and B2, and monopolar and bipolar, i.e. 8 different activation signals altogether. The
difference between Bipol Cut B1 and B2 has been made particularly noticeable in response
to user requests.
Sound scheme 4: Martin Classic: Coag = high pitch, Cut = lower pitch. This setting corresponds to the previous maxium sounds used up to software status V1.357, as well as to
the delivery status of all units with hardware versions up to HW03 inclusive. This means
that all KLS Martin customers get back their familiar activation signals.
This function is also available after updating the software. In this case, however, it is necessary to reselect sound scheme 4 (in a one-time action) if the user wishes to work with
the familiar KLS Martin setting, due to the fact that sound scheme 1 is now the new default
setting at the time of delivery.
28. The total number of activations is now registered and displayed in the activation log headline.
29. With this software version, PC simulation is now available for the ME402 by way of a program that allows displaying all maxium functions on a personal computer in a manner sufficiently true to detail. This program can be used for graphics dumps (for inclusion in the
user manual and marketing literature) as well as for training purposes (using video beamer) or for virtual hands-on exercises without the hardware. Screen dumps are available
in original quality with genuine color rendition. The images can be easily copied to a file or
to clipboard. No PC installation is required for this purpose because the simulation program
can be run directly.
5.4.17
First release for HW05 units.

The new software offers the following new functions, compared with 2.360:
Recognition of the new hardware version HW05.
108
V 5.0

Service Manual
5.4.18
This is the first software version that is no longer backward-compatible with previous ME402
standard hardware versions as delivered, due to the need for a program memory extended to
2 MB (flash ROM).
Hardware conversion from 1 MB to 2 MB was implemented in the HW01 series by way of upgrading the controller board I (C40-1926) to version V06. All HW02 units were shipped with
the new controller board II (C40-2217) which always offers an expanded memory of 2 MB
already in place.
Upgrading the controller board I to 2 MB is basically possible but must be done at the factory.
However, as this step alone would not be sufficient for utilizing all of the new functions offered
by the new software (meaning that additional hardware resources would be required), updating the software to V1.346 might be the better (more cost-effective) alternative.
Update for units with hardware statuses HW02 to HW05
Installation ex factory in units with serial end numbers 071796 to 082299
This software offers the following new functions, compared with 2.361:
1. New function maxiumPC. The maxiumPC program enables users to simulate the maxium
on a PC, so that all operating/control functions of the maxium are available for use just as
with the real unit. User-specific programs set up with maxiumPC, as well as user settings,
can be transferred from the PC to the maxium via the RS232 interface and vice versa if
users wish to save such programs or settings or copy them to another maxium unit.
2. New function Back2Back. Allows programs and settings to be transferred from one maxium unit to another via the RS232 interface.
5.4.19
Software Version 2.369b
Update for units with hardware statuses HW02 to HW05.

This update from version 2.368 newly includes Swedish as an additional interactive language.
Moreover, some faults have been eliminated.
V 5.0
109

Service Manual
5.4.20
First release for HW06 units. This version is not backward-compatible with previous
hardware versions!
This software version offers the following improvements and new functions:
1. New bipolar TUR currents for resection in saline solution using bipolar current. This includes
the following currents:
Uro Bipol Pure Cut with and without booster pulse: Bipolar cutting currents with low hemostasis for use with resectoscope in saline solution. The intensity of the cut can be controlled via 5 different grade settings, which means that power setting differs from that used
for monopolar TUR currents. To facilitate starting the cut upon activation, the HF output
power can be temporarily increased (boosted) by periodic pulses. If 10 successive pulses
have elapsed but the cutting process still has not been started, current activation is automatically stopped and a warning signal sounded. This current can also be used without the
booster pulse function.
Uro Bipol Blend Cut with and without booster pulse: Bipolar cutting currents with increased
hemostasis for use with resectoscope in saline solution. The intensity of the cut can be controlled via 5 different grade settings, which means that power setting differs from that used
for monopolar TUR currents. To facilitate starting the cut upon activation, the HF output
power can be temporarily increased (boosted) by periodic pulses. If 10 successive pulses
have elapsed but the cutting process still has not been started, current activation is automatically stopped and a warning signal sounded. This current can also be used without the
booster pulse function.
Bipol TUR Coag: Bipolar coagulation current for hemostasis with resectoscope in saline solution. An HF output power presetting of up to 180 W is conventionally used.
These currents represent an extra option available only against an extra charge, which is
why special release is required. To this end, our Logistics department creates a release
code for each unit based on its serial number. To enable the bipolar TUR function, users
have to enter this code via the text editor.
2. Improved currents for polypectomy and papillotomy. As the usual power setting procedure
is rather impractical for these currents, the cutting intensities are now controlled via 5 different grade settings. In addition, the short cutting phases are now process-controlled
(whereas they were previously subject to a rigid time regime).
These currents are characterized by alternating coagulation and cutting phases. Upon activation, the whole process starts with a coagulation phase. This setting can be globally reversed for these currents via a new submenu item in the Service menu. However, the default setting still starts with a coagulation phase.
3. Additional selection of the footswitch as an activation source for bipolar Auto Start currents
is no longer possible.
4. The maximum argon flow setting can now be globally limited to 3.0 l/min via the new submenu item Endo Flow in the Service menu.
110
V 5.0

Service Manual
5. If the unit has been turned off with a non-saved setting (characterized by the notice modified in the program-name text line of the screen), it will not be immediately ready for operation after switching it on again. Instead, a message will be displayed alerting the user to
the fact that the currently loaded setting differs from the last-used one. The user is then
required to confirm this information by pressing the rotary switch. This change is designed
to prevent accidental changes in settings (e.g. in the event of power failure). If the unit has
been switched on as a result of voltage recovery after power failure (and not with the power switch), this will be indicated in line 2.
6. Swedish has been integrated as an additional interactive language.
7. HW06 now offers two equivalent bipolar outputs, thus allowing instruments with finger
switches, instrument recognition function and port expansion function to be connected to
both bipolar outputs. However, this software version still does not support the instrument
recognition and port expansion functions.
8. If the application status of the neutral electrode changes from OK (green) to alarm
(red), the system now sounds two short alerts if no current has been activated. The alarm
sounded if HF activation is attempted remains the same as previously.
9. In the event of Argon Beamer problems, a short alert is sounded even if no HF current has
been activated. If the gas flow is obstructed, the HF current is now blocked as well.
10. If central gas supply is used, the filling level indicator now no longer displays any intermediate values just full or empty. The filling pressure for the full gas cylinder no longer
needs to be taught in; instead, it can now be selected across a range of 200 bar to 140
bar.
11. This software includes an updated software version V3.8 for the Argon Beamer. Updating
takes place automatically as soon as the Beamer has been connected to the maxium, provided the Beamer already has a bootloader.
12. The activation log has been extended to more than 2,000 entries. Moreover, the error and
activation logs are now no longer deleted when updating the software.
13. As a corresponding maxiumPC program is also available for this software version, the activation and error logs can now be read out and stored in a PC.
14. Two faults detected in SW2.368 have been removed.
V 5.0
111

Service Manual
Replacing Modules and Components on the ME402
This section explains how to dismount and reinstall the components of the ME402. Special aspects are discussed where applicable in this context. The numbers given in parentheses relate
to the spare parts lists provided in section 5, with several numbers referring to the different
socket modules. First thing with any unit is to clarify the hardware status. Specific differences
between the various hardware releases are highlighted as well.
6.1
Opening and Closing the Unit
1. Before opening the unit, disconnect power supply cable.

2. Remove the two screws located at the front of the housing bottom (at bottom edge of cover), then remove the two screws located at the top of the rear panel.
3. Withdraw housing top (1) backwards.
4. To close the housing, slide housing top (1) in place from the rear, inserting it correctly into
the groove provided in the front part (20) and into the two slots on the rear. Be sure to
slide top forward as far as it will go.
5. Reinsert the two screws at bottom front (bottom edge of cover) and the two screws at top
of rear panel, but do not tighten them until all four screws have been inserted. Place the
unit on a level surface to check that the reassembled housing is distortion-free. Take care
that the screws are mounted complete with contact washers. These washers ensure that the cover has proper protective conductor contact.
6. Thereafter, perform the safety checks specified in section 10.
6.2
Replacing the Front Part

2. Loosen the two screws which link the front part to the bottom part on the left and right side
and tilt front part slightly forwards.
3. Disconnect the bipolar socket connecting cables from connectors X3 and X4 on the bipolar
board.
4. Disconnect the monopolar socket cable from connector X9 on the monopolar socket module
(43/53/63) installed on front part. To perform this, remove insulating cover (49/59/69) of
the monopolar socket module by pulling it backwards.
5. Disconnect cable (24), which connects the front board to the controller board, from connector X4 on the controller board.
6. Disconnect cable (23), which connects the display screen to the controller board, from connector X2 located on the right side of the controller board.
7. With units up to HW03, disconnect the cables of the screen-illumination fluorescent tubes
from connectors X5 and X6 located on the left side of the controller board (at top and bottom, respectively). To disconnect the bottom connector, you must unlock the controller
board and lift it a little in its guide rails.
112
V 5.0

Service Manual
8. Swing the front part forward, then disconnect the NE socket connection from X9 and the
shield connection from X14 on the main board. Lift front part and remove it forwards.
9. To reinstall the front part of units up to HW03, first connect the cable of the lower fluorescent tube to X6 on the bottom left of the controller boards component side. To this end,
the cable must be run underneath the bottom edge of the board. If necessary, remove the
board from its guide rails and reinstall it with the cable connected. With units from HW04,
the fluorescent lamps are connected to the front board.
10. Connect the NE socket to X9 and the shield to X14 on the main board.
11. Swing front panel upwards, engaging it with the bottom edge of the housing bottom (2).
12. Connect the cable from the choke on the main board to X9 of the monopolar socket module. Then put the insulating cover (49/59/69) in place on the socket module, making sure
that the three spacers on the socket module engage with the holes provided in the insulating cover, with the cable leading to the choke being guided out downwards.
13. Connect the screen connecting cable to X2, the front board connecting cable to X4 and, for
units up to HW03, the upper fluorescent tube cable to X5 on the controller board.
14. Connect the cables of the two bipolar sockets to connectors X3 and X4 on the bipolar
board.
15. Screw front part to housing bottom on left and right.
16. Close unit as described in section 6.1, then perform safety checks.
6.3
Replacing the Socket Panel
To satisfy different markets, the ME402 comes with one of three different socket panels. If the
unit must be converted to adapt it to a different system, we recommend exchanging the entire
socket panel.
1. Open the unit as described in section 6.1, then remove the front part following the instructions given in section 6.2.
2. Disconnect cable (25) which connects the front board to the activation indicator board
from the activation indicator board (77).
3. Disconnect the membrane keypads flexible cable from X5 on front board.
4. Disconnect cable (26) which connects the front board to the NE status indicators from
the small indicator board (78) which carries the LEDs.
5. Remove the six screws with which the socket panel is fastened to the front frame, then
remove the socket panel from the front panel.
6. Attach new socket panel from the front and fix it in place with the 6 screws.
7. Connect the membrane keypads flexible cable to X5 on the front board.
8. Reconnect connecting cables to activation indicator board and NE status indicator board.
9. Reinstall front part as described in section 6.2, then reconnect unit as specified in section
6.1. Thereafter, perform functional check and safety checks.
V 5.0
113

Service Manual
6.4
Replacing the HF Output Sockets
As an alternative to replacing the entire socket panel, individual sockets can also be replaced
in case of wear or defect. However, this only applies to the bipolar sockets. As the two monopolar sockets form an integrated connection unit (43, 53 or 63), they must always be replaced
together.
1. Open unit as described in section 6.1, then remove front part as described in section 6.2.
2. Remove the screws of the defective socket, then take out the socket or socket module.
3. Insert the replacement part. Be sure to insert the monopolar socket module in the correct
position the HF power supply connector must be on the inner side. Transfer the plastic
supports of the insulating cover from the old part to the new one. In the case of the B2 bipolar socket of the m (KLS Martin) version (45), it is important to ensure that the outerring cutout is located at the top. In the case of the 4-mm B2 bipolar socket of the i version (55), the additional control contacts must be located on the outside, not the inside.
4. Reinstall front part as described in section 6.2, then reconnect unit as described in
section 6.1. Thereafter, perform functional check and safety checks.
6.5
Replacing the Socket Module Indicators and Backlights
The channel-selector and NE-status indicators consist of light-emitting diodes whose light is
transmitted through the socket module carrier to the front by (molded) transparent plastic
parts. While defective plastic light guides can be replaced individually, LED failure requires replacement of the whole board.
From hardware version 02, the connector between the activation indicator board (77) and the
socket backlight board (80) has been changed. Therefore, it is no longer compatible with old
boards (HW statuses 00 and 01). Only the new version is available as a spare part. Therefore,
both boards must be replaced in the case of HW00 or HW01 units.
From HW04, the light guides and the LEDs have been changed to surface-mount style (SMD).
1. Open the unit as described in section 6.1, then remove the front part following the instructions given in section 6.2.
2. If the NE status indicator is defective, disconnect cable (26) from the NE status indicator
board, then remove the screws and the board (and if necessary, the plastic light guide).
3. If an activation indicator or the socket backlight is defective, the m and i versions require removal of the socket module carrier as described in section 6.3 before you can remove the socket backlight board (80). This is also necessary for replacing the activation indicator board (77) because both boards are connected to each other. If you need to replace
the socket-illumination light distributor (42, 52, 62), all boards and all sockets must be
taken out (see section 6.4).
4. During reinstallation, be sure to insert the plastic light guides correctly into the socket
module frame. The plastic light guides for the activation indicators (48, 58, 68) are identical for all versions, whereas the plastic parts for the NE status indicators are different for the
m and e versions (47, 67) on the one hand and the i version (57) on the other hand.
As all of these components have an asymmetrical light exit, be sure to verify from the front
114
V 5.0

Service Manual
side that they have been installed correctly. In units with HW statuses 00 and 01, install
the activation indicator board (77) first and then the socket illumination board (80). When
mounting the latter, be sure to insert the 2-pin connector correctly into the socket provided
on the activation indicator board. With the new board versions, it is the other way round:
here, you must first install the socket illumination board (80) and then the activation indicator board (77). Finally, install the socket module carrier in the front frame, proceeding in
accordance with the instructions given in section 6.4.
5. If applicable, connect the flexible cable of the channel-selector membrane keypad to X5 on
the front board, then reconnect cable (25) to the activation indicator board and cable (26)
to the NE status indicator board. Finally, reinstall front part as described in section 6.2.
6. Reconnect the unit as described in section 6.1, then perform functional check and safety
checks.
6.6
Replacing the Rotary Switch and its Backlight
The rotary switch is available as a spare part either as a complete unit (30) or as individual
components: rotary switch (31), button (32) with hub (33), radial-bearing socket (35), fixing
bracket (36) and backlight ring (34).
From HW04, the backlight ring is fitted with SMD LEDs.
30
31
36
35 90 34
33
32
1. Open unit as described in section 6.1, then remove front part as described in section 6.2.
2. Disconnect the connecting cable from connector X2 on the front board.
3. Remove the two fixing screws with which the unit is mounted on the front frame, then take
out unit backwards, thereby disconnecting the LED/backlight board (79) from ring (34). If
you need to replace this board as well, first disconnect cable (27) from the board.
4. If you do not need to replace the entire unit, continue by taking out the rotary button (32)
backwards with your fingers. This requires application of some force.
5. Use a screwdriver to loosen the screw located at the front of hub (33), then remove the
hub from its shaft. Thereafter, remove backlight ring (34) together with rubber ring (90).
6. Use a wrench to loosen the bearing bush (35) with which the rotary switch is screwed to
fixing bracket (36).
7. During reinstallation, begin by mounting rotary switch (31) to fixing bracket (36), together
with bearing bush (35). Be sure to position the grounding cable connector correctly.
V 5.0
115

Service Manual
8. Place rubber ring (90) over the collar of the bearing bush, then put backlight ring (34) on
top so that the surface offset towards the inside is located on the upside.
9. Place the plastic hub (33) on the shaft, then slide it downwards as far as it will go and tighten the front screw. Subsequently, install the rotary button (32), inserting it as far as it will
go.
10. If required, change the grounding cable from the old part to the new one.
11. Insert the rotary switch unit into the front part. As the switch projects from the frame,
place the front part so that the region of the switch is free-standing (e.g. let this part
project over the edge of the table or support on which you place the front part with its
front surface down). Rotate the backlight ring so that the straight part of its edge is on the
upside (aligned horizontally). With units up to HW03, the LEDs of the backlight board (79)
have to be inserted into the three bore holes; with units from HW04, the three pins of a
small plug connector (pin header) are used for board fixation. The board is not fixed in
place separately, but is only supported by a vertical bar molded to the front part that prevents it from falling back out after installation. Mount the fixing bracket to the front frame
with the two screws. Note that in units with HW status 00 or 01, the lower of the two
screws is used also for fastening the grounding cable (18) which has its own connector on
the fixing bracket in units from HW02. Reconnect the rotary switch cable to X2 on the front
board and (if applicable) cable (27) to board (79).
12. Before installing the front part, check that the switch can be rotated freely and that the
axial switching function (axial click) has a clear action point.
13. Reinstall front part as described in section 6.2.
checks.
6.7
Replacing the ON-OFF Button
The ON-OFF button (22) is not a power switch but simply a button transferring a control signal
to the standby interface of the power manager board.
1. Open unit as described in section 6.1 and disconnect front part as described in section 6.2.
It is enough to disconnect the upper cable connectors and tilt the front part a little forward.
2. Disconnect the button cable from connector X4 on the front board (top), then press the
button out of the front part from the rear.
3. Insert the new button (22) into the front part from the front, ensuring that the centering
lug points upwards, so it can engage with the corresponding slot provided for this purpose
in the opening of the front part.
4. Reconnect cable to connector X4 on front board (76).
checks.
116
V 5.0

Service Manual
6.8
Replacing the Front Board
All buttons and indicators whose signal lines are routed through to the main controller are connected to the front board (76). This board is available as a (repaired) exchange part.
2. Disconnect the NE status indicators connecting cable (26) from connector X9 on the front
board, then disconnect the activation indicators connecting cable (25) from connector X7
and the channel selector buttons flexible cable from connector X5.
3. Disconnect the rotary switch cable from connector X2, the rotary-switch-backlight cable
(27) from X8, the MENU buttons flexible cable from X6 and the cable of the ON-OFF button
(22) from X4.
4. Remove the four fixing screws of the front board, then remove board.
X4 X10
X1
X13
X7
C40-2175
4806/040 VXX
X8
X5
X6
X2
X4 X10
X8
X1
X9
X13
101
X5
X24
X6
X2
X25
X7
X23
C40-2471
4107/010 VXX
X9
5. Prior to installing the new board, check screen cable (23) for firm connection to the screen
module (75). Up to HW03, this connector is held in place on the module by the pressure
plate (28); from HW04, this plate is obsolete due to use of a different cable.
6. Attach front board (76) to front part with the four screws.
7. Connect the MENU buttons flexible cable to X6, the ON-OFF button to X4, cable (27) of the
rotary switch backlight to X8 and the rotary switch to X2. As the connectors are different,
misconnection is prevented.
8. Connect the channel selector buttons flexible cable to X5, the activation indicator cable
(25) to X7 and NE-indicator cable (26) to X9.
V 5.0
117

Service Manual
9. Reinstall the front part as described in section 6.2.
checks.
6.9
Replacing the Screen Module and the Protective Glass Pane
The screen module (75) should be replaced in a dust-free environment to prevent any unwanted particles between the screen and the protective pane (21). To prevent the screenmodule and protective panes from getting electrostatically charged, we recommend placing
them on a clean, antistatic surface (e.g. covered with a soft, lint-free, natural-fiber cloth).
When handling the screen module, be sure to observe the working guidelines relating to ESDsensitive components. Unlike the other electronics components, the screen module cannot be
repaired and, therefore, is not available as a (refurbished) exchange part.
2. Remove front board (76) as described in section 6.8.
3. Disconnect the four screws that attach the screen module to the front part. The screw located next to the connecting cable connector is used also for fastening the electrical connection required for shielding the module. Remove screen module upwards and disconnect
connecting cable (23) if necessary.
4. If you just need to replace the fluorescent tubes, unlock the black plastic clips (lifting them
a little), then withdraw the tubes longitudinally. Insert the new tubes fully, making sure
that the plastic clips engage correctly.
5. If you want to replace the protective pane, remove the inner gasket, then take out the
glass pane (complete with its outer seal) by pressing it inwards.
6. Before installing the new pane, check it for cleanness (no dust or finger prints!). If necessary, clean it with a soft cloth.
7. Place the protective glass pane on a clean, antistatic surface with its outer surface upside,
then put the new, soft external gasket supplied in place on the glass pane (around the
shoulder or inner part). Verify that the rounded-off edge of the outside contour of the protective pane is upside, whereas the bottom edge is not rounded off so the glass can only
be installed in this way. Insert both components into the front part from the inside (hold
front part over the glass pane thus prepared, with its outer surface upside). Take care not
to touch the glass surface with your fingers when doing this (we recommend using a piece
of cloth or wearing gloves). Then turn the whole assembly around and check that the external seal is correctly in place on the shoulder of the glass pane and does not protrude underneath the glass.
8. Install the dark inner gasket on the inner side of the protective pane, then put the screen
module in place, installing it straight/perpendicularly from above and fitting it to the front
part with the four screws. Note that the tube connectors must be on the side of the HF output sockets. The screw next to the connector is used also for connecting the shield (in units
up to HW03: the cable lug of connecting cable (23); in units from HW04: a separate cable).
Connect cable (23) to the plug connector.
118
V 5.0

Service Manual
9. Check from the front that the screen module and the protective pane are correctly installed
and the gaskets have not been dislocated during the process.
10. Reinstall front board (76) as described in section 6.8 and the front part as described in
section 6.2.
checks.
6.10
Replacing the Controller Board
The controller board (71) stores the user settings. As far as possible, therefore, these settings
should be saved prior to replacing this module, or loaded down as described in section 4. When
handling the controller board, be sure to observe the working guidelines relating to ESDsensitive components. This board is available as a (refurbished) exchange part. Spare or replacement parts are shipped with the most recent software available, so no update is required.
1. Open unit as described in section 6.1.
2. Unlock the controller board by removing the locking pins located at the upper ends of the
support rails.
3. Disconnect the serial interface cable (8) from X10 and the front-board connecting cable
(24) from X4.
4. Disconnect the cables of the two footswitch sockets (5) and (6) from X8 and X9.
5. Disconnect the screen-module connecting cable (23) from X2 at the controller board. With
units up to HW03 (controller boards I and II), this connector is located on the boards rear
side. If necessary, loosen the screws of the front part according to 6.2 and tilt the front
slightly forward to get better access to the connector.
6. With units up to HW03, disconnect the connecting cables of the fluorescent tubes from the
connectors X5 and X6. To disconnect the lower tubes cable from the connector X6 at the
boards lower edge, pull the board a little upward in its rails, then withdraw board upwards.
X4
X10
X5
X9
X2
X8
101
X11
lt 1
86 1
93 042
93 337
10
101
10
471
501
STS 0848
PBRM0816
939387
X500
471
471
X1 Board Connector
X6
V 5.0
119

Service Manual
X4
X10
X2
X8
X9
X11
X3
10
501
10
101
X1 Board Connector
101
471
471
7. Prior to installing a new board of version I or II, check jumper X500 for correct position. If
necessary, set it to the same position as used with the old board (concerns adjustment to
Erbe footswitch). With units up from HW04, check the jumper array X3 and configure X3 of
the new part in the same way as X3 on the old part.
8. For reinstallation in units up to HW03 (with controller board I or II), start with inserting the
board into its supporting rails, then connect the cable of the lower fluorescent tube to X6
first. The cable must be routed underneath the bottom edge of the board to the connector
located on the upper side. Note that the connecting plug is not rotationally symmetric and
can only be inserted in one position. Thereafter, with units of up to HW03, connect the
screen-module cable (23) to X2 on the boards rear side, then press the board downwards
in its support rails and lock it with the locking pins provided at the upper ends of the rails.
If necessary, screw front part in place again.
9. Reconnect the cables of the two footswitch sockets (5) and (6) to X8 and X9, respectively.
As the cable connectors differ in pin number, misconnection is prevented.
10. Connect the connecting cable of the upper fluorescent tube to connector X5 (units up to
HW03 only), the serial interface cable (8) to X10 and the front-board connecting cable (24)
to X4. Since the serial interface cable also fits X4 in units up to HW03, it is important to ensure a correct match to prevent misconnection.
11. With units up from HW04 (controller board III), connect the flexible flat connector from the
screen to X2 on the component side. For this purpose, the connector is to be guided around
the support rail. Take care that the flat connector is not subject to mechanical stress or
kinked in the plug area.
12. The controller board has no adjusting positions. Before closing the unit, reconnect the power cord and verify that the unit is operational. Thereafter, disconnect power cord again.
checks.
120
V 5.0

Service Manual
6.11
Replacing the Power Manager Board
The power manager board (72) houses two separate electric circuits. One of them connects to
the mains voltage, with some of its components carrying a voltage of up to 390 V to ground.
For this reason, this part of the board has a protective cover. The other part is connected to
signal mass and therefore uncovered. It also houses the adjusting positions. The power manager board is available as a (refurbished) exchange part.
Never pull out or insert the power manager board while mains voltage is present!
Non-compliance may destroy the transistors of the main boards power supply part!

2. Disconnect the serial-interface (8) connecting cable from X10 on the controller board.
3. Disconnect the optical fiber (14) from its screw connection on the monopolar board (73).
4. Unlock board by removing the locking pins at the upper ends of the support rails, then
withdraw board upwards.
5. When replacing the board, transfer the protective cover (17) complete with fixtures and
the plastic optical fiber (14) to the new board.
15V 5V FR DCM
DC -
PSO
PR UR
REL USO
xxxx
X11
SFH 350 V
101
X6
DCM
WDC
CNY65
V415 J 19
X7
USO
PSO
X9
GND
GND
X5
X10
CNY65
V415 J 19
S1
CNY65
V415 J 19
X4
PVW
X3
I2
C40-2169
0406 /034 VXX
5VW
200071-10
0.125mH
2.0 A
10
10
X8
101
VH
10
X1
X2
V 5.0
121

Service Manual
DCM
DCB
DC -
USO
X7
xxxx
SFH 350 V
X11
PSO
X8
xxxx
SFH 350 V
DCB
10
101
GND
X14
REL
X10
S1
CNY65
V415 J 19
C40-2337
2606/001 VXX
101
CNY65
V415 J 19
X1
WD5
I2
X5
GND
PVW
200071-10
0.125mH
2.0 A
10
X9
5V
15V
X13
WDC
10
USO
DCM
CNY65
V415 J 19
10
PSO
X4 X3
VH
X2
6. Insert the new board into its support rails, then slide it downward as far as it will go and
lock it in place with the locking pins located at the upper ends of the rails.
7. Reinsert the plastic optical fiber (14) into the screw connection on the monopolar board
and tighten. Be sure to insert fiber fully (approx. 17mm), then reconnect the connecting
cable of the serial interfaces (8) to X10 on the controller board.
8. Before closing the unit, reconnect the power cord and check the settings for correctness,
following the instructions given in section 10.2. Adjust if necessary, then disconnect power
cord again.
checks.
122
V 5.0

Service Manual
6.12
Replacing the Monopolar Board
The monopolar board (73) is the (outer) left one of the two patient circuit boards. This board is
available as a (refurbished) exchange part.
xxxx
SFH350 V
530-030 10
530-030 10
X5
530-030 10
HM12-1A83-06-UL
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
X3
HM12-1A83-06-UL
X2
530-030 10
501
C40-2224
1506/017 VXX
101
X4
530-030 10
530-030 10
X1 Board Connector
ME402 Monopolarmodul 2 Xnummeriert.dsf 25.08.06
xxxx
SFH756 V
GND
530-030 10
10
10
530-030 10
NEI
X5
530-030 10
HM12-1A83-06-UL
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
X3
X4
10
HM12-1A83-06-UL
X2
530-030 10
C40-2281
1806/012 VXX
530-030 10
530-030 10
ME402 Monopolarmodul 3 Xnummeriert.dsf 25.08.06
X1 Board Connector
101
X6

2. Disconnect optical fiber (14) from the screw connection located on the rear side of the
board.
3. Disconnect the connecting cable of the monopolar output choke from connector X3 and the
two cables of the auxiliary voltage supply for the finger switch control from connectors X4
and X5 located at the front edge of the board.
V 5.0
123

Service Manual
4. Unlock board by opening the locking pins at the upper ends of the support rails, then lift
board a little. Disconnect the high-voltage supply cable (16) from connector X2 on the main
board, then withdraw monopolar board upwards.
5. Insert the new board into the support rails and slide it half-way downwards, then connect
the high-voltage supply cable (16) from main board to X2. Use this position also to connect
the two cables of the auxiliary power supply for the finger switch control to connectors X4
and X5 and the plug of the output choke to X3 located at the front edge of the board.
6. Insert board fully and secure it by closing the locking pins at the upper ends of the support
bars. Reconnect the plastic optical fiber (14) to the screw connector, inserting it fully (approx. 17mm). With units from HW03, make sure that the socket X6 at the end of the freestanding tongue of the board engages correctly with the pins of plug connector X27 on the
main board when pushing down the board in its support rails.
7. Before closing the unit, reconnect the power cord and check the NE monitor setting, then
check the monopolar finger switches and the NE monitor for proper functioning. Check the
transfer characteristic of the optical link according to section 10.2.1 for HW00 to HW02, or
section 10.2.2 for units from HW03. Thereafter, disconnect the power cord again.
8. Close the unit as described in section 6.1, then perform functional check and safety checks.
6.13
Replacing the Bipolar Board
The bipolar board (74) is the right (inner) board of the two patient circuit boards. This PCB is
available as a (refurbished) exchange part.
2. Disconnect the optical fiber (14) from its screw connection on the monopolar board (73).
3. Disconnect the two connecting cables of the bipolar HF output sockets (44, 54 or 64) and
(45, 55 or 65) from connectors X3 and X4, and disconnect the cable of the bipolar output
transformer from connector X2.
4. Unlock board by opening the locking pins at the upper ends of the support rails, then withdraw board upwards.
5. Insert the new board into the support rails and press it downwards as far as it will go, then
secure it by closing the locking pins located at the upper ends of the rails.
124
V 5.0

Service Manual
X4
X3
X2
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
STS 0434
C89-0170
PBRM08470
UPR.10KV
530-030 10
IMP2 IMP1 IC
X9 X10 X11
STS 0448
1278639
STS 0448
1278639
IMP1 IC
IMP2
F2
530-030 10
530-030 10
GND
X12
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
10
10
C40-1930
4904/015 VXX
10
X1 Board Connector
F1
ME402 Bipolarmodul 1 Xnummeriert.dsf 27.08.06
X4
X2
X2
X3
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
STS 0448
1278639
STS 0448
1278639
10
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
X24
530-030 10
530-030 10
530-030 10
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
10
X4
C40-2155
3805/045 VXX
X2
STS 0521
C89-0170
PBRM08470
UPR.10KV
10
X3
10
X15
X16
GND
GND
X1 Board Connector
6. Reconnect the two connecting cables of the bipolar HF output sockets (44, 54 or 64) and
(45, 55 or 65) to connectors X3 and X4, and reconnect the cable of the bipolar output
transformer to connector X2.
7. Insert the optical fiber (14) into the screw connection on the monopolar board (73) and
tighten. Be sure to insert fiber as far as it will go (approx. 17 mm).
8. Reconnect the power cord and check impedance monitors and instrument recognition function for proper adjustment, following the instructions given in section 10.4. Check optical
link for proper functioning according to section 10.2.1 or 10.2.2. Subsequently, disconnect
the power supply cable again. The spare/replacement part is delivered completely adjusted.
9. Close unit as described in section 6.1, then perform functional check and safety checks.
V 5.0
125

Service Manual
6.14
Replacing the Main Board
The main board (70) houses the power electronics components and all boards not installed on
the front part. The main board is available as a (refurbished) exchange part.
X1
B82625-B2602-M1
6A / 250V~
2 x 0,18mH
F1
F2
913046
lt1057 0406
530-030 10
X6 Bipolar Board Connector
530-030 10
530-030 10
X7 Monopolar Board Connector
47 M SD
V 15487
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
47 M SD
530-030 10
F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
X21
X2
913046
lt1057 0406
X3 Powermanager Board Connector 1

913046
lt1057 0406
to X2 at
Bipolar Board
STS 0547 'LF'

1278637
X17
GT1
lt 2355
lt 2355
0523
to X3 at
Monopolar Board
0523
X18
GT2
X13
to X4 and X5 at
Monopolar Board
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
C40-2165
0606/029 VXX
X15
VDC
X16
GND
STS 0550 'LF'

1278636
STS 0606
1348633 'LF'
X12
X5 Controller Board Connector

X9
X14
ME402 Hauptplatine 2 Xnummeriert.dsf 25.08.06
to X1 at
Connector Module
2. Remove front part as described in section 6.2 and dismount controller board (71) as described in section 6.10.
3. If you need to replace the board, you must also remove the power manager board (72) in
acc. with section 6.11, the monopolar board (73) in acc. with 6.12 and the bipolar board
(74) in acc. with 6.13.
4. Disconnect the cable of the loudspeaker (10) from connector X8 located on the right at the
front of the main board.
5. Disconnect the PSU connecting cable (15) from connector X1 located on the left at the back
of the main board.
6. HW status 01 and higher: Disconnect the two cables of the Argon Beamer connecting socket (7) from connectors X2 and X21 located behind the power manager board connector on
the main board.
126
V 5.0

Service Manual
7. Disconnect the fan (11) cable from connector X12.
8. Using a size-7 socket wrench, disconnect the 8 self-locking nuts with which the main board
is fitted to the housing bottom. Lift the board a little at the front, then take it off the bolts
at the rear and withdraw it diagonally upwards at the front, thereby pulling the cable of fan
(11) out through the boards bore hole.
X1
B82625-B2602-M1
6A / 250V~
2 x 0,18mH
F1
X27
F2
913046
lt1057 0406
X6 Bipolar Board Connector
530-030 10
530-030 10
530-030 10
X7 Monopolar Board Connector
47 M SD
V 15487
prim 240V/50-60Hz 1-5

sek 15V/0,5 VA 7-9
47 M SD
530-030 10
F1 M0,125A
F2 M1,6A
X21
913046
X2
lt1057 0406

913046
lt1057 0406
to X2 at
Bipolar Board
STS 0547 'LF'

1278637
X17
GT1
lt 2355
lt 2355
0406
to X3 at
Monopolar Board
0406
X18
GT2
X13
to X4 and X5 at
Monopolar Board
STS 0605
1295638 'LF'
C40-2346
1906/004 VXX
X16
GND
X15
VDC
STS 0550 'LF'

1278636
X8
STS 0606
1348633 'LF'
X12
X5 Controller Board Connector

X9
X14
ME402 Hauptplatine 3 Xnummeriert.dsf 25.08.06
to X1 at
Connector Module
9. Before installing the new board, the guide rails must be transferred from the old board to
the new one. When using a main board I, be sure to transfer the insulating washers underneath the screws as well.
10. To mount the new main board, hold it at an angle, with back end pointing downwards, and
guide it underneath the rear-wall components. Before doing this, verify that all studs have
spacers. From below, pull the fan (11) cable through the boards bore hole located next to
connector X12, then install the board on the stay-bolts, taking care that the bunch of
cables (belonging to footswitches and loudspeaker) runs on the right side underneath the
main board and can be easily guided without getting squeezed to the upper side of the
board through the cutout provided in its right side. Subsequently, fix board in place with
the eight nuts.
11. Connect the connecting cable of fan (11) to connector X12 and the cable of the loudspeaker (10) to connector X8 located on the right at the front of the main board. Plug the PSU
connecting cable (15) into connector X1 located on the rear left. Connect the two cables of
V 5.0
127

Service Manual
the Argon Beamer connecting socket (7) to connectors X2 and X21 located behind the
power manager board connector on the main board (from HW01).
12. If previously removed, reinstall the power manager board (72) as described in section
6.11, the monopolar board (73) as described in 6.12, and the bipolar board (74) as described in 6.13
13. Reinstall front part as described in 6.2 and controller board (71) as described in 6.10.
14. Reconnect the power cord and verify that unit is operational. Although there are no adjusting positions on the main board, the basic power setting as well as the transfer characteristic of the optical link must be checked and adjusted if necessary if the main board has
been replaced (for power setting, see section 10.2; for optical link adjustment, see section
10.3). Thereafter, disconnect the power cord again.
6.15
Replacing the Footswitch Sockets or Loudspeakers
If one of the footswitch sockets (5) or (6) or the loudspeaker (10) is defective, the entire module complete with connecting cable must be replaced.
2. Remove front part as described in section 6.2 and controller board (71) as described in
section 6.10. If required for better access to the defective module on the rear wall, remove
power manager board (72) as well (see section 6.11).
3. Disconnect the cable of loudspeaker (10) from connector X8 located on the right at the
front of the main board.
4. Using a size-7 socket wrench, remove the eight self-locking nuts that hold the main board
to the housing bottom. Lift the board a little on the right side so the bunch of cables located underneath can be pulled out more easily.
5. Cut the cable fasteners holding the cables together, then disconnect the connecting cable
of the defective module and dismount the latter from the rear wall. In the case of the small
footswitch socket of HW00 and HW01, you need a special tool to do this. However, the
threaded ring that holds the socket in place (sometimes two rings were used, one on top of
the other) can also be removed with a normal screwdriver just insert the blade into one
of the slots and instead of rotating the screwdriver apply counterclockwise tangential
pressure to the ring. Spare parts feature a hex nut which is easier to mount. As from hardware status 02, the loudspeaker comes mounted on M3 threaded bolts with insulating nipples.
6. Install the new module on the rear wall. In the case of the small footswitch socket, place
the part into the mounting hole, pull the cable through the hex nut and screw nut in place
on the socket. Be sure to meet the plastic fine pitch thread correctly (no jamming!) and do
not tighten too much. Take the connecting cable to the right and combine it with the two
other cables. Install the loudspeaker in the same way as you removed it.
7. Lift the main board a little on its right, place the cables underneath it and lay them out behind the stay-bolts in such a way that they can be easily routed upwards, without getting
128
V 5.0

Service Manual
squeezed, through the cutout provided in the right edge of the board. If available, use a
cable fastener to bind the cables together. Reinstall the main board with the eight selflocking nuts.
8. If applicable, reinstall the power manager board (72) as described in section 6.11.
9. Reinstall front part as described in section 6.2 and controller board (71) as described in
section 6.10.
10. Reconnect the power cord and check that unit is operational, then disconnect mains cable
again.
6.16
Replacing the Power Supply Socket, the Serial Interface Unit

or the Argon Beamer Connector
The power supply socket (3), the serial interface unit (8) and in units with HW status 01 or
higher the connecting socket for the maxium Beamer (7) are all located on the rear panel of
the unit and can be replaced without any need to remove the main board.
2. If better access to the defective part is needed, remove power manager board (72) as well
(see section 6.11).
3. If you need to replace the power supply socket (3), disconnect the main-board connecting
cable (15) and the protective conductor (PE). Remove the two fixing nuts, then remove the
socket inwards. When installing the new socket, do not forget to transfer the fuse holder
(4) from the old part to the new one.
4. If you need to replace the serial interface unit (8), remove the four nuts and withdraw the
unit inwards. When installing the new unit, ensure that the male DSUB9 socket is located
on the left (towards the power supply socket) and the female DSUB9 socket is located on
the right (footswitch socket side).
5. If you need to replace the Argon Beamer connecting socket (7), begin by disconnecting the
cables from connectors X2 and X21 on the main board. With HW01 units, this socket is still
mounted by way of a threaded ring (sometimes even two rings are used, one on top of the
other). A special tool is usually needed to remove the threaded ring(s). However, you can
also use a normal screwdriver. Just insert the blade into one of the slots and instead of
rotating the screwdriver apply counterclockwise tangential pressure to the ring. Spare
parts are provided with a hex nut which is easier to mount. Insert the new component into
the opening from the outside, then guide the two connectors and the PE terminal through
the nut and screw nut in place on the socket, taking care to introduce the plastic fine
thread correctly (no jamming). Do not overtighten! Fix PE conductor cable in place on the
rear wall, then reconnect the two cable plugs to X2 and X21 on the main board.
6. Reconnect the power cord and check that unit is operational, then again disconnect mains
cable.
V 5.0
129

Service Manual
Technical Description of the ME402 with MB402

Option
7.1
General Information
The Martin ME402 maxium is a universally applicable high-frequency (HF) surgical unit satisfying all requirements of clinical users as well as specialized private practitioners. As an accessory, the Argon Beamer MB402 is available, which has been specially optimized for use with
the ME402 maxium and is completely controlled via the latter. Both units and the gas cylinder
can be conveniently installed on the maxium Cart, a special equipment trolley.
Compared with its predecessors, the ME402 has been upgraded with a range of new features,
especially the following:
Wide-range power supply unit for supply voltages of 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50 Hz to 60 Hz.
Operation through an 8.4-inch TFT color screen with background illumination (provided by
2 fluorescent tubes).
Selection of numerical values via rotary switch with axial switching function and channel
selector buttons.
Novel operating concept taking ergonomic aspects into account.
Two equivalent monopolar HF outputs that can be activated either by finger switches
(pushbuttons) on the electrode handle or by a freely assignable footswitches.
Neutral electrode monitoring with on-screen indicators.
Two bipolar HF outputs one activated with a freely assignable footswitch or by impedance-dependent automatic control; the second activated with a freely assignable footswitch, or by impedance-dependent automatic control, or with the instruments finger
switches. This second output features an instrument recognition function as well. From
HW02, it also allows connecting two different instruments for bipolar cutting and bipolar
coagulation which can be activated separately.
Exchangeable socket modules for connection of KLS Martin accessories and US-specific accessories. Besides, an extra version is available for connecting Erbe accessories.
Up to 100 settings can be stored as user-specific application programs.
The Argon Beamer MB402 (available as an accessory) is completely powered, controlled

and activated through the ME402.
Serial CAN interface for making the ME402 part of an integrated OR system, as well as for
communication with other medical equipment.
RS232 serial interface for convenient software updating directly from your PC, for transferring settings and for other servicing purposes.
130
V 5.0

Service Manual
7.2
Design and Servicing Concept
The bottom part of the ME402s housing functions simultaneously as a chassis for all the other
modules and assemblies. The front part, also fitted to the bottom of the housing, serves as a
separate mounting rack (module carrier) for the instrument connecting sockets, the display
screen, the rotary switch and the buttons and indicators, plus the associated boards with the
electronic components required for their operation. Whereas the large front board is an exchange part that can be repaired/refurbished by the manufacturer and is offered at a reduced
exchange price, the small boards accommodating only the light sources for the indicators and
backlights are not available as refurbished parts. The same applies to the TFT screen board.
The main board houses the power electronics for the power supply units, the HF current generator and four other modules required for the associated signal electronics. While the latter can
only be replaced by the Technical Service, the main board can be both replaced and repaired
on the component level (by the specialized dealer or the hospital technician himself). The main
board features only the large power electronics components. While it is true that these components have the highest failure probability, checking/testing and replacing them is relatively
easy.
The Argon Beamer MB402s main board contains the pneumatic valve block with associated
control and regulation electronics including a microcontroller. Moreover, the MB402 has a small
front board containing the status indicator LEDs. The PURGE button is also connected to this
small board. The MB402 is powered and operated/controlled through the ME402 via a connecting cable attached on the rear side of the unit.
7.3
Functional Description of the ME402
The electronics of the ME402 can be subdivided into the following functional units:
Power supply units
HF generator and HF current paths
Monopolar applied part
Bipolar applied part
Main controller with interfaces
Front part
7.3.1
Power Supply Units (PSUs)
From the mains alternating voltage, the power supply units generate the voltages required for
the HF generator, the control system and, if connected, the Argon Beamer MB402. In this
process, the mains voltage nominally ranging between 100 V and 240 V, depending on the
location is rectified and brought to a fixed, direct voltage of 390 V. Thereafter, two paralleled
stages generate the fixed auxiliary supply voltages of +15 V and +5 V for the main controller
and the Argon Beamer, as well as the variable voltage VDC needed for HF generator operation.
V 5.0
131
132
V 5.0
ME402 block diagram: Power supply units, HF generator and main controller HW00, HW01
argon
beamer
connector
(from
HW 01)
X2.5
ON/
OFF
key
X2.2 MOSA
X2.3 MISA
+15V
X4.19
X1.19
X4.32a
X4.32c
X4.19
X1.19
X21.1
X21.2
X21.3
X4.3
X1.3
T1
X4.4
X1.4
X5.31a
X4.3c
X3.3a H1
X3.6a H2
PFC controller
X4.9c
X4.9a
X3.12a AC
X3.8a DCX3.8c CT+
X14.2
X14.1
T3
+15V
+15V +5V
X3.16ac DC-
15V
T2
X4.27ac HAC2
X4.12a PT2X4.11a PT1+
T5
X4.7c
X5.27a
T4
C40-1926 main controller board I
X4.4c
X5.30a OC-
F1
PR
X4.1c VDC
REL
TON X4.21a
+15V
L5
X4.1a RELO
X4.2a REL
footswitch interface sec.
X4.20c
X4.8a
X4.8c
T6
T7
X5.18a
X5.26c
X5.26a
T8
FCT1
FCT2
F2
C40-1928
front board
WDC
VH
C40-1927
powermanager board I
X5.24a MOSPX4.10c
X5.24c MISP X4.10a
X5.25a
X5.25c
L3
+15V
X4.3a
X4.1
X4.11
X4.14
X1.14
mains
part
X4.5
X1.5
X1.1
X2.6
X4.2
X4.13
X4.15
X1.15
X4.30ac
X3.1a DC+
X4.4a
X5.30c
X3.9a HT2+
X3.4c HT2X3.10a HT1+
X5.14ac
X5.16ac+15VX4.28ac
X5.15ac +5V X4.29ac
X4.20a
X5.18c
X4.11c PT1-
X8.2
X8.4
X9.2
X9.3
X10.3
serial interface primary
X4.23a HFON
X10.5
X10.8
X1.1
X4.6
X1.6
X1.2
X2.7
+5VD
X4.16
X1.16
X1.2
X4.7
X1.7
X5.31c
X1.13
X2.9
X4.12
X4.9
mains cord
connector
Housing connected to PE
X6.1
X6.2
membrane keys
channel selection
X6.1
X6.2
X2.3
X2.4
X1.11
X2.10
X1.12
X4.10
X1.10
X1.9
X4.31ac
X4.13ac
X5.1
X5.2
X6.1
X6.2
X4.26ac HAC1
X4.16a PT2+
X4.19c
X5.19a
X5.29c PSO X4.5a

X5.28c
X4.6a
X5.27c
X4.7a
X5.29a USO X4.5c
X5.28a
X4.6c
X5.19c
X4.19a
X8.1
COGB
X8.3
COG1
X9.1
COG2
single/small footswitch
X10.4
CAN bus interface
X10.14
X10.16
RS232 serial interface
X10.20
X10
V10
C40-1925
main board I
X11
X5.17c
X5.2c NTC1
X5.3c NTC2
T9
V11
X5.13c GT1
LSP1 X5.32a
LSP2 X5.32c
T10
speaker
L7
X5.13a GT2
V13
V12

Service Manual
+15V
C40-1926
main controller I
X12.2
FAN X5.1c
X12.1
X5.2a BHI
X5.1a BLO
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
X5.7a
X5.7c
X5.5a
X5.5c
X5.4c
X5.4a
X5.12c
X5.9c
X5.9a
X5.11c
X5.8c
X5.11a
X5.8a
X5.10c
X5.10a
L8
IEN2
IEN1
IC
CSMO
T11
T13
X7.26c
X7.26a
X7.28c
X7.29c
X7.31c
X7.30c
X721a
X7.24a
X7.24c
X7.22a
X7.25a
X7.22c
X7.25c
X7.23a
X7.23c
X13
+12V
X2.5
X2.1
C40-1930
bipolar board I
+12VD
+12V
digital
circuitry
supply
+5V
monopolar applied part

NE side
X6.16a
X6.15a
X4.1
ACM3 X4.1
CT1
C40-1929 monopolar board I
X5.1
X4.2
PIN1
CG1
MOSI
ACM5 X5.1
ACM4 X4.2
DGND
+15V
PIN1
MISO
T12
+15V
-CSM X6.2a
X7.7a CSM-
DCI
+15V
+CSM X6.1a
X7.8a CSM+
CSM
-CLK X6.6a
X7.5a CLK-
+15V
+CLK X6.5a
X7.6a CLK+
bipolar applied part
X3.2
X3.1
X4.1
X4.2
X4.4
X4.5
IC2
NE socket
output B1
output B2
NE socket
output M2
output M2
PIN2
X9.9
X9.10
X9.9
X4.6
X9.1
X9.2
X9.10
X9.2
X9.1
output M1
X3.9
L6
monopolar
applied part
AE side
output M1
X3.10
X3.2
X3.1
NE contact
monitor
FAIL
CT2
CG2
NE2 X6.16c
X7.16c HAC1
PIN2
NE1 X6.15c
X7.17c HAC2
X5.2
socket module KLSMARTIN version
ACM6 X5.2
output B1
output B2
socket module international version
V 5.0
output B1
output B2
NE socket
output M2
X9.9
X9.10
X9.2
X9.1
output M1
socket module for Erbe accessories
main board I
C40-1925

Service Manual
ME402 block diagram: Applied parts HW00, HW01
133
134
V 5.0
ME402 block diagram: Power supply units, HF generator and main controller HW02
argon
beamer
connector
X2.5
ON/
OFF
key
+15V
X2.2 MOSA
X2.3 MISA
X21.1
X21.2
X21.3
X4.32a
X4.32c
X4.19
X1.19
T1
X4.19
X1.19
X5.31a
mains
part
X4.3
X1.3
X4.3c
X3.3a H1
X3.6a H2
PFC controller
X3.12a AC
X3.8a DCX3.8c CT+
X14.2
X14.1
X4.4c
X5.30a OC-
+15V
+15V +5V
X3.9a HT2+
X5.14ac
X5.16ac+15VX4.28ac
X5.15ac +5V X4.29ac
T3
front board
X3.1a DC+
X4.4a
X5.30c
F1
X3.16ac DC-
15V
X4.27ac HAC2
T2
X4.7c
X5.27a
X4.12a PT2X4.11a PT1+
T5
X4.20a
X5.18c
T4
C40-2217 main controller board II
WDC
VH
C40-2169
powermanager board II
X5.24c MISP X4.10a

X4.9c
X4.9a
L3
X5.24a MOSPX4.10c
X5.25a
signal
inputs/
outputs
PR
X4.1c VDC3
L5
X4.1a RELO
X4.2a REL
+15V
T6
T7
X5.29c PSO X4.5a

X5.28c
X4.6a
X5.27c
X4.7a
X5.29a USO X4.5c
X5.28a
X4.6c
X5.6c
T8
FCT1
X5.18a
X4.20c
X5.26c
X4.8a
X5.26a
X4.8c
X5.23c 5VW X4.18c
X4.23c
X5.7a
F2
X8.3
FCT2
L4
X4.4
X1.4
+15V
X4.3a
X4.1
X4.2
X4.14
X1.14
X5.25c
X4.30ac
X1.2
X4.5
X1.5
X1.1
X2.6
X4.13
X4.11
X4.15
X1.15
X8.2
X8.4
X9.1
X9.2
X9.3
X4.23a HFON
X4.21a TON
serial interface secondary
X10.5
X10.8
X10.20
X1.1
X4.6
X1.6
X1.2
X2.7
+5VD
X4.16
X1.16
X4.31ac
X4.13ac
L2
X4.7
X1.7
X5.31c
X1.13
X2.9
X4.12
X4.9
X1.9
X6.2
mains cord
socket
housing connected to PE
X6.1
X6.2
membrane keys
channel selection
X6.1
X6.2
X2.3
X2.4
X1.11
X2.10
X1.12
X4.10
X1.10
X5.1
X5.2
X6.1
X4.26ac HAC1
X4.17a PT2+
X4.19c
X5.19a
X4.11c PT1-
X8.1
COGB
COG1
COG2
X10.3
X10.4
CAN bus interface
X10.14
X10.16
X10.18
X5.19c
X10.15
X11
X16
GND
T9
V11
X10
V10
X15
VCD
X5.13c GT1
C40-2165
main board II
X5.17c
X5.2c
X5.3c
LSP1 X5.32a
LSP2 X5.32c
T10
speaker
L7
X5.13a GT2
X17
GT1
X18
GT2
V13
V12

Service Manual
+15V
C40-2217
main controller II
X5.1a BLO
X5.2a
X5.12a MHI
+15V
+15V
+15V
X5.5a
X5.5c
X5.4c
X5.4a
X5.12c
X5.9c
X5.9a
X5.11c
X5.8c
X5.11a
X5.8a
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.7c
L8
IEN2
IEN1
IC
CSMO
T13
X7.26c
X7.28c
X7.29c
X7.31c
X7.30c
X7.21a
X7.24a
X7.24c
X7.22a
X7.25a
X7.22c
X7.25c
X7.23a
X7.23c
X7.26a
T11
X13
X2.5
X2.1
digital
circuitry
supply
+5V
monopolar
applied part
NE side
+12V
C40-2155
bipolar board II
X6.16a
X6.15a
+12VD
+12V
C40-2224 monopolar board II
X4.1
SH
CG1
MOSI
ACM3 X4.1
PIN1
MISO
X5.1
X4.2
+15V
+15V
X5.3a
DGND
+15V
X5.7a
X12.2
FAN X5.1c
X12.1
-CSM X6.2a
X7.7a CSM-
NE contact
monitor
FAIL
X4.6
X3.2
X3.1
X4.1
X4.2
X4.4
X4.5
IC2
NE socket
output B1
output B2
NE socket
output M2
output M2
L6
X9.9
X9.9
X9.10
X9.2
X9.1
X9.10
X9.2
X9.1
output M1
X3.9
X3.2
X3.1
monopolar
applied part
AE side
output M1
X3.10
PIN2
NE1 X6.15c
ACM5 X5.1
ACM4 X4.2
+15V
+CSM X6.1a
DCI
+15V
+CLK X6.5a
X7.6a CLK+
CG2
NE2 X6.16c
X7.16c
HAC1
CSM
-CLK X6.6a
X7.5a CLK-
X7.8a CSM+
+15V
T12
X7.17c
HAC2
X5.2
ACM6 X5.2
output B1
output B2
V 5.0
NE socket
output M2
X9.9
X9.10
X9.2
X9.1
output M1
output B1
output B2
main board II
C40-2165

Service Manual
ME402 block diagram: Applied parts HW02
135
136
V 5.0
argon
beamer
connector
X2.5
ON/
OFF
key
+15V
X2.2 MOSA
X2.3 MISA
X21.1
X21.2
X21.3
X4.32a
X4.32c
X4.19
X1.19
T1
X4.19
X1.19
mains
part
X4.3
X1.3
X5.31a
X4.3c
X3.3a H1
X3.6a H2
PFC controller
X3.12a AC
X3.8a DCX3.8c CT+
X14.2
X14.1
X4.4c
X5.30a OC-
F1
T3
C40-2175
front board
X3.1a DC+
X4.4a
X5.30c
+15V
+15V +5V
X3.9a HT2+
X5.14ac
X5.16ac+15VX4.28ac
X5.15ac +5V X4.29ac
X3.16ac DC-
15V
X4.27ac HAC2
T2
X4.12a PT2X4.11a PT1+
T5
X4.7c
X5.27a
T4
X4.20a
X5.18c
F2
C40-2217 main controller board II
WDC
VH
C40-2337
powermanager board III
X5.24c MISP X4.10a

X4.9c
X4.9a
L3
X5.24a MOSPX4.10c
X5.25a
signal
inputs/
outputs
PR
X4.1c VDC3
T6
X5.18a
X4.20c
X5.26c
X4.8a
X5.26a
X4.8c
X5.23c 5VW X4.18c
T7
X5.29c PSO X4.5a

X5.28c
X4.6a
X5.27c
X4.7a
X5.29a USO X4.5c
X5.28a
X4.6c
X5.6c
T8
FCT1
FCT2
L4
X4.4
X1.4
+15V
X4.3a
X4.1
X4.2
X4.14
X1.14
X5.25c
X4.30ac
X1.2
X4.5
X1.5
X1.1
X2.6
X4.13
X4.11
X4.15
X1.15
X8.2
X8.4
X9.2
X1.1
X4.6
X1.6
X1.2
X2.7
+5VD
X4.16
X1.16
X4.31ac
X4.13ac
L2
X4.7
X1.7
X5.31c
X1.13
X2.9
X4.12
X4.9
X1.9
X6.2
mains cord
socket
X6.1
X6.2
membrane keys
channel selection
X6.1
X6.2
X2.3
X2.4
X1.11
X2.10
X1.12
X4.10
X1.10
X5.1
X5.2
X6.1
X4.26ac HAC1
X4.17a PT2+
X4.19c
X5.19a
X4.11c PT1-
X8.1
COGB
X8.3
COG1
X9.1
COG2
X9.3
X4.23c
X5.7a
X4.23a HFON
X4.21a TON
X10.5
X10.8
X10.20
X10.19
L5
X4.1a RELO
X4.2a REL
+15V
X10.3
X10.4
CAN bus interface
X10.14
X10.16
X10.15
X5.19c
X11
T9
V11
X10
V10
X5.13c GT1
C40-2346
main board III
X5.17c
X5.2c
X5.3c
LSP1 X5.32a
LSP2 X5.32c
T10
speaker
L7
X5.13a GT2
V13
V12

Service Manual
+15V
C40-2217
main controller II
X5.2a
X5.12a MHI
+15V
+15V
X5.5a
X5.5c
X5.4c
X5.4a
X5.12c
X5.9c
X5.9a
X5.11c
X5.8c
X5.11a
X5.8a
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.7c
L8
IEN2
IEN1
IC
CSMO
T11
T13
X7.26c
X7.28c
X7.29c
X7.31c
X7.30c
X7.21a
X7.24a
X7.24c
X7.22a
X7.25a
X7.22c
X7.25c
X7.23a
X7.23c
X7.26a
X13
X6.16a
X6.15a
X2.5
X2.1
DCI
monopolar
applied part
NE side
C40-2155
bipolar board II
HardwareIdentifier
+12V
+12VD
+12V
CT1
C40-2281 monopolar board III
X4.1
ACM3 X4.1
X27.1
X27.5
+15V
X5.1
X4.2
X27.3
ACM5 X5.1
ACM4 X4.2
+15V
+15V
X5.3a
BLO
X5.1a
+5V
DGND
+15V
X5.6a
X12.2
FAN X5.1c
X12.1
PIN1
SH
PIN2
L6
X3.2
X3.1
X4.1
X4.2
X4.4
X4.5
X4.6
IC2
NE socket
output M2
X9.9
NE contact
monitor
FAIL
CT2
X9.10
X3.9
X9.2
X9.1
output M1
X3.10
X3.2
X3.1
monopolar
applied part
AE side
SPI-Bus-Optokopplerschnittstelle
Zwischenkreisseite
-CSM X6.2a
X7.7a CSM-
+15V
T12
+15V
+CSM X6.1a
X7.8a CSM+
CSM
-CLK X6.6a
X7.5a CLK-
CG1
MOSI
PIN1
MISO
CG2
NE2 X6.16c
X5.2
+15V
+CLK X6.5a
X7.6a CLK+
PIN2
NE1 X6.15c
X7.16c
HAC1
ACM6 X5.2
X7.17c
HAC2
V 5.0
output B1
output B2
main board III

C40-2346

Service Manual
137
138
V 5.0
ME402 block diagram: Power supply units, HF generator and main controller HW04, HW05
argon
beamer
socket
X2.5
ON/
OFF
key
+15V
X2.2 MOSA
X2.3 MISA
X21.1
X21.2
X21.3
X4.32a
X4.32c
X4.20
X1.20
T1
X4.19
X1.19
X5.31a
mains
part
X4.3
X1.3
X4.3c
X3.3a H1
X3.6a H2
PFC controller
WDC
VH
C40-2337
powermanager board III
X5.24c MISP X4.10a

X4.9c
X4.9a
X4.30ac
L3
X5.24a MOSPX4.10c
X5.25a
X5.25c
X4.31ac
X4.13ac
X3.12a AC
X3.8a DCX3.8c CT+
X3.1a DC+
X3.1
X4.1
X3.2
X4.2
X4.4c
F1
X4.4a
+15V
+15V
X3.9a HT2+
X4.28ac
+5V
X5.15ac
X4.29ac
T3
X3.16ac DC-
+5V
C40-2471
front
board
15V
X4.26ac HAC1
X4.27ac HAC2
T2
X4.7c
X5.27a
X4.12a PT2X4.11a PT1+
T5
X4.20a
X5.18c
T4
signal
inputs/
outputs
C40-2327
Hauptcontrollerplatine III
PR
X4.1c VDC3
T6
X5.18a
X4.20c
X5.26c
X4.8a
X5.26a
X4.8c
X5.23c 5VW X4.18c
T7
REL
X5.29c PSO X4.5a

X5.28c
X4.6a
X5.27c
X4.7a
X5.29a USO X4.5c
X5.28a
X4.6c
X5.6c
T8
FCT1
FCT2
F2
X8.3
+15V
X5.7a
X4.23c
L5
X4.1a RELO
X4.2a REL
X9.3
L4
X4.4
X1.4
+15V
X4.3a
X4.1
X4.2
X4.14
X1.14
X4.22
X1.22
X1.2
X4.5
X1.5
X1.1
X2.7
X4.13
X4.11
X4.15
X1.15
X5.14ac
X4.10
X4.21
X4.23
X1.23 MOST
X5.30a OCX5.30c
X5.16ac
X4.18
X8.2
X8.4
X9.1
X9.2
X4.23a HFON
X4.21a TON
X5.19c
+15V
X10.5
X10.8
X10.20
X5.17c
L7
T9
V11
X10
V10
V20
X5.13c GT1
C40-234
main board III
X11
X10.15
X1.1
X4.6
X1.6
X1.2
X2.6
+5VD
X4.16
X1.16
+5TC
X4.24
MIST
X1.24
+15C
L2
X4.7
X1.7
X5.31c
X1.13
X2.9
X4.12
X4.9
X1.9
X1.10
X1.21
X4.25
X1.25
X1.18
X4.8
X1.8
mains cord
socket
X4.2
X4.1
membrane keypad
channel selection
X6.1
X6.2
X2.3
X2.4
X1.11
X2.10
X1.12
X9.5
X1.5
HW identifier
X23.3
X23.2
X23.1
X4.17
X1.17
X4.17a PT2+
X4.19c
X5.19a
X4.11c PT1-
X8.1
COGB
COG1
COG2
X10.3
X10.4
CAN bus interface
X10.14
X10.16
X10.19
X5.2c
X5.3c
LSP1 X5.32a
LSP2 X5.32c
X15 X16
VDC GND
T10
speaker
X5.13a GT2
X17
GT1
X18
GT2
V13
V12

Service Manual
X5.6a
+15V
X12.2
FAN X5.1c
C40-2327
main controller III
X5.2a
X5.12a MHI
X12.1
+15V
+15V
X5.5a
X5.5c
X5.4c
X5.4a
X5.12c
X5.9c
X5.9a
X5.11c
X5.8c
X5.11a
X5.8a
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.7c
L8
+15V
IEN2
IEN1
IC
CSMO
T13
X7.26c
X7.28c
X7.29c
X7.31c
X7.30c
X7.21a
X7.24a
X7.24c
X7.22a
X7.25a
X7.22c
X7.25c
X7.23a
X7.23c
X7.26a
T11
X13
X6.16a
X6.15a
X2.5
X2.1
+12V
monopolar
applied part
NE side
+12VD
+12V
CT1
C40-2281 monopolar board III
DCI
C40-2155
bipolar board II
X27.1
X27.5
+15V
X5.3a
X4.1
+15V
-CSM X6.2a
X7.7a CSM-
BLO
X5.1a
ACM3 X4.1
X27.3
X5.1
X4.2
+15V
CG1
SH
MOSI
ACM5 X5.1
ACM4 X4.2
+15V
+CSM X6.1a
+5V
DGND
+15V
+CLK X6.5a
X7.6a CLK+
PIN1
L6
X3.2
X3.1
X4.1
X4.2
X4.4
X4.5
X4.6
IC2
NE socket
output B1
output B2
NE socket
output M2
output M2
output B1
output B2
NE socket
output M2
X9.9
X9.9
PIN2
X9.10
X9.10
X9.9
X9.2
X9.2
X9.10
X9.1
X9.1
X9.2
output M1
X9.1
output M1
X3.9
NE contact
monitor
FAIL
CT2
monopolar
applied part
AE side
output M1
X3.10
X3.2
X3.1
PIN2
NE1 X6.15c
PIN1
MISO
CG2
NE2 X6.16c
X7.16c
HAC1
CSM
-CLK X6.6a
X7.5a CLK-
X7.8a CSM+
+15V
T12
X7.17c
HAC2
X5.2
ACM6 X5.2
V 5.0
output B1
output B2
main board III

C40-2346

Service Manual
ME402 block diagram: Applied parts HW04, HW05
139
140
V 5.0
argon
beamer
socket
X2.5
+15V
X2.2 MOSA
X2.3 MISA
X21.1
X21.2
X21.3
ON/
OFF
key
X3.3a H1
+15V
MPS X4.19a
WDC
C40-2510
powermanager board IV
VH
X3.6a H2
PFC controller
MOSP X4.10c
X5.24a
K7
SAC2 X4.32c
SAC1 X4.32a
X4.3c
X5.31a
X5.20c
MISP X4.10a
X5.24c
X4.9a
X4.30ac
X4.31ac
X3.12a AC
X3.8a DCX3.8c CT+
X23
X4.13ac
mains
part
X4.3a
X5.31c
X4.9c
X5.25a
X5.25c
X5.14ac
L4
+15V
+5TC
L3
X4.14
X1.14
X3.1
X4.1
X3.2
X4.2
X3.1a DC+
X4.4c
F1
X4.4a
+15V
+5V
X4.28ac
X5.16ac
X3.9a HT2+
T3
X4.29ac
X5.15ac
F2
+15V
X4.10
X4.21
X1.10
X1.21
OC-
X4.25a
PON
X4.24a
POFF
X4.20
X4.1
X4.13
X4.15
X1.15
X4.22
X1.22
X5.30a
X5.30c
T1
X4.19
X1.19
X1.20
X1.1
X2.7
X4.2
X4.11
X4.16
X1.16
X4.23
X1.23 MOST
X4.18
X1.2
X4.3
X4.5
X1.2
X2.6
+5VD
X4.12
X4.9
X1.9
X4.24
MIST
X1.24
+15C
X3.16ac DCX4.26ac HAC1
C40-2471
front
board
15V
+5V
T2
X4.8
X1.8
L2
X4.4
X1.4
X1.3
X4.6
X1.6
X1.5
X4.7
X1.7
X1.13
X2.9
X9.5
X1.5
X4.25
X1.25
X1.18
X4.17
X1.17
mains cord
socket
X4.2
X4.1
membrane keypad
channel selection
X6.1
X6.2
X2.3
X2.4
X1.11
X2.10
X1.12
HW identifier
X23.3
X23.2
X23.1
X4.27ac HAC2
X4.17a PT2+
X4.7c
X5.27a
X4.12a PT2X4.11a PT1+
T5
X4.20a
X5.18c
T4
X4.19c
X5.19a
X4.11c PT1-
signal
inputs/
outputs
C40-2327
main
controller
board III
FCT1
X5.29c PSO
X5.28c
X5.27c
X5.29a USO
X5.28a
X4.5a
X4.6a
X4.7a
X4.5c
X4.6c
X4.1c VDC3
X5.6c
FCT2
X5.18a
X5.26c
X5.26a
X5.23c 5VW
X4.20c
X4.8a
X4.8c
X4.18c
REL
X4.23c
X5.7a
X4.23a HFON
X4.21a TON
X5.19c
+15V
X10.15
L5
X4.1a RELO
X4.2a REL
+15V
T7
X10.5
X10.8
X10.16
X10.20
T6
X8.2
X8.3
X8.4
X9.1
X9.2
X9.3
T8
X8.1
COGB
COG1
COG2
X10.3
X10.4
CAN bus interface
X10.14
X10.19
X11
X16 X15
GND VDC
T9
V11
V20
X10
V10
X5.2c
X5.13c GT1
T10
speaker
L7
X5.13a GT2
C40-2509
main board IV
X5.17c
X5.3c
LSP1 X5.32a
LSP2 X5.32c
X18
GT2
X17
GT1
V13
V12

Service Manual
L8
+15V
C40-2327
main controller III
X5.2a
+15V
+15V
X5.12a MHI
IEN1
IEN2
X7.27a
X7.25a
X7.25c
X7.23a
X7.23c
X7.26a
X7.26c
X5.22c
X5.8c
X5.8a
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.7c
T13
+15V
X7.28c
X7.30c
X7.29c
X7.31c
X7.21c
X7.27c
X7.22a
X7.22c
V21
CSMO
X5.5a
X5.4a
X5.5c
X5.4c
X5.22a
X5.20a MISB
X5.11c
X5.11a
+15V
X27.3
X6.16a
X6.15a
X2.5
X2.1
C40-2532
bipolar board III
T11
X13
X4.1
ACM3 X4.1
COM
DCI
monopolar
appled part
NE side
+12V
+12VD
+12V
CT1
C40-2511 monopolar board IV
X5.1
X4.2
T11 5
+5V
DGND
T12
X27.1
X27.5
T12 6
T21 7
X5.6a
X12.2
+15V
+5V
CSM
CC1
IMP1
X7.6a CLK+
BLO
X5.1a
X5.2
+15V
X7.20ac
X7.19ac
X7.18ac
+15V
+15V
T22 8
X7.5a CLK-
CG1
MOSI
PIN1
IMP2
PIN1
MISO
ACM5 X5.1
ACM4 X4.2
+15V
X5.3a
FAN X5.1c
X12.1
CG2
CC2
PIN2
IHF X6.14c
4 BCG2
51 CAL1
50 BCG1
49 BCT1
1 CAL2
T14
NE2 X6.16c
NE1 X6.15c
X4.2
X4.1
X4.5
X4.4
X4.7
X4.10
X4.9
X3.2
X3.1
X3.5
X3.4
X3.7
X3.10
X3.9
V25
V22
X9.9
X9.9
X9.9

output B2
output B1
X9.10
X9.10
X9.2
X9.2
X9.10
X9.1
X9.1
X9.2
X9.1
X3.9
L6
monopolar
applied part
AE side
X3.10
X3.2
X3.1
NE contact
monitor
FAIL
CT2
X7.1c
ACM6 X5.2
X7.8a CSM+
+15V
+5V
+12V
-12V
+5V
+12V
-12V
+3,3V
+15V
MGNDX6.1c
-CSM X6.2a
+CSM X6.1a
X7.7a CSM+15V
-CLK X6.6a
+CLK X6.5a
+15V
PIN2
V 5.0
X7.16c HAC1
X7.17c HAC2
main board IV
C40-2509

Service Manual
141

Service Manual
The power supply system consists of five units:
power input,
step-up converter with power factor correction,
auxiliary supply voltage,
power controller,
standby interface.
The power electronics part is located in the rear section of the main board. The associated signal electronics are located on the power manager module.
7.3.1.1 Power Input

The mains input circuit has four tasks:
Limitation of the transient inrush current after connecting the unit to the power supply system in order to prevent the network installations protective devices from being tripped (inrush restraint);
internal voltage limitation in the event of overvoltage (caused e.g. by lightning);
cutting off short-circuit currents caused by faults;
limitation of internal interference voltages to the legally prescribed maximum value.

X1.1
to PFC stage
X1.2
Mains inlet
Main Board
Limitation of the transient inrush current is ensured by NTC thermistors (resistors) located on
the main board. For overvoltage limitation, a voltage-dependent resistor (VDR) is provided on
the main board. The fuses for fault-current interruption have a nominal value of T6.3A (6.3 A
slow-blow) and are located in the power supply socket for the detachable power cord.
The filter assembly for limiting the interference voltages generated by the unit consists of a
filter integrated into the connecting socket for the power cord and filter components integrated
into the power input circuit on the main board.
142
V 5.0

Service Manual
7.3.1.2 Step-Up Converter with Power Factor Correction
The step-up converter rectifies the alternating voltage supplied by the mains and generates a
direct voltage of 390 V independent of the line voltage. The main components of the step-up
converter are the rectifier V1, the choke L3, the switching transistor V2, the diode V3, the capacitor C8 and the resistor R4.
Upon switching on transistor V2, choke L3 is charged by the rectified mains input current.
Upon switching off V2, this current is redirected to diode V3, charging the capacitor C8. At C8,
the voltage DC+ achieves a value that exceeds the peak value of the mains input voltage. This
process is repeated periodically at a frequency of approx. 100 kHz. The voltage at C8 can be
regulated by varying the switching-on/switching-off ratio (i.e. the duty factor) of V2. This is
done by a regulator located on the power manager module (pulse width modulation, PWM).
F2
main board
L2
F1
L3
X3.8c CT+
X3.1a DC+
X3.8a DC-
X3.12a AC
X3.6a H2
L4
X3.3a H1
V15
CT+
power manager board
This voltage regulator also features an internal control loop that controls the mains power input so that it is proportional to the mains voltage. In this process, the actual-value signal of
the power input current is picked off at resistor R4. As a result, the unit responds like a resistive load connected to the line and does not generate the power input harmonics that are otherwise typical for devices having a rectifier as part of their power input circuit (power factor
correction). At a high power output, the cos is 1; in non-activated condition (with unit ready
for operation, i.e. in standby mode), this value is lower due to the reactive current of the filter
capacitors in the mains input circuit.
A fast-discharge circuit ensures that C8 is discharged within 10 seconds to a non-dangerous
level as soon as the unit is disconnected from the supply voltage. As from hardware version
02, a red LED B1 lights up if C8 is energized.
The auxiliary supply voltage VH for the signal electronics and the drivers of the mains-circuit
power transistors is provided by an auxiliary winding of choke L3. A green LED VH located in
the upper left section of the power manager board indicates presence of voltage. As this circuit
supplies power only after the step-up converter stage has built up, a starting circuit is provided
as well which, through a high-ohmic resistor, charges a capacitor directly from the rectified
V 5.0
143

Service Manual
mains voltage. The energy of this capacitor is then used to bridge the time interval until the
auxiliary circuit takes over power supply at L3. This explains why it takes a few seconds for the
unit to be turned on with the button located on the front panel following connection to the
mains. This time interval is greater if the unit is connected to a 100-V supply network, compared with operation on the basis of 230-V power supply. If the line voltage drops below 85 V,
the unit can no longer be turned on.
In the event of a step-up converter fault, the device fuses located in the power supply socket
assembly will be blown. The main board component with the highest failure probability is the
transistor V2, due to line-side overvoltages or overload due to a fault in downstream stages.
7.3.1.3 Auxiliary Supply Voltage

To generate the supply voltages required for the control and signal electronics, the transformer
T2 is operated with the prestabilized direct voltage DC+, protected by a fuse F1 (M0.125 A),
via an inverter half-bridge consisting of the transistors V4 and V5 connected in series with R15
plus C9 and C10. This half-bridge is controlled through the power manager module, which also
hosts the rectifier and the controller for the secondary circuit of T2. Current limitation is ensured by V5, which measures the current at R15.
main board
F2
X5.2
F1
X5.1
X4.2
T12
T2
T3
monopolar board
X6.15a
X4.1
+12V
+5V
-12V
+15V
HI
LO
PWM
controller
IN
power manager board
regulator
15V
X7.17c HAC2
+5V
X7.16c HAC1
+15V
X4.29ac
X4.28ac
X4.27ac HAC2
X4.13ac
X4.31ac
X4.30ac
X4.26ac HAC1
X3.16ac DC-
X3.4c HT2-
X3.9a HT2+
X3.10a HT1+
X6.16a
+5V
bipolar finger switch and

instrument recognition
interface circuits
bipolar board
The power manager module generates the auxiliary supply voltages of +15 V and +5 V from
the medium-frequency secondary voltage of T2. Presence of these two voltages is indicated by
two green LEDs 5V and 15V, which are located at the upper edge of board versions I and
II, and in the upper right corner of board version III.
144
V 5.0

Service Manual
This medium-frequency voltage is directly supplied to the bipolar module as auxiliary supply
for the bipolar patient circuit (HAC pair of signals), with an additional transformer providing
electrical separation on the bipolar board. Through a second secondary winding, the transformer T12 (main board) is powered for auxiliary supply of the monopolar patient circuit (MAC
pair of signals).
A short in the auxiliary supply circuit blows the F1 fuse. The components with the highest failure probability are transistors V4 and V5 (with pair-wise/simultaneous failure most of the
time), the power-manager-module rectifier and the downstream constant-voltage regulators or
converters, including those on the main controller module.
7.3.1.4 Power Controller

To generate the operating voltage for the HF generator, the transformer T6 is operated with
the prestabilized direct voltage DC+ present at C8, protected by a fuse F2 (M1.6 A) via an inverter half-bridge consisting of transistors V6 and V7 plus capacitors C11 and C12. This halfbridge is controlled via transformers T4 and T5 from the intermediate circuit side of the power
manager module. The current transformers T7 and T8 capture the current flowing into this
half-bridge. The secondary side of T6 features a rectifier consisting of diodes V8 and V9 plus L5
and C13. At C13, a direct voltage (VDC) can be set across a range of 0 V to 180 V.
V 5.0
145

Service Manual
F2
main board
L5
T6
T4
T5
T8
T7
LO
HI
PWM
controller
IN
power
manager
board
USO
to
overdose
monitor
X4.1c VDC3
X4.11c PT1-
X4.12a PT2X4.11a PT1+
X4.17a PT2+
VDC
USO
regulator
USO
PSO
regulator
PSO
PWM
demodulator
PSO
DCM
X4.19c
X4.6a
X4.6c
X5.19a
X5.28c
X5.28a
X5.19c
X4.7a
X5.27c
X5.29a USO X4.5c
X4.20a
X5.18c
X5.29c PSO X4.5a
X4.7c
X5.27a
PWM
demodulator
microcontroller
main controller board

The output level of this power controller is set by one of three regulators (up to HW03), or by
one of four regulators (from HW03), whose open-collector outputs act upon a joint pull-up resistor at the control input. The first regulator regulates the output voltage VDC to a level defined by the main controllers signal USO, its actual value being identical with the direct current
voltage (VDC) at C13. When this (first) regulator is active, the red LED designated UR lights
up on the power manager module. This is the case with some coagulation currents as well as
in no-load operation or in the event of mismatch (if required parameters are not achieved by
other regulators).
The second regulator controls the current flowing into the power controller to a level defined
by the PSO signal. Its actual value is generated by current transformer T8. As the power controller operates on a prestabilized voltage, its input current is identical to the direct-current
input power supplied to the controller. This power input, in turn, represents the sum of internal
losses plus HF output power. Which means that under conditions of reproducible internal
losses, the current actual value signal I1 is a measure of the actual value of the HF output
146
V 5.0

Service Manual
power. When this (second) regulator is active, the green LED designated PR lights up on the
power manager module. This occurs with most currents when operated in the nominal load
range.
The third regulator controls the direct-voltage component generated between the electrode
and the patient during the cutting process, and superimposed on the HF voltage, to a predefined value. This DC component is indicative of the type of electrosurgical cutting process generated as a result. The controller is located on the monopolar module, where it receives the
actual value DCI from a sensor circuit and the reference or setpoint value DCS from the
microcontroller on the monopolar board, which in turn receives it from the main controller. For
details, refer to section 7.3.3.2. The control deviation (or error) signal is optically transmitted
to the power manager module via a plastic fiber (waveguide), and the receiver amplifier acts
upon the control input, just as the two other regulators do. When this (third) regulator is active, the yellow LED designated FR lights up on the power manager module. This only happens when monopolar cutting currents are used.
From HW03 onwards, there is a second regulator in parallel to the DC regulator, intended for
limiting the HF output voltage especially at no-load. The corresponding setpoint ACS is supplied by the microcontroller on the main board, which in turn receives this input from the main
controller. For details, refer to section 7.3.3.2. The control deviation (or error) signal is optically transmitted to the power manager module via the same plastic fiber as used for transferring
the DC regulator signal. When this (fourth) regulator is active, the yellow LED designated FR
lights up on the power manager module as well. On the monopolar board, the red LED ACR
lights up if the AC regulator is active, whereas the yellow LED DCR lights up if the DC regulator is operative.
The power controller is activated by the main controller with the signal DCEN. Through the
signal PPK, the main controller can briefly set the power controller to maximum to achieve a
transient output power overshoot.
In the event of shorts or overload, the F2 fuse is blown. The components with the highest failure probability are diodes V8 and V9 on the main board, caused by a short in the HF generator
or by overload abuse. This can subsequently lead to failure of transistors V6 and V7 (usually
affecting both).
V 5.0
147

Service Manual
7.3.1.5 Standby Interface
A button located on the front panel turns the ME402 on and off in the sequence of button operation. An interface circuit stores the on or off status, thus isolating the pushbutton circuit
from the mains for safety reasons.
The auxiliary transformer T1 supplies the mains-isolated current for pushbutton operation. The
button signal is transmitted to an asymmetric flip-flop in the mains circuit via an optocoupler
located on the power manager module. The flip-flop in turn controls an enable input of the PFC
controller. In this way, the step-up controller and with it the generation of primary auxiliary
supply voltage for the downstream stages is switched off, while the mains voltage continues
to be present on the primary sides of these stages.
X4.32a
X4.32c
main board
X4.2 X1.20
X4.20
X5.31a
powermanager board
+12V
X4.3c
600ms
X4.1 X1.19
ON/OFF
key
X4.19
main
contr.
board
X5.31c
X4.3a
+12V
In the first hardware versions (01 and 02), this flip-flop always returns to reset state following
disconnection from the mains, which means that the unit remains switched off after a power
failure. As from hardware version 02, the flip-flop maintains its current state for approx. 5
seconds, so the unit remains on if the power supply is briefly interrupted and no restart is required.
The power manager module features a jumper X10 (underneath the protective cover) that allows disabling the flip-flop by setting (replugging) the jumper to the 2-3 position. This can be
useful for servicing and performing the technical safety checks.
7.3.2
HF Generator
The electrosurgically effective high-frequency current is generated in a full bridge consisting of

transistors V10, V11, V12 and V13, which is powered by the power controllers VDC output
voltage and acts upon one of two output transformers. The relays K2 and K3 switch the voltage to one of two different primary windings of the monopolar output transformer T11, which
allows low- to medium-ohmic or high-ohmic output adjustment. The relays K4 and K5 switch
the output of the bridge to the primary winding of the bipolar output transformer, either directly or via a series capacitor.
The bridge is driven by the two main-board switching amplifiers N1 and N2, supported by
transformers T9 and T10. The main controller module generates signals GT1 and GT2 required
for driving the bridge. The signal HFON, from which the control signal TON is generated, is
picked off at the output of the control amplifier N2. This signal switches on the acoustic generator on the main controller board, independent of the main controller.
148
V 5.0

Service Manual
X9.1
monopolar board
L8
main board
X9.9
output M2
+12V
+15V
+15V
+15V
V12
NE connector
X4.5
X4.6
X4.4
+15V
IC2
output B2
X4.2
X4.1
T10
T9
T13
X2.1
X3.1
X2.5
X3.2
output B1
BLO
+15V
X5.1a
X5.12a MHI
X5.3a
X5.2a
X5.17c TON X4.21a
X4.23a
X5.13a GT2
X5.13c GT1
bipolar board
V13
X10
X5.3c
X9.10
X3.9
L6
V11
X5.2c
output M1
X3.2
X3.10
X13
T11
VDC
V10
X11
X9.2
X3.1
main controller
board
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.7c
X7.23a
X7.23c
X7.26a
relay
driver
Transistor V11 is equipped with a temperature-dependent resistor (NTC) which switches on the
fan located on the floor underneath the transistor bridge when the temperature rises above
80C. After cooling down to approx. 50C, the fan is switched off again. If the temperature
keeps increasing despite cooling, the generator is switched off once a temperature of approx.
120C is reached.
7.3.3
Monopolar Applied Part
The monopolar applied part is located on the corresponding monopolar module at the left edge
of the main board. The following functional groups can be distinguished:
Finger switch interface
Monopolar regulators
Neutral electrode monitoring
Microcontroller with optocoupler interface
V 5.0
149

Service Manual
7.3.3.1 Finger Switch Interface
The monopolar outputs M1 and M2 allow connection of electrode handles with finger switches
(pushbuttons) for activating the cutting and coagulation functions. These switches relate to the
conductor leading to the active electrode.
In the KLS Martin handles featuring a circular coaxial plug, two diodes polarized for different
conducting directions are connected in series with the switches, so one additional lead suffices
for both switches. Differentiation between which of the two switches has been selected is possible by decoding the current flow direction once alternating current has been applied. In contrast, US handles with 3-pin flat connectors have a separate conductor for each switch. Therefore, the monopolar socket module board features two diodes for each of the two connectors.
These diodes re-code these 3-pin connectors to adapt them to the Martin format to ensure that
both types of handle can be used in the same way.
X5.2
X5.1
X4.2
T12
X9.1
X4.1
X9.2
X3.1
monopolar board
output M1
X3.2
X9.10
X3.10
X13
X9.9
X3.9
output M2
T11
NE connector
PIN2
CG2
CG1
+12V
PIN1
L6
main board
PIN2
CG2
PIN1
CG1
+12V
Through optocouplers, the finger-switch activation signals CT1 and CG1, or CT2 and CG2, are
transmitted to the NE-side microcontroller. LEDs connected in series with the optocouplers indicate the presence of an activation signal yellow for cutting and green for coagulation.
When using instrument cables with a plain 4-mm connector, misconnection may occur because
this plug which should be inserted into the inner conductor of the coaxial socket technically
fits the adjacent 4-mm sockets for the finger switch signals as well. Such misconnection could
damage the finger switch because when the HF current is activated with the footswitch (which
is the usual source of activation when using instruments with such cables), the current would
be rerouted through the finger-switch control circuit. To prevent damage, HF current flow
through the finger switch circuit is monitored. As soon as a critical limit is exceeded, the signal
PIN1 or PIN2 is generated and indicated by a red LED. While presence of such a signal is normal in connection with one of the finger switch activation signals, the generator is switched off
and an error message displayed if the signal PIN1 or PIN2 occurs alone or in conjunction with a
footswitch activation signal.
150
V 5.0

Service Manual
7.3.3.2 Monopolar Regulators
In electrosurgical cutting, tissue dissection is achieved by a very high power density at the
point of contact between the active electrode and the tissue. In this process, water vapor is
released from the tissue in the cutting canal, separating the tissue from the electrode (the socalled Leidenfrost effect) so that the current cannot pass unhindered from the electrode to the
tissue. Therefore, a correspondingly high electric current is needed to overcome (break down)
the insulating vapor layer. In this process, gas discharge occurs inside the vapor layer, whereby the vapor must be ionized to make it electrically conductive. As the energy necessary for
this is taken from the electric circuit, this leads to a voltage drop above the vapor layer.
Ionization takes place above the surface of the cathode. However, since high-frequency alternating current is used here, the electrode and the tissue alternatingly function as the cathode.
This is a highly asymmetrical pair of electrodes, though, leading to varying energetic conditions
for the ionization process. For example, it can be observed that the breakdown of the negative
half-wave takes place at an apparently lower resistance than that of the positive half-wave.
Therefore, the current of the negative half-wave would be greater than that of the positive
half-wave, which means that a direct current would be superimposed on the high-frequency
alternating current which must definitely be prevented because it would cause nerve irritation. For this purpose, capacitors C19 and C20 have been included. They build up direct current that is used to shift the HF alternating voltage symmetrical to the zero line (as present at
the secondary side of T11) into the positive range to such an extent that negative and positive
current half-waves carry the same amount of electric charge.
main board
monopolar board from HW 00 to HW 02

(C40-1929 and C40-2224)
X13
T11
X9.1
X9.2
X3.1
output M1
X3.2
X3.10
X9.10
X3.9
X9.9
output M2
L6
+12V
NE connector
+12V
PWM
demodulator
X6.15c
PWM
X6.16c
The same direct voltage builds up between the neutral and active electrodes and is again superimposed on the HF voltage. By capturing the voltage between the output sockets and filtering
out the superimposed direct-voltage content, it is possible to arrive at a quantity that can be
used as the actual value for cutting canal formation. As this voltage continuously increases
along with the increase in the electric power used/applied in the cutting canal, it can be regulated as well. With the ME402, this is the task of the control circuit termed arc regulator.
V 5.0
151

Service Manual
The monopolar patient circuit incorporates a measuring circuit for the direct-current content
and a regulator that receives its setpoint value from the microcontroller that is also part of the
circuit. The regulators deviation signal controls an LED that serves as the sender side in an
optocoupler consisting of a separate sender and receiver and connected to the receiver of the
power manager module via an plastic optical fiber. There, the signal acts upon a busbar via an
amplifier (the voltage and power regulators acting upon it as well).
When using a capacitive neutral electrode on the patient, it is not possible to capture the direct-voltage component, so arc regulation is not possible in this case.
X9.1
main board
monopolar board from HW 03
X13
X9.2
X3.1
output M1
X3.2
X9.10
X3.10
T11
X9.9
X3.9
output M2
PWM
demodulator
PWM
demodulator
L6
+12V
NE connector
+12V
X6.15c
PWM
X6.16c
From HW03, the monopolar board features a second HF output voltage regulator at outputs M1
and M2, designed for HF output voltage limitation in no-load condition to reduce the load on
connected instruments and minimize HF leakage currents.
Apart from measurements for the DC component, there is also an HF voltage measuring path.
The PWM output of the microcontroller in the monopolar applied part must be multiplexed in
order to obtain separate setpoints for the AC regulator and the DC regulator, formed by downstream PWM demodulators. Both regulators act upon the same LED which, via a plastic optical
fiber, transmits the control signal to the power controller located on the power manager board,
as described in section 10.3.2. If the HF voltage regulator is active, this is indicated by the red
LED ACR lighting up brightly (while glowing darkly if the regulator is non-active). The same
applies to the DCR LED indicating DC regulator action or non-action.
The microcontroller of the applied part can bypass these regulators by using the CRB signal to
control the LED at the optical link directly. This allows it to switch off the HF output power very
quickly.
152
V 5.0

Service Manual
7.3.3.3 Neutral Electrode Monitoring
The ME402 allows connection of both single-plate and split neutral electrodes. The NE-side HF
current path is split on the main board by capacitors C20 and C21, and both paths are then
conducted to the NE. The impedance between the two lines is monitored by a monitor consisting of a free-running oscillator whose amplitude is attenuated by the parallel resistance at the
NE.
In the case of single-plate NEs, the two lines are connected to each other directly at the electrode, so the monitor recognizes a short if such an NE is used (and the cable connection is
O.K.), interpreting this correctly as connection of a single-plate NE. Consequently, the singleplate NE symbol appears in green on the units display. It is possible, however, to exclude the
use of single-plate NEs via the Setup item of the control menu. In this case, a message will
inform the user that single-plate NEs are not permitted (disabled by user). As from software
version 1.328, the use of small-surfaced baby NEs can be enabled through the setup as well.
This limits the output power of appropriate currents to values that allow only smaller NE currents.
X9.1
main board
monopolar board
X13
X3.1
X9.2
output M1
X3.2
X3.10
T11
X9.10
X3.9
+12V
X9.9
output M2
L6
NE connector
X6.16c
X6.15c
If split NEs are used, impedance measurement is possible only on the patients skin because
the patient closes the monitoring circuit. The alarm is switched off as soon as impedance drops
below a limit of approx. 250 ohms and a green split-NE symbol is shown on the screen. Usually, however, impedance is much lower, but the minimum is reached only after a few minutes.
The monitor stores this minimum and uses it as a reference value for the alarm decision. Exceeding this minimum by a predefined value triggers NE alarm with the consequence that no
monopolar HF current can be generated or power output is interrupted. This ensures NE alarm
in cases where the NE detaches from the patient unnoticed irrespective of electrode or patient skin properties.
The unit offers a special graphical indicator informing the user about NE contact quality, i.e.
the degree to which it makes contact with the patients skin. It has the form of a horizontal bar
graph or scale with a slide and three fields in the colors red (alarm range, no HF output),
V 5.0
153

Service Manual
yellow (transition range; no HF output if the sliding indicator is moving up from the red field,
HF output possible if it comes from the green section) and green (HF output possible). The
indicator is useful for recognizing tendencies in the NEs contact with the patients skin over
time. It is also very useful for troubleshooting when the NE alarm persists. This graphical indicator can be deselected through the Setup menu item.
7.3.3.4 Microcontroller with Optocoupler Interface
PIN2
CG2
PWM
DCI
CG1
+12V
PIN1
The monopolar patient circuit has its own microcontroller that coordinates the signals within
the monopolar part and communicates them to the main controller. This includes the following
signals:
MISO
MOSI
FAIL
CSM
ID
main board
+5V
NE contact
monitor
(3)
+12V
SPI bus
multiplexer
main controller
board
154
X5.5a
CSMO X7.28c
X5.5c
X7.29c
X5.4c
X7.31c
X5.4a
X7.30c
-CSM X6.2a
+CSM X6.1a
-CLK X6.6a
+CLK X6.5a
X7.7a CSM-
X7.8a CSM+
X7.5a CLK-
X7.6a CLK+
NE1 X6.15c
MOSI
MISO
NE2 X6.16c
monopolar board
+15V
bipolar board
V 5.0

Service Manual
Input signals CT1, CG1 and PIN1 of the finger-switch interface circuit of the monopolar
output M1;
input signals CT2, CG2 and PIN2 of the finger-switch interface circuit of the monopolar output M2;
output signals K1 and K2 for controlling the high-voltage relays in the output paths leading
to sockets M1 and M2;
up to HW02: PWM output signal DCS, which is used for generating the analog setpoint for
the arc regulator.
from HW03: PWM output signal PWM multiplexed with signal PWU, which are used to
generate the analog setpoints DCS and ACS for the two regulators;
analog input signal DCI, which corresponds to the DC actual-value signal;
from HW03: analog input signal ACI, which corresponds to the analog actual value of the
HF voltage;
analog input signal NEI, output signal of the NE monitor;
signals of the synchronous serial interface: MOSM, MISM, CLKM and CSM.
The controller features a flash EPROM that can be programmed in-circuit on the board with a
programming plug. Provided a bootloader has been installed (available from program version
V8.0, implemented with HW02), this program can be updated automatically by the main controller after updating the units software.
The transmission format of the synchronous serial interface, which serves for communication
with the main controller, is equivalent to an SPI bus. Due to the insulation required between
the patient circuit and the intermediate circuit, the optocouplers U1U4 are used to deliver the
signals MOSI, MISO, CLK and CSM to the main board. While the sender and receiver circuit of
the high-voltage side is found on the monopolar module, the associated circuit of the intermediate circuit side is located on the bipolar module.
In normal operation, a yellow LED flashes on the monopolar module at a frequency of approx.
1 Hz. A red LED lights up if communication between the main controller and the patient circuit
controller via the SPI bus is interrupted. This is also the case during to the main controllers self-test. A green LED lights up when the main controller is sending an activation command.
7.3.4
Bipolar Applied Part
The bipolar applied part is located in the upper half of the bipolar module, next to the monopolar module. The following functional groups can be differentiated:
impedance monitors
finger switch interface and instrument recognition
With hardware version 02, a new bipolar module is available, with improved impedance monitors and the option of using separate paths for the cutting current and the coagulation current.
Together with an appropriate software upgrade, this module can also be used for hardware
versions 00 and 01.
V 5.0
155

Service Manual
7.3.4.1 Impedance Monitors
Parallel to each of the two bipolar outputs B1 and B2, the unit features an impedance monitor
that delivers the signal IMP1 or IMP2, respectively. This signal represents the tissue resistance
measured between the conductors and serves for controlling the automatic and half-automatic
activation of the bipolar coagulation currents having such an auto-function. If a half-automatic
type of current (Auto Stop) is activated (by the surgeon), the monitor connected to the activated channel superimposes on the HF current a low medium-frequency voltage that generates
a current which in turn serves as a measure of tissue impedance. When starting the coagulation process, tissue impedance typically begins to drop to a minimum, then increases again. If
a certain level is reached relative to the minimum, the HF current is switched off. This limit or
rise can be set by the user for the various types of current via a submenu. Following cut-off,
renewed activation is possible only after releasing the switch and operating it again.
In fully automatic operation (Auto Start + Auto Stop), the impedance monitor of the channel
for which a bipolar coagulation current with auto-start/auto-stop function has been selected
controls the switching-on process as well. The HF current is activated if the resistance between
the output poles of the electrode leads drops below a defined value. Switching off follows the
same rules as described above for semi-automatic currents with Auto Stop. Activation can be
delayed by a certain time factor that can be set via the same submenu as the switch-off level.
X7.22c
X7.22a
X5.11a
X5.11c
IMP1
X5.8c
IEN1
X7.25a
IMP1
IMP2
X5.8a
IEN2
X7.25c
IMP2
bipolar board
for HW 00 and HW 01
C40-1930
MHI
BLO
X7.23a
X7.23c
X4.5
main controller
board
T13
+15V
+15V
+15V
X4.6
+15V
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.7c
IC2
X4.4
X4.2
X4.1
X2.1
X3.1
X2.5
X3.2
output B2
output B1
main board
The signals IEN1 and IEN2 are used to activate or deactivate the impedance monitors of the
outputs B1 or B2, respectively. In these two identical monitors, a multivibrator generates a
periodic signal that is fed to the poles of the corresponding bipolar output socket via a filter
network. Tissue contact of the active electrode creates a shunt that attenuates the signal. The
resulting decrease in the signals amplitude (due to attenuation) is then used as a tissue resistance measure. The signal amplitude is determined by rectification; the trimmers IMP1 and
IMP2 are used to set the output voltages for operation without tissue contact, with the output
signals IMP1 and IMP2 transmitted to the main controller in analog form.
156
V 5.0

Service Manual
To ensure that the impedance measurement works also with activated bipolar HF current, it is
necessary to eliminate the influence of the HF voltage that is simultaneously present to the
monitor. To this end, a selective filter is used that lets pass through only the monitor signal. At
the same time, the transformers T2 and T3 provide the required electrical isolation between
the bipolar applied part and the intermediate circuit in this network. The frequency of the multivibrators must be adjusted to the parallel resonance of the respective filter networks. This is
done with the trimmers F1 and F2.
X7.22a
X7.22c
X7.25a
X7.25c
1 IC
3 +12V
5 GND
X24
4 +5V
6 CWPU
LED1
LED2
X5.11c
X5.11a
X5.8c IEN1
X5.8a IEN2
F1S
UGL1
+5V
+5V
X24
OC1 CC1
MHI
BLO
UGL2
X24
+5V
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.7c
X7.23a
X7.23c
X7.26a
+15V
+15V
+15V
OC2 CC2
+15V
main controller
board
F2S
+15V
X5.10c
X5.10a
X5.10c
X5.10a
bipolar board
from HW 02 to HW 05
C40-2155
T13
X4.5
X4.6
X4.4
IC2
output B2
X4.2
X4.1
X3.1
X2.1
X2.5
X3.2
output B1
main board
When the Auto Start type of current was implemented with HW02, a monitor with higher sensitivity was required. The monitor signal is now a periodic sequence of groups of individual
pulses (bursts) whose instantaneous values are registered via sample-and-hold elements to
restore analog DC signals IMP1 and IMP2. Adjustment to the resonance frequency of the filter
network is done with the switches S1, S2 and S3 by setting a division ratio by which the monitor frequency is derived from the fixed frequency of a quartz.
When activating HF current, the circuit of the HF output transformer T13 (on main board) is
connected in parallel to the filter network via C1 and C2 on the bipolar board. This not only
changes the resonance frequency of the filter network, but the output signal IMP1 or IMP2 as
well. Therefore, the amplification of these signals is switched depending on the position of the
output relays which also explains why the basic setting of the signals IMP1 and IMP2 must be
done separately for the open source circuit (OC) and for the closed source circuit (CC). The
yellow and green LEDs next to the trimmers indicate the current state of the circuit. With the
HF output socket shorted, the trimmers SC1 and SC2 are used to adjust the output signal to a
defined value.
The operating modes with automatic activation of HF power upon tissue contact pose high risks
in endoscopic interventions because unintentional tissue contact is almost unavoidable when
placing the instruments in the surgical field. For this reason, the ME402 requires the user to
expressly confirm the Auto Start/Auto Stop mode when calling up a program that includes such
V 5.0
157

Service Manual
a fully automatic type of current. The same applies if the unit starts up with a program that
includes such a current.
In fully automatic operation, it is not possible to use a cutting current at the same output because the ME402 cannot differentiate whether the decrease in resistance at the leads has been
caused by tissue contact of a coagulation or a cutting instrument. So if a current with Auto
Start/Auto Stop is selected, the cutting channel belonging to the same output is switched off.
Conversely, the current with Auto Start/Auto Stop is switched off if the cutting channel is reselected with the yellow channel selector button.
7.3.4.2 Finger Switch Interface and Instrument Coding

The B2 bipolar output socket also allows users to connect instruments with finger switches that
can activate the cutting and coagulation functions, just as with monopolar handles. In the case
of the circular Martin socket, the auxiliary contacts required are located on the rim of the socket which means that the small coaxial plug of the forceps connecting cable does not support
this function. The international (i) socket module, in contrast, provides an additional 2-mm
socket for this purpose, but this requires a corresponding plug with a 2-mm pin, of course. The
multifunction socket of the Erbe (e) version also allows connection of this plug. An optocoupler transmits the corresponding signals to the intermediate circuit, and from there they are
passed on to the main controller as signals BCT and BCG.
X7.16c
from aux.
supply
X7.17c
X24.1
X5.12c
X7.21a
bipolar board
IC
IC
+12V
X5.9c
X7.24a
X5.9c
X7.24c
BCG
X4.4
X4.5
main controller
board
T13
IC2
output B2
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
X4.6
X4.2
X4.1
main board
X2.1
X2.5
158
V 5.0

Service Manual
In addition, the B2 socket offers a resistance-coded instrument recognition function. If an instrument coded in this way is connected, the system automatically assigns a specific program
to this output that optimally serves the instrument. As this function is also controlled through
the additional contacts of the B2 socket, instruments with special connecting plugs are required. The pulse width-modulated signal is passed on to the intermediate circuit via an optocoupler, where it is demodulated by a low pass and then transferred to the main controller as
the analog signal IC.
7.3.5
The Main Controller and its Interfaces
The main controller board coordinates all processes inside the ME402. Its central component is
a C167 microcontroller equipped with a number of peripheral functions. This assembly can be
subdivided into the following functional blocks:
controller core and graphics controller
I2C bus and its associated circuitry (periphery)
SPI bus
CAN bus, RS232 and footswitch (SIP/SOP) interfaces
one-wire bus (as from HW02)
This module is located on the main board, directly behind the front panel.
7.3.5.1 Controller Core and Graphics Controller

The microcontroller used is a 16-bit system (C167) with integrated timer/counter functions and
integrated A/D converter. Its configuration includes a non-multiplexed, 15-bit-wide address
bus (LSB A0 not used) with four additional port signals as addresses A16 to A19, plus a 16-bitwide data bus. An I2C bus master, a CAN controller and a RS232 transceiver (UART) are integrated as well.
Its immediate environment includes an external flash EEPROM as program memory, a static
RAM and an external watchdog. In HW00 and HW01 units, the main controller board version I
(C40-1926) has a program memory of only 1 MB; this has been increased to 2 MB in units with
HW02 or higher hardware status. Upgrading the C40-1926 to 2 MB is basically possible, but
requires returning either the board or the entire HF unit to the manufacturer. However, such
memory extension is an absolute requirement for running SW2.368 or higher software versions.
The controller allows you to reprogram the EEPROM via the serial interface. The boot program
required for this task is executed in registers inside the controller. Therefore, software updates
can be carried out very easily from outside no need to open the unit. For HW00 and HW01
units, this involves setting the unit to boot mode via the Service menu. From HW02, this is no
longer necessary, as the controller board version II (C40-2217) offers all the hardware features required.
From HW02 with controller board II (C40-2217), change status V02 or higher the static
RAM is buffered by a battery that also powers the internal clock. This allows administration and
non-volatile storage of activation and error logs. For user functions, however, the battery is
irrelevant.
V 5.0
159

Service Manual
To reduce the workload for the main controller, a separate graphics controller has been integrated that manages the screen contents and generates all signals needed for LCD screen control. The generated image has a resolution of 640 x 480 color pixels; each color can be displayed with a resolution of 6 bits. However, this function is used only for representing gray
shades, as the color impression is more or less independent from the viewing angle for the full
colors red, green and blue, the mixed full colors yellow, magenta and cyan, and white and
black.
Units with hardware statuses HW00 to HW03 with main controller boards I (C40-1926) and
II (C40-2217) have a graphics controller with integrated video RAM. Due to discontinuation
of this component by the manufacturer, the main controller board III uses a graphics controller
with external video RAM whose resolution of the colors red and blue is only 5 bits. However,
this is of no significance for the specific application. A much more important difference between versions I and II on the one hand and version III on the other hand relates to the converter used for operating the fluorescent tubes (screen backlight) this converter has been
transferred from the controller board to the front board.
In HW00 to HW03 units, the LCD screen is connected to the graphics controller via a 34-pole
ribbon cable. From HW04, a 31-pole, flexible flat connector is used for this purpose. This cable
supplies the screen not only with power, but with all the signals required for its operation as
well.
TFT color screen

from HW 00 to HW 03
(C40-1926, C40-2217)
CS\:
ICFL
D0:-D15:
A1:-A20:
RD\:
WRH\:
5V/3.3V
level shift
RSO\
CSG\
5V/3.3V
level shift
RAM
CR2032
lithium battery
from HW02
WRL\
X5.15ac
+5VA
+15V
X4.29ac
X5.16ac
X5.14ac
A1-A17
X4.28ac
X4.13ac
X4.30ac
X4.31ac
+5V
WRL\
X5.23c 5VW X4.18c
+15V
WDI
BS\
ICFL
CS3\
CS1\
CS2\
CS0\
CS4\
WRL\
RSO\
address bus
CPU config
CSG\
160
Heartbeat
WRL\
main board
+5V
A1-A19
CS0\
CS4\
+5V
+15V
+5V
WRL\
+5V
powermanager board
WAIT:
B0-B5
front part
V 5.0

Service Manual
Whereas the main controller is powered with +5 V, the graphics controller and some other
functional groups operate on a voltage of +3.3 V. The two microelectronics operating voltages
are generated from the voltage of +15 V by two switching controllers.
X23.1
front part
B1-B5
RSO\
CSG\
MA0-MA9
MD0-MD15
control
WRL\
A1-A19

from HW 04
(C40-2327)
X5.15ac
+5VA
+15V
RAM
X5.16ac
X5.14ac
A1-A17
VRAM (to clock)
CR2032
Li ion battery
X4.29ac
X4.28ac
X4.13ac
X4.30ac
X4.31ac
+5V
WRL\
Heartbeat
X5.23c 5VW X4.18c
+15V
WDI
CPU config
BS\
CS3\
CS2\
CS1\
CS0\
CS4\
WRL\
RSO\
ICFL
CSG\
address bus
WRL\
main board
+5V
A1-A19
CS0\
CS4\
+5V
+15V
+5V
WRL\
+5V
power manager board
X1.8
X23.2
+15V
front board
X23.3
7.3.5.2 I2C Bus and Associated Bus Users

To enable control of a large number of peripheral indicators via LEDs such as activation indicator, rotary switch backlight and NE status indicator there is now a port expander available
in the form of a serial synchronous data bus (I2C bus). These port expanders are connected to
the main controller via a bidirectional data line and a clock line.
This bus also serves for connecting additional peripheral functions to the main controller. A
serial EEPROM is provided for the non-volatile storage of user-defined as well as basic settings.
Besides, this bus is used for controlling the two external D/A converters that deliver the two
analog signals TLS (for sound generator volume control) and PVW (for generating the comparison setpoint needed for HF output power overdose monitoring). An external calendar clock,
buffered by a lithium battery, is connected to this bus as well. It allows checking the state of
charge of the battery, thus enabling the microcontroller to check and display the battery status
during the initial self-test.
V 5.0
161

Service Manual
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X1.14 +15V
X1.13 +5V
+15V
X4.12
+5VD
X1.11
X1.12
X4.11
X4.13
X1.16
X4.16
X4.14
X1.10
X1.15
X4.10
X4.15
X1.9
X4.9
1WB
4 5
X9.4
X9.5
+15V
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+15V
+5V
+15V
X1.1 2 3
X8.1
X8.2
X8.3
X8.4
X8.5
N.C.
COAG
B2 coag
B1 coag
X11.1 2 3 4 5
X7.1
X7.2
X7.3
X7.4
X7.5
X7.6
X7.7
X7.8
+15V
X10.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X9.3
C40-2425-B
2
1
socket illumination
C40-2425-A
activation indication
C40-2425-C
NE status indication
front part
1WB
C40-2423
rotary switch
backlight
+15V
NE good
NE alarm
+15V
from
HW04
front board
+5V
+15V
main board
X5.18a
X4.20c
X5.6c
power
manager
board
However, an exhausted battery is of no consequence for the usability of the ME402 because
the calendar clock, as well as the volatile parallel RAM, is intended only for service purposes
such as saving error and activation logs. User-defined settings, in contrast, are stored in the
non-volatile serial EEPROM, which needs no battery.
7.3.5.3 SPI Bus

Communication with internal functional groups on the controller module, as well as with the
external functional groups monopolar patient controller and Argon Beamer, is ensured by a
serial interface consisting of three bus lines for data transfer from the main controller (MOSI),
data transfer to the main controller (MISO) and clock synchronization (CLK), plus an address
line for each bus user. Connection to the monopolar patient circuit controller is established via
162
V 5.0

Service Manual
optocouplers, while connection to the external Argon Beamer is made through a main board
driver linked to the connecting socket for the Argon Beamer.
The main controller board features two SPI bus users: The pulse pattern generator provides
the signals used for controlling the HF generator; the sound generator generates the acoustic
signals that indicate HF power activation, button operation (clicks) or alarm.
MISO
bipolar board
+12V
MOSI
CSM
X6.5a +CLK
CLK+ X7.6a
X6.6a -CLK
CLK- X7.5a
X6.2a -CSM
CSM- X7.7a
+15V
monopolar board
X8.1
X8.2
GT2
X5.13c
GT1
LSP1 X5.32a
LSP2 X5.32c
pulse
pattern
generator
IN
X7.29c
X7.31c
X7.30c
X5.4c
X5.4a
CSMO
X5.13a
X5.5c
X5.17c
TON
MISP
MOSP
MISP
to HF
generator
X5.25a
X5.24c
X5.24a
X5.25c
MIST
argon beamer
socket
(view from outside)
X4.21a TON
MIST
X2.3 MISA
X2.2 MOSA
X4.23a
TON
X21.3 GND
X5.5a CSMO X7.28c
main board
main controller
board
C40-1926, C40-2217
Two driving signals, GT1 and GT2, are required for driving the HF generators transistor bridge.
These involve pulse patterns that are specific for each type of current. The patterns are generated by a programmable logic device (CPLD) but are set/provided by the main controller. In
this process, the main controller charges the internal registers of this generator via the SPI
bus. The internal signal GTEN enables the controller to switch the pulse pattern generator on
and off.
Similar to the HF generators driving signals, the sounds for the acoustic indication of HF activation and alarm statuses are also generated by a CPLD whose registers can be controlled by
the main controller via a serial interface. While the acoustic generator has a frequency range of
two octaves for four voices, only the first, the fourth and one of the two middle voices can be
delivered to two separate outputs which corresponds to a major or minor chord.
V 5.0
163

Service Manual
These voices can be switched on or off by the controller via the internal signal TEN, either individually or collectively. Irrespective of this, the first voice can be switched on by the external
signal TON that is derived from the HF generators driver stage. This ensures that an acoustic
signal is present also during unintended activation of the HF generator.
A small audio amplifier drives the loudspeaker located on the units rear panel. It allows volume adjustment across a range of 45 dB to 65dB through the analog direct-voltage signal
TLS. The corresponding setting can be made on-screen via a submenu.
MISO
bipolar board
+12V
MOSI
CSM
X6.5a +CLK
CLK+ X7.6a
X6.6a -CLK
CLK- X7.5a
X6.2a -CSM
CSM- X7.7a
+15V
monopolar board
to HF
generator
X8.1
X8.2
MISA
MOSA
X5.13a
GT2
X5.13c
GT1
LSP1 X5.32a
LSP2 X5.32c
X7.29c
X7.31c
X7.30c
X7.21c
X5.5c
X5.4c
X5.4a
X5.22a
X5.20a
X5.17c
TON
X5.25a
X5.24c
X5.24a
X5.25c
pulse
pattern
generator
main controller
board C40-2327
0 1 2 3 4 5 67
CSM\
argon beamer
socket
(view from outside)
X4.21a TON
MIST
X2.3 MISA
X2.2 MOSA
X4.23a
MISP
TON
X21.3 GND
X5.5a CSMO X7.28c
main board
0 1 2 3 4 5 67
IN
The main controller board III (C40-2327), implemented with HW04, involves a change in the
internal address system for the SPI bus users, designed to increase the number of users that
can be addressed. The software takes these differences into account by querying the hardware
configuration. If an error occurs in this process and the hardware configuration is not identified
correctly, this may lead to incorrect addressing of the SPI bus users, resulting in an error message such as Patient circuit controller does not respond or CPLD xxx does not respond or
similar.
164
V 5.0

Service Manual
7.3.5.4 CAN Bus, RS232 and Footswitch (SIP/SOP) Interfaces
With the exception of the Argon Beamer connector, all external signal lines entering the unit
are electrically isolated via optocouplers. This concerns the two serial interface sockets for CAN
bus and RS232 and the two footswitch connecting sockets (used for large footswitch and small
footswitch).
X5.16ac +15V
X5.14ac
The CAN bus interface is a male DSUB9 socket for integration of the ME402 into an integrated
OR system and for controlling an external smoke evacuator. The pin assignment complies with
the SIOS industry standard. The CAN bus has an internal bus termination. If external bus termination is required, the jumper X11 must be moved from 1-2 to 2-3.
+15V
main board
APOS
CAN bus
termination

+5VB
X10.3 CANL
X10.5 BNEG
X10.8 CPOS
connector for RS 232

(view from outside)
X10.20 BNEG
X10.18 DTR
X10.16 RXD
X10.15 RTS
X10.14 TXD
COGB
X8.1 APOS
X8.2 COGB
X8.3 CUT1
+5V
COG1
FCG1
X9.1 CUT2
COG2
FCG2
X9.3 APOS
V 5.0
165

Service Manual
The RS232 interface is a female DSUB9 socket exclusively used for servicing the unit, e.g. for
updating the software by download from a PC. Besides, it can be used for transferring all user
settings to another unit, e.g. to a temporary replacement unit in the event that the regular
unit must be repaired.
The large (dual-pedal) footswitch must be connected to the larger of the two footswitch sockets. The two pedal activation signals are received by optocouplers on the intermediate circuit
side and then passed on to the controller as signals FCT1 and FCG1. In HW00 to HW03 units
with main controller boards I (C40-1926) and II (C40-2327), the jumper X500 can be used to
configure the input so that it can also be used for connecting an Erbe footswitch (for HF units
of the ACC/ICC series) whose connector is basically identical to the KLS Martin plug but different in terms of pin assignment. In units with HW04 or higher with a controller board III
(C40-2327) the jumper array X3 not only allows operation of the Erbe ICC footswitch, but
also supports the large footswitch with three contacts (basic setting) and enables connection of
a small footswitch with two pedals. Besides, a footswitch interface circuit can be connected as
well, e.g. for telemetric footswitch activation with power supply from the socket.
The small single-pedal footswitch must be connected to the smaller of the two footswitch sockets. It generates the controller input signal FCG2. However, this socket can also be used for
connecting the small bipolar dual-pedal footswitch of the ME411 HF unit. In this case, the blue
pedal corresponds to the black pedal of the single-pedal footswitch. In HW00 to HW03 units,
the signal of the yellow pedal is supplied as FCT2 signal to the controller as well, but is currently not used by the software. From HW04, this signal is supplied to the jumper array X3,
from where it can also be assigned to the FCT2 signal.
To supply the line drivers of the serial interfaces and the optocouplers with voltage isolated
from the intermediate circuit, the controller module features a small resonance converter that
powers the interfaces via the T1 transformer.
166
V 5.0

Service Manual
7.3.5.5
One-Wire Bus
As from hardware version 02 and software version 1.336, the controller routinely checks the
version statuses of the various boards. Therefore, from hardware version HW02 onwards, all
boards feature a small memory with a one-wire bus interface, used for storing the respective
ID data. This is necessary because the hardware version HW02 introduces new board versions
with partially different properties. As these are used along with the boards already in use, the
operating program must be capable of differentiating between the different types of board.
power manager board
X4.23c
X27.1
X27.3
X27.5
hardware identifier
C40-2281
hardware identifier
C40-2346
hardware identifier
C40-2155
hardware identifier
C40-2471
V 5.0
X1.17
X5.6a
X5.7a
+15V
X8.1
X8.2
X8.3
X8.4
X8.5
front board
(from HW 04)
bipolar
board
main
board
NE alarm
front part
monopolar
board
(from
HW 03)
X7.26c
X1.1
X1.2
X1.3
X1.4
X1.5
C40-2425-2x
NE status
indication
hardware identifier
C40-2425-C
(from HW 04 only)
hardware identifier
C40-2337
X6.1
X6.2
X6.3
X4.17
hardware identifier
C40-2327
main
controller
board
167

Service Manual
7.3.6
Front Part
To give the user a good overview in spite of the multitude of functions offered by the ME402,
the unit has been equipped with a large display screen that shows all settings. Besides, navigation is extremely easy and intuitive, with simplified parameter entry either through channel
selector buttons or with the rotary switch. Plaintext messages facilitate communication with
the user. The following functional groups can be differentiated:
Display screen
Channel selector buttons
Rotary switch with backlighting
MENU button
Activation indicators (LEDs)
NE status indicator (LED)
Socket illumination
ON-OFF button
All operating/control functions are located in the plastic front part that as a sub-chassis
houses the associated modules as well.
7.3.6.1 Display Screen

The unit features a liquid-crystal color display (LCD) with an 8.4-inch (21-cm) screen diagonal
that allows straightforward indication of all essential information the currents assigned to
each socket (including their parameters), the NE status, the menus and plaintext messages.
Illumination is ensured by two fluorescent tubes installed at the upper and lower edges, respectively, which are powered by a converter which is located on the controller module (up
to HW03) or on the front board (from HW04) and can be adjusted in brightness. Their average service life is approx. 20,000 hours, depending on the brightness level selected and ambient temperature. A low ambient temperature, in particular, tends to cause rapid tube ageing.
When room temperature is low, the tubes may flicker after turning on the unit, but this effect
usually subsides after a few minutes because the unit heats up during operation.
The screen is supplied and driven by the controller module via a 34-pole flat (ribbon) cable.
At the front, a solid glass window protects the display screen. The intermediate space between
the pane and the screen surface is sealed to prevent ingress of foreign bodies.
168
V 5.0

Service Manual
7.3.6.2 Channel Selector Buttons
To the left of the display, the unit features a sealed keypad with four yellow and four blue
membrane switches. These four button pairs are assigned to the four instrument connecting
sockets. They are used to select either a cutting or a coagulation function (or current) for the
respective output. The selected parameters are then displayed on the screen.
A flexible cable is used to connect the membrane keypad to the front board, where the signal
lines connect to a keyboard matrix. From there, the signals are transmitted to the main controller.
7.3.6.3 Rotary Switch with Backlighting

The central input device is the rotary switch located to the right of the display screen. By rotating the button, the user can increase or decrease parameter values or cycle through the items
of a selection menu. Pressing the button (axial click) completes and confirms the selection.
The rotary switch is also connected to the front board, from where its signals are sent to the
main controller. The pressure switch function is integrated into the keyboard matrix of the
channel selector buttons.
The rotary switch is surrounded by an illuminated ring that indicates its current functional assignment. If it lights yellow, the rotary switch can be used for setting a cutting parameter. Blue
means availability for coagulation parameter setting, while a white ring allows navigation in the
menu. A currently inactive, dark ring means that rotary switch operation would not trigger an
action. In this case, it must first be activated by pressing a channel selector button or activating an HF current.
The three light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that give the ring the appropriate color are located on a
small board at the edge of the ring. This board is connected to the front board by cable, where
the LEDs are connected to a driver circuit controlled by an I2C bus expander that is connected
to the main controller via the I2C bus.
7.3.6.4 MENU Button

To the right of the display, the unit features a membrane key with which the various menu
levels can be accessed. This button is connected to the front board via a flexible cable, where it
is integrated into the keyboard matrix in the same way as the channel selector buttons.
7.3.6.5 Activation Indicators

Four light exits (light guides) next to the instrument connecting sockets indicate which of the
HF outputs is currently activated. They light up yellow for cutting and blue for coagulating.
The eight light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that illuminate the light guides are located on a small
board connected to the front board by cable, where the LEDs are connected to a driving circuit
controlled by an I2C bus expander that in turn is connected to the main controller via the I2C
bus.
V 5.0
169

Service Manual
7.3.6.6 NE Status Indicator
Next to the neutral electrode (NE) connecting socket, the unit features a light exit/guide that
indicates the NE status by either a flashing red light or an uninterrupted green light. In standby mode, the red LED flashes with only half its normal brightness. The light intensity will increase as soon as the user activates monopolar HF current.
The two light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that illuminate the light guide are located on a small
board connected to the front board by cable, where the LEDs are connected to a driving circuit
controlled by an I2C bus expander that is connected to the main controller via the I2C bus.
From HW04, the board is equipped with a one-wire identifier which identifies the socket configuration for the system.
7.3.6.7 Socket Illumination

To ensure that the electrode cable plugs can be easily and safely inserted into the sockets
even in darkened rooms, the edges of the sockets are illuminated by a transparent plastic
plate whose inner edge features a number of white LEDs. A plug-in connection links the board
carrying these LEDs to the board carrying the LEDs for the activation indicators.
7.3.6.8 ON-OFF Button

The key with which the ME402 can be turned on and off is a pushbutton connected to the front
board. There, the two lines are looped through to the main controller only, then from the main
controller board to the main board only, and from there to the power manager module.
7.4
Functional Description of the MB402 maxium Beamer
7.4.1
General Information
The maxium Argon Beamer MB402 is an accessory unit for use with the ME402 maxium HF
unit. It generates a defined gas flow in the range of 0.1 to 12 l/min. The gas flow is simultaneously activated with the HF current. As this Beamer is exclusively controlled through the
ME402, all settings (gas flow rates, etc.) are made on the latter. The argon gas and the HF
current eventually merge in the patient-side (distal) part of the applicator. To irrigate the applicator with argon gas prior to connection (in order to remove the air still present in it), a special button is available on the unit (the PURGE button/function). It allows the user to generate
a pure gas flow without HF current activation.
The coagulation process utilizes a special property of the inert or noble gas argon, namely its
easy ionizability. By delivering the HF coagulation current to the tissue surface as part of (or
packed in) a directed, ionized gas beam (argon beam), better i.e. more targeted and more
uniform surface coagulation results can be achieved than in conventional spray coagulation.
The cutting process, in contrast, uses the argon gas as a protective gas flowing around the
cutting electrode. While the gas is neither actively involved in the current delivery nor in the
cutting process, it counteracts the generation of combustion products. And in both applications, the gas beam helps to clear the surgical field by blowing aside any liquids present on the
surface.
170
V 5.0

Service Manual
Argon gas is usually supplied in pressurized cylinders having a filling pressure of 20 MPa
(200 bar). This high internal pressure is reduced to 250450 kPa (2.54.5 bar) by means of
the MABS pressure reducer mounted directly on the cylinder. At this reduced pressure, the gas
is then delivered to the MB402 maxium Beamer. Alternatively, the MB402 can be connected
to a central argon gas supply system (if available), provided its operating pressure lies in the
required range. For such connection, you need a special adapter hose available on request
(special KLS Martin accessory).
Through its controller, the MB402 automatically ensures that the actual gas flow available at
the distal (patient-side) end of the applicator matches the set rate. Different applicator flow
resistances are automatically taken into account and compensated and therefore do not affect the gas flow rate. This makes the MB402 suitable also for endosurgical applications, where
applicators with very thin flexible tubes are used.
In the usual setup, the MB402 and the ME402 are placed on top of each other. This is a particularly convenient and ergonomic arrangement if the maxium Cart is used (which has been
specially designed for this purpose, offering ample storage space for the argon gas cylinder as
well). Via a special connecting cable, the MB402 is both powered and controlled through the
ME402.
7.4.2
Argon
The chemical element argon (atomic number 18) is an inert or noble gas present in the ambient air in a concentration of 0.93%. It is extracted from air by liquefaction. Due to its inertness, argon by itself does not undergo chemical reactions, which means that, while odorless, it
is neither ignitable nor aggressive nor poisonous. This prevents the formation of argon-based
disintegration products in the argon beam plasma. Moreover, its release into the ambient air
(from which it has been extracted) poses no environmental problems at all.
Although all noble gases can basically be used for beamer operation, the MB402 has been designed for operation with argon because this inert gas is not only by far the cheapest available,
but the one most readily accessible as well. Gebrder Martin recommends using quality 4.8
argon characterized by a purity of more than 99.998%. Although such a high degree of purity
is not really required for maxium Beamer operation, only such high-purity gases which are
primarily used in chemical analytical procedures can be obtained in cylinders that are not
part of the usual production and distribution cycle (which includes cylinders used in the manufacturing and craft sectors, which may be heavily contaminated). While it is possible to use
argon gas of a quality level higher than 4.8, this would not bring any additional application
advantages.
Due to its inertness, and unlike carbon dioxide (also used for medical-technical purposes), argon gas has no adverse influence on the lungs gas exchange processes. Nonetheless, if
present in very high concentrations, argon can displace the air needed for breathing. No such
concentration can occur, however, if the room is ventilated in a normal way and the MB402 is
used as intended, thus ruling out suffocation under normal operating conditions. But one
should bear in mind that argon does constitute a potential danger if it escapes in poorly ventilated places or is released in pits or cavities. Since argon is heavier than air, it can accumulate
on the floor if ventilation is insufficient.
V 5.0
171

Service Manual
7.4.3
Gas Flow Control Block Diagram
0 - 300 bar
Bypass
Valve Block
Gas Connector
2 bar - 5 bar
Pressure
Reducer
Input
Valve
V1
Filter
Flow
Registration
0.5 to 12 l/min
Control
Valve
V2
V3
Venting
V4
Output
Valve
V5
Outlet
Supply optional
also from central
gas supply
+15V
K3
Argon 4.8
pabs
S1
+ -
+15V
p
U
S2
+
S3
+ -
Gas Cylinder
5 Liter or 10 Liter
UREF
K1
12V
350mV
K2
+15V
HMV UREF REF1 PRIN
Gas Flow Control
MVIN
PWM1 KPQ Q
PROUT MVBYP MVREF MVOUT

KPOUT
Microcontroller
The MB402 Argon Beamer is capable of generating a defined argon flow in the range of 0.1 to
12 liters per minute at the patient-side (distal) output of the applicator. The pneumatic unit
required for this has been combined in a monolithic valve block located on the main board.
In the MABS pressure reducer that is directly mounted on the cylinders angle valve, the argon
gas, which is usually delivered in cylinders with an internal pressure of up to 200 bar, expands
to an intermediate pressure (output pressure) of 2.5 to 4 bar. At this pressure, the gas is then
supplied to the MB402 via a hose connected to a quick-action coupling (as used with compressed-air-operated tools) located on the units rear panel. Inside the Beamer, a hose (or
flexible tube) delivers the gas to the valve block, which features a filter at its input side to prevent ingress of foreign bodies. Immediately behind the filter, the unit has a connector for the
pressure sensor S1, which is located on the board outside the valve block. S1 has the task of
measuring the input pressure to provide the system with information on whether the pressure
is inside the permitted range or not. Besides, it provides information on the cylinders current
filling level.
Valve V1 behind the input has the function of a shutoff valve that opens only upon activation of
the MB402, provided the input pressure is in the permitted range. This valve is followed by the
control valve V2 used for setting the gas flow rate. V2 is driven by a variable current supplied
by a switching amplifier.
The actual flow rate is measured by the pressure difference created when the flow passes
through a narrowing in its path. This value is picked up by the differential-pressure sensor S2
located outside of the valve block. The pressure signal increases quadratically (i.e. by square
law) relative to the flow, which means given the flow range of 0.1 l/min to 12 l/min a maximum ratio of 120 between the two flow values, which in turn would translate into a maximum
ratio of 14,400 between the pressure values measured. As this would make excessive demands on the properties of the measuring amplifiers used, the cross section of the
172
V 5.0

Service Manual
aperture/orifice is increased as soon as a flow rate of 1 l/min is exceeded. This is done by
opening a bypass with a larger cross section via valve V3. As a result, the entire control range
is subdivided into two separate ranges characterized by roughly identical setting ratios of 10.
In addition, the relay K1 allows switching the amplification of the signal amplifier mid-way
through each setting range for optimized control of the microcontrollers analog input.
During the initial self-test, the flow control is checked as well. This requires gas flow activation
at a very low rate, but this flow cannot be directed towards the applicator. Therefore, valve V4
opens a path that releases this gas flow inside the unit. V4 is opened also during the recalibration cycles run in standby mode.
Behind the gas outlet, the unit features another valve (V5) that is closed in standby mode but
releases/opens the output upon activation of the MB402. This prevents a return flow through
the applicator in the event of back-pressure (as can be the case in endoscopic interventions
when using insufflation). This valve is preceded by the pressure sensor S3 that measures the
output pressure. This accounts for (i.e. compensates) the flow resistance of the applicator. A
high flow resistance causes overpressure in the valve block, relative to the atmospheric pressure. If the gas flow were regulated to meet the setpoint at the valve block output, this would
actually mean a higher flow rate at the applicators distal end than the rate set, due to the fact
that the gas expands while passing through the applicator. By measuring the excess pressure,
the control system therefore takes account of this effect, with the result that the flow rate
available at the distal end of the applicator exactly matches the set flow rate.
The pressure sensors are piezoresistive sensors, with a measuring transducer that consists of a
semiconducting diaphragm into which four identical resistors have been diffused and interconnected into a resistance bridge. When charging the diaphragm with pressure, the values of
these resistors change as a result of diaphragm deformation, which translates into an output
voltage differential. Unavoidably, a non-negligible output offset voltage characterizes such
sensors. In the case of the MB402, these offset voltages of the sensors S2 and S3 are picked
up and automatically compensated during the initial self-test after starting the unit. Such compensation is subsequently checked by recalibration at intervals of approx. 5 minutes in order to
capture offset temperature drift as well.
Gas flow control is performed by a microcontroller that also controls all other functions of the
unit and monitors operation, displaying error messages if malfunction occurs or blocking gas
flow activation if need be. Moreover, the controller periodically activates a charge pump that in
turn actuates the relay K1. In the event of controller failure, the charge pump is no longer operated and K1 drops out, thereby de-energizing and therefore closing all valves.
V 5.0
173

Service Manual
7.4.4
Measuring the Filling Level of the Gas Cylinder
The status indicators on the ME402s display include an optional indicator that keeps the user
informed about the argon supply (or filling level) of the pressurized cylinder connected to the
MB402. Because, unlike carbon dioxide for example, argon does not liquefy under high pressure but remains a compressed gas inside the cylinder, its pressure is a direct measure of the
filling level. The column shown on the ME402s screen, which represents the cylinders filling
level, is consequently not in line with the physical facts. However, it is much easier to
represent the process of continuous draining simply by means of a column than by trying to
give a graphical description of the gas expansion process (that actually takes place in the cylinder). Therefore, the filling level can be indicated by the cylinders internal pressure, as evidenced by the manometer provided on the pressure reducer. The manometer indicates the gas
pressure inside the cylinder when the angle valve has been opened. The maximum filling pressure of 200 bar corresponds to a full cylinder.
High Pressure
Manometer
High Pressure
Inlet
Valve Disk
Valve Gasket
Membrane
FH
Low Pressure
Outlet
FN
FF
Valve Spring
As the pressure reducer with the manometer is usually located either behind the units or inside the trolley
(Cart), checking the pressure level in
this way is possible only by looking
behind the systems or opening the
Carts door.
However, the filling level can also be
determined indirectly, using the pressure present at the Argon Beamers
inlet. This method takes advantage of
a specific property of pressure reducers namely that the pressure reducers output pressure is not a constant
quantity but, rather, depends on the
input pressure too. A brief description
of the functional principle of pressure
reducers may help to understand this:
A valve that controls the gas flow is located between the high-pressure input and the lowpressure output of the pressure reducer. The disc of this valve is driven by a diaphragm that in
turn is pressed upwards with a force FF by a spring located underneath the diaphragm, thus
opening the valve. On the upside, however, the force FN acts upon the diaphragm due to output pressure. As gas flows through the valve gap from the high-pressure side, output pressure
builds up to a point at which the force FN (exerted by output pressure) is exactly equal to the
force FF exerted by the spring. If the output pressure subsequently continues to rise, the diaphragm moves downwards, thus closing the valve with the result that no gas can flow in any
longer. As gas flows off at the output pressure side, the spring will again open the valve
enough so gas can flow in again from the high-pressure side to restore the balance between
the forces acting on the diaphragm. In this way, output pressure is automatically regulated.
However, there is still another, third factor involved in this system: the force FH, which is the
product of the high pressure and the effective valve surface, and which supports the force FN.
Therefore, the question of what amount of output pressure is required to achieve a balance
174
V 5.0

Service Manual
Output Pressure in bar
between the forces acting on the diaphragm also depends on the high pressure. If the cylinders internal pressure is very high, this balance is achieved with a comparatively low output
pressure and vice versa. This means that output pressure increases while the cylinder is being drained, as can be seen from the pressure reducers output characteristic. Consequently,
the cylinders filling level can be determined by measuring the output pressure.
4
Alarm Limit
Output Characteristic of MABS Pressure Reducer
30
50
100
150
200
Cylinder Pressure in bar
Nonetheless, this method is subject to certain limitations and peculiarities that require some
explanations:
1. This type of pressure measuring works only when the MB402 is in standby mode
(as long as no argon gas flow is activated). As soon as argon flows to the MB402
through the pressure reducer and the hose, a pressure drop occurs, depending on the selected flow rate. This leads to a different pressure at the MB402s gas inlet that cannot be
used any longer for determining the cylinders filling level. Therefore, the filling level indicator is frozen during gas flow activation which constitutes no problem, though, because
there is no noticeable change in the filling level during activation. This can cause irritation,
however, if the user forgot to open the angle valve, in which case only the gas contained in
the pressure reducer will expand while the pressure on the pressure reducers input side
rapidly decreases. As a result, the filling-level indicator will drop heavily (or even trigger
the alarm) upon deactivating the gas flow even though gas was indicated to be in sufficient supply prior to activation.
V 5.0
175

Service Manual
2. The pressure reducer valve does not close by itself (force-free). Rather, a closing force is
required for closing it tightly. Such force is created by the slowly increasing output pressure. At the end of an activation phase, when the argon flow through the pressure reducer
stops, the valve disc is initially lightly pressed against the gasket. Due to untightness, however, a small amount of gas continues to flow through the valve, causing the output pressure to increase slowly until the closing pressure is high enough to close the valve tightly.
This effect actually differs from one pressure reducer to another and can also be influenced
by environmental operating conditions. Usually, such output-pressure lagging takes only
a few seconds. The MB402 automatically takes this effect into account by starting
pressure measurement only a few seconds after gas flow activation has been
stopped. However, if such lagging takes longer, this will cause the filling-level indicator
column to jump upwards, then returning slowly to its original (final) level.
3. If the pressure reducer is not charged with high pressure, the valve is pressed fully open
by the spring and the elastomeric gasket of the valve seat expands. Once the pressure reducer has been charged with pressure, with the valve working as a gas flow regulator, the
elastomeric gasket is mechanically loaded as well, which slightly changes its shape (creep).
This means that the output pressure will continue to change slightly after the high pressure
begins to act on the valve, reaching its stationary value only after a few minutes. This
must be taken into account when calibrating the units pressure measuring system (teach-in).
4. As the shape of the output pressure curve is slightly different for different MABS pressure
reducers, it may be necessary to adjust the MB402. Through the so-called teach-in procedure, it is possible to record the parameters of the connected pressure reducer and store
them in the non-volatile memory. Such adjustment has already been made at the factory
for the pressure reducer supplied with the MB402, so there is usually no need to repeat the
process during installation of the unit and initial user instruction. However, if the user has
doubts about the accuracy of the filling levels indicated on the screen (e.g. after exchanging the pressure reducer or the MB402), check and adjust the filling-level indicator following the instructions provided in section 4.1.2.
176
V 5.0

Service Manual
The Argon Beamer MB402 and its Components
8.1
Parts and Components of the MB402 maxium Beamer
No.
Designation
Order No.
Housing top
08-012-00-53
Housing bottom, pre-assembled
08-012-00-54
Front part
08-010-01-07
Frame/mounting foot
08-012-00-52
Gas outlet for instrument connection
08-012-00-55
Hose clamp
08-012-01-50
Gas inlet, complete
08-012-00-42
Connecting hose (flexible tube)
08-041-00-51
Decompression bolt
08-006-00-10
10
Status indicator light guide
08-021-00-05
20
Beamer connecting socket, complete
08-003-01-05
21
08-001-00-70
22
Purge button with connecting cable
08-027-00-50
30
Main board with valve block
08-024-00-66
31
Front board
08-010-01-10
MB402 small parts kit consisting of:
08-018-00-60
40
M8 hexagon nut
41
S8 retaining ring
42
M4 nut, self-locking
43
M4 x 8 screw
44
Spacer sleeve, 4.5/8 x 10
45
Self-tapping screw 2.8 x 10
46
S3 retaining ring
47
M4 hexagon nut
48
S4 retaining ring
M1.6A fuse (medium time-lag)
V 5.0
08-034-00-28
maxium Beamer connecting cable
08-041-00-60
Connecting rails, set
08-474-00-10
Stud terminals, set
08-063-00-18
177

Service Manual
41
40 48 47
20
B8
X10
PRIN
B5
B2
B13
X9
B1
B7
B9
X7
X37
1298319V01
3804/018
UREF12
X5
42
+5V
X38
GND
X4 +12V
B4
B3
B11
B10
X39
42
PROUT
B17
B18
30
8
6
40
41
43
22
10 31
21
MB402 maxium Beamer housing bottom and components
178
V 5.0

Service Manual
8.2
Opening and Closing the Beamer
1. Before opening the unit, disconnect it from the ME402.

2. Remove the two screws located at the front of the housing bottom (at bottom edge of cover), then remove the two screws located at the top of the rear panel.
3. Withdraw housing top (1) backwards.
4. To close the unit, slide housing top (1) in place from the rear, inserting it correctly into the
groove provided in the front part (3) and into the two slots provided on the rear side. Finally, slide it forward as far as it will go.
5. Reinsert the two screws at bottom front (bottom edge of cover) and the two screws at the
top of the rear panel, but wait with tightening them until all four screws have been inserted. Subsequently, place the unit on a level surface to check that it has been correctly
reassembled without any frame distortion.
6. Finally, perform the safety checks described in section 11.
8.3
Replacing the Front Part

2. Disconnect the connecting hose (8) leading to the instrument connector from the valve
block by pressing the outer ring of the hose connector towards the valve block and withdrawing the hose.
3. Disconnect the front-board connecting cable (21) from connector X13 on the main board.
4. Remove the four fixing screws (43) located on the left and right sides of the rear wall of the
front part, then remove front part.
5. To reassemble the unit, place front part (3) with its four bottom-side projections on the
front edge of the housing bottom (2), then insert all four fixing screws (43) and subsequently tighten them.
6. Reconnect the front boards connecting cable (21) to connector X13 on the main board.
7. Reconnect the free end of connecting hose (8) to the valve-block hose connector, inserting
it as far as it will go.
8. Close the unit as described in section 8.2 and perform the safety checks.
V 5.0
179

Service Manual
8.4
Replacing the Main Board
X15
X39
X13
PROUT
B10
X40
B17
B18
B4
B3
B11
X10
B2
B13
B5
PRIN
X9
B1
B7
B9
1298319V01
3804/018
X37
X3
X5
X7
+5V
UREF12
B8
X38
GND
X4 +12V
X1
X2

2. Disconnect the front and gas-inlet connecting hoses (8) from the hose connectors located
at both ends of the valve block by pressing the connector ring towards the valve block
while pulling out the hose at the same time.
3. Disconnect the front-board connecting cable (21) from connector X13 on the main board.
180
V 5.0

Service Manual
4. Disconnect the two plugs of the cable of the Beamer connecting socket (20) from connectors X1 and X2 on the main board.
5. Remove the five fixing nuts (42), then take the board off the studs.
6. Before reinstalling the new board, verify that all five distance sleeves (44) are in place on
the housing bottom studs.
7. Install board on the studs, then screw the five self-locking nuts (42) in place and tighten.
8. Reconnect the two plugs of the Beamer connecting socket (20) cable to connectors X1 and
X2 on the main board.
9. Reconnect the front-board connecting cable (21) to connector X13 on the main board.
10. Reconnect the free ends of the connecting hoses (8) to the valve-block hose connectors,
inserting them as far as they will go.
11. Close the unit as described in section 8.2 and perform the safety checks.
8.5
Replacing the Instrument Connector

2. Remove front part as described in section 8.3.
3. Use a side (diagonal) cutter to cut open clamp (6) of connecting hose (8) located next to
the instrument connector (5), then remove hose. As the hose is damaged in this process,
do not use it again.
4. Remove hexagon nut (40) and retaining ring (41), then remove connector (5) forwards.
5. Insert the new connector (5) into the front-panel opening and secure it with retaining ring
(41) and nut (40).
6. Push new connecting hose (8) with new clamp (6) onto the hose connector sleeve. Although special pliers are required for tightening the clamp, you can also use normal pincers
for this purpose.
8. Close unit as described in section 8.2 and perform the safety checks.
V 5.0
181

Service Manual
8.6
Replacing the Purge Button

2. Disconnect the PURGE button (22) connecting cable from front board (31), then press button out of the frame from the rear.
3. To install the new button, insert the buttons connecting cable through the opening of the
front part (3) from the front. Note that the button features a lug or key at the rear that
must engage with the cutout provided at the upper side of the recess. Therefore, pay attention to the correct mounting position (connectors vertically one above the other).
4. Connect cable to front board (31).
8.7
Replacing the Front Board

2. Disconnect main-board connecting cable (21) and purge-button cable (22) from front
board. Remove fixing screw (45) which fixes the board to the front part (3) with a suitable screwdriver. If necessary, remove front part (3) as described in section 8.3
3. Install the new front board (31) by fitting it to the front part with the self-tapping screw
(45) and the retaining ring (46). Pay attention to the correct mounting position of the light
guide (10) because it is asymmetrical. If applicable, reinstall the front part.
8.8
Replacing the Gas Inlet Connector

2. Open clamp connection (7) on the hose connection side of the connector, then withdraw
the end of hose (8).
3. Remove fixing nut together with the retaining ring, then withdraw connector backwards.
4. To install the new connector, insert gas connector pin (7) from the outside through the
opening provided in the rear panel of the housing bottom (2), then apply the retaining ring
and the nut from the inside and tighten nut. To facilitate tightening, counter from the outside by applying a size-14 wrench to the connector because the connector does not have a
rotation lock.
5. To prevent leakages on the gas inlet side, we recommend replacing the valve-block connecting hose (8) as well. Insert hose into the clamping nut, then push it onto the rear end
of connector (7) and apply the clamping nut and tighten it. Insert the other hose end into
the hose connector on the valve block as far as it will go.
182
V 5.0

Service Manual
8.9
Replacing the Connecting Socket

2. Disconnect the connecting cables from connectors X1 and X2 on the main board.
3. Disconnect the PE line from the housing bottom (by removing the M4 nut).
4. To remove the threaded ring (20), a special tool is required. Alternatively, however, you
can also use a normal screwdriver, inserting it into one of the two slots provided on the
ring and applying tangential force. Remove ring (withdrawing it inwards over the cables),
then press socket outwards and remove it.
5. To reinstall the socket (20), insert it (cables first) from the outside into the opening provided on the rear wall of the housing bottom (2), then run the cables through the threaded
ring (20) and carefully screw the ring in place on the body of the socket. To prevent thread
damage, be sure to insert the fine plastic thread correctly (no jamming). Align socket so
that the lug (intended as a locking element) engages with the cutout provided at the upper
edge of the bore, then tighten the threaded ring in the same manner as you removed it.
6. Reconnect the PE line to the housing bottom and the two plugs to connectors X1 and X2 on
the main board.
V 5.0
183

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
9.1
Text Messages
The Context line on the screen can show plain-text messages. These messages can have various functions, including notices, warnings, error messages or just prompts requesting the user
to carry out a function. The following paragraphs are intended to give you an overview of these
messages. Those which describe a system fault or operator error (or can be related to such a
fault or error) are discussed in more detail.
13. Standard program cannot be overwritten!

Non-permitted user entry. The standard program is intended as a default program (or basic
setting) that cannot be overwritten. If you wish to modify the standard program in accordance
with your own needs for later use, you must store it in the non-volatile memory under a new
name (see Operating Instructions). As from SW version 0.331, the standard program can be
modified via the Service menu (for procedure, see section 4.1.1).
14. Program name illegal
The selected program name is formally incorrect, e.g. because the first character is not a letter
or figure, or because it is too short.
15. Program name exists already! Overwrite?
The program name you entered is already in use. Confirmation query to prevent accidental
deletion of a program.
28. Warning: Current program will be deleted!
Safety notice to prevent accidental deletion.
29. The standard program cannot be deleted!
Just for user information. Deletion not possible.
30. Program memory full, clear program(s) first!
The program memory offers space only for 100 programs. If full, you must first create free
space for new entries by deleting programs that are no longer needed.
31. Assign single-pedal footswitch to channel first!
While the unit recognizes that the small single-pedal footswitch has been operated, it cannot
derive an activation action from this because the footswitch has not been assigned to a channel yet.
32. Assign CUT dual-pedal footswitch to channel first!
While the unit recognizes that the yellow pedal of the double-pedal footswitch has been operated, it cannot derive an activation action from this because this pedal has not been assigned
to a channel yet.
33. Assign COAG dual-pedal footswitch to channel first!
While the unit recognizes that the blue pedal of the double-pedal footswitch has been operated, it cannot derive an activation action from this because this pedal has not been assigned to
a channel yet.
184
V 5.0

Service Manual
34. Currently no suitable current selected in main menu!
Some parameters, e.g. the Auto Coag Stop switch-off threshold, are only active with certain
types of current. Therefore, they are only available for adjustment after a matching current
(for which it can actually be used) has been selected on the main menu level.
35: No activation due to neutral electrode error!
The NE monitor signal is not in the green range. As a result, monopolar HF current activation is
blocked.
If this message appears even though incorrect NE application to the patient or incorrect NE
connection to the unit can be ruled out, this indicates a fault in the unit. In this case, the
graphical NE indicator (slide) is a useful means for checking the NE cable or the units NE
socket for loose contacts. Besides, check the internal path of the NE line from the socket to the
main board and from there to the monopolar board. Particularly if the error message 35 appears alternatingly with error message 50, it is very likely that the fault is located in the NE
monitor of the monopolar board itself.
41. Conflicting activation actions HF output interrupted!
Application error. The unit recognizes two simultaneous activation signals from the same activation source. This prevents an unambiguous decision as to which type of current should be
activated.
48. This channel must be selected first: no activation!
The user attempted to activate a channel for which no current has been selected.
49. Single-plate NE not allowed by setup, therefore NE error!
The unit recognizes connection of a single-plate (non-split) NE, although such NEs have been
excluded in the Setup menu.
50. NE error: NE cannot be evaluated! Short circuit?
System or electrode error. The signal of the NE monitor is out of the specified range, which is
possible only if the monitoring circuit is purely capacitive (due to contact between the two
halves of a split NE) or monitor failure occurred. As a result, monopolar HF current activation is
blocked.
51. Pin error on monopolar channel M1: Please correct!
Application error. The single-pin 4-mm plug of a monopolar instrument connecting cable has
been inserted into the wrong socket contact belonging to the finger-switch control of a 3-pin
plug (see Operating Instructions). As a result, the HF current flows through the finger-switch
control circuit when activated with the footswitch. To prevent damage to this control circuit,
the HF current is cut off as soon as it exceeds a certain limit and the above message is displayed.
52. Pin error on monopolar channel M2: Please correct!
Same as 51, but for the M2 monopolar output.
54. Attention: Instrument makes tissue contact. Activation locked!
During the initial self-test of the bipolar impedance monitors, the unit expects output signals
corresponding to open output circuits. If this is not the case, this message is displayed. If a
bipolar instrument connected to the unit already makes tissue contact, this instrument must be
briefly disconnected from the unit to enable completion of the self-test. If the message persists
even after switching the unit off and on again, one of the two impedance monitors inside the
unit is defective.
V 5.0
185

Service Manual
56. Int. error 56: Dosing error. Intermediate circuit relay released!
The overdosage monitoring circuit detected an excessively high HF output power (exceeding
the tolerance limit of the power value displayed). If this message is displayed generally or frequently (i.e. for many power settings), this indicates an internal fault. If the excessive power
can be measured with an HF power meter, it is likely that the fault is in the power manager
board. If little or no power is available, the fault is in the main board. If this error message is
displayed only at partial load when performing safety checks on some monopolar contact coagulation currents, check whether this is possibly caused by a coiled-up cable. If a long cable
(e.g. the 5-m cable of a monopolar handle) is used for power measurement, be sure to uncoil
it first (no loops!).
57. Int. error 57: Power monitoring I1<>I2!
System fault. The two measuring points at which the same internal current is monitored provided significantly deviating signals I1 and I2 although the measured values should be identical. In this case, the fault is located either in the signal electronics of the power manager board
or in the measuring transducers on the main board.
72. Internal communication error!
System fault. Malfunction in main controller communication via SPI bus.
If this error message is displayed after switching on the unit, the cause could be a problem in
reading out the hardware identifiers. Turn unit off and restart it.
75. Overtemperature: Power output interrupted!
The temperature limit of 120C has been exceeded at one of the heat sinks of the HF generators semiconductors. To protect the semiconductors from overheating, HF output is blocked
until the temperature has dropped to 80C.
76. Self-test: Activation attempt during system start!
Warning notice. During the self-test routine, the unit registered an activation signal from one
of the control sources. Activation will not be carried out, not even after completion of the selftest. Activation will be possible only after the signal has turned passive (and is then activated
again).
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
Error
Error
Err0r
Error
Error
78:
79:
80:
81:
82:
A/D
A/D
A/D
A/D
A/D
channels misaligned
timing: spurious INTREQ in ADCISR
readings obsolete
ADE (overrun)
INTREQ at ADCSTART request
83. Error 83: Critical task timeout! Task #xx

Program execution fault. If this message is displayed repeatedly, the controller board is defective.
84: Error 84: A/D busy at ADSTART
Internal faults of the A/D converter at the controller board. If the fault is still present after restarting the unit, or if it reappears repeatedly during operation, the controller board is defective.
85. Program name already exists in one of the foreign languages!
Notice informing the user that the intended name cannot be assigned because it is already
used by one of the other interactive languages implemented in the system.
186
V 5.0

Service Manual
87. Internal scaling error 87: I1 power measurement overflow!
System fault. The internal signal I1, which represents the actual power, is out of range. The
fault is located in the power manager board or the controller board, or possibly also in the current transformer for I1 on the main board.
89. Internal error 89: WDC oscillator out of range!
System fault. The frequency of the WDC rectangular signal is also used as a reference for
monitoring the main controllers clock frequency. In case of mismatch, there has been a
change either in the clock frequency (controller board fault) or the WDC frequency (fault on
power manager board).
This fault can also occur as a result of brief mains voltage interruptions. Can be cleared in this
case by switching unit off and restarting it.
91. NE communication with monopolar sub-controller!
System fault. SPI bus communication between the main controller and the patient circuit controller is interrupted. This error may also be displayed alternatingly with errors 92 and 140. If
the fault does not disappear by itself, it may be located in the controller board, the bipolar
board or the monopolar board. However, it could also be caused by a defective optocoupler.
Before replacing the monopolar board, check that power supply to the NE-related parts of the
circuit is OK on this board.
92. Activation communication with monop. sub-controller!
System fault, same as 91.
93. Self-test: Disconnect bipolar instrument at B1!
An impedance signal has been registered during the initial self-test for the bipolar impedance
monitor 1. If the error message was definitely not caused by a connected instrument or test
cable, then the bipolar board must be defective.
94. Error 94: Mono-subcontroller firmware version conflict!
This message can be displayed after updating the software. In this case, the monopolar board
still operates with an old software version lacking boot-loading capability. In such case, the
board must be programmed separately. To replace the board, contact the Martin Service
Center.
95. Error 95: Unable to restore user programs from EEPROM!
96. Error 96: Unable to reinitialize error log!
97. Error 97: Unable to initialize service parameters!
98. Error 98: Unable to initialize device parameters!
99. Error 99: Unable to init default user programs!
System fault. The main controller could not execute certain initialization tasks. This may be
due to failure of a peripheral component of the microcontroller. If it is not possible to clear the
error by turning off and restarting the unit, the main controller board is defective. If the error
is displayed after updating the software, repeat the update procedure.
101. Argon Beamer warning: Low dosage
102. Argon Beamer warning: Argon input pressure too low
103. Argon Beamer warning: Obstruction
104. Argon Beamer warning: Argon gas cylinder empty
105. Argon Beamer warning: Argon gas supply low
Argon Beamer messages displayed on the screen of the ME402.
V 5.0
187

Service Manual
108. Argon Beamer E60: Input sensor defective!
Internal maxium Beamer fault. The input pressure sensor delivers a signal outside the normal
display range. Disconnect argon supply line to see whether this clears the fault or not. If not,
replace the main board of the MB402.
109. Argon Beamer E61: Sensor error
Internal maxium Beamer fault. One of the sensors connected to the valve block delivers a
signal outside the normal display range. Disconnect argon supply line to see whether this
clears the fault or not. If not, replace the main board of the MB402.
110. Argon Beamer E40: Pneumatic error input valve does not close
Internal maxium Beamer fault. Either the input valve is untight, or the fault is in the valves
driving circuit. Fault either in the valve block or in the gas-flow control board.
111. Argon Beamer E41: Pneumatic error input valve does not open
Internal maxium Beamer fault. Either the input valve is hard to manipulate, or the fault is in
the valves driving circuit. Fault either in the valve block or in the gas-flow control board.
112. Argon Beamer E42: Pneumatic error proportional valve untight
Internal maxium Beamer fault. Either the proportional valve is untight, or the fault is in the
valves driving circuit. Fault either in the valve block or in the gas-flow control board.
113. Argon Beamer E43: Flow control error 2
Internal maxium Beamer fault. A gas-flow control error was detected during the self-test of
one of the calibration routines. Fault in one of the pressure sensors, one of the measuring amplifiers or the microcontroller on the gas-flow control board.
114. Argon Beamer E44: Flow control error 3
Same as 113.
115. Argon Beamer E76: Watchdog self-test failed!
Internal maxium Beamer fault. The watchdog function test carried out during the initial selftest failed.
116. Argon Beamer E77: Clock frequency self-test failed!
Internal maxium Beamer fault. The microcontroller clock frequency test carried out during the
initial self-test failed.
117. Argon Beamer E78: Supply voltage low!
Internal maxium Beamer fault. Operating voltage outside of tolerance range.
118. Argon Beamer E54: Null pointer error!
Internal maxium Beamer fault.
119. Argon Beamer E55 - 59: Offset failure!
Internal maxium Beamer fault. One of the offset voltages present at the outputs of the pressure sensors is outside of the tolerance range.
120. Argon Beamer E50: Overdosage
Internal maxium Beamer fault. The system registered a gas flow exceeding the set value (including tolerance limit). This can be due either to a flow measurement error (actual value too
low) or to a flow control error (actual value actually too high). In the first-mentioned case, the
fault is located in the gas-flow control board (measuring amplifiers or microcontroller). In the
latter case, the controller or the valve block may be defective.
188
V 5.0

Service Manual
121. Argon Beamer E90: EEPROM write error
Internal maxium Beamer fault. The non-volatile memory cannot be written.
122. Argon Beamer E52: Input pressure too high
Fault in maxium Beamer or pressure reducer. The input pressure sensor supplies an output
value that is outside the permitted range. If the input pressure is not really too high, then the
pressure sensor itself or the measuring amplifier of the gas-flow control board must be defective.
123. Argon Beamer E91: EEPROM read error
Internal maxium Beamer fault. The non-volatile memory cannot be read out correctly.
124. Argon Beamer E72: CRC-Rom checksum error
Internal maxium Beamer fault. If this is not due to internal disturbances, in which case the
error can be cleared by switching the unit off and on again, the likely cause is a change in the
contents of the program memory of the controller located on the gas-flow control board. If reprogramming does not help, the controller is defective and must be replaced.
125. Argon Beamer E75: Purge button pressed during self-test
Just for user information. The system detected PURGE button operation during the initial selftest but ignores such action.
126. Argon Beamer E71: Defect: RAM check error!
Internal maxium Beamer fault. If this is not due to internal disturbances, in which case the
error can be cleared by switching the unit off and on again, the controller located on the gasflow control board is defective.
127. Argon Beamer E73: Beamer hardware version incompatible!
System configuration error. If this message is displayed after the updating the software of the
ME402, the maxium Beamer requires a hardware upgrade. For procedure, contact Martin
Service Center.
128. Argon Beamer indicates undefined error!
An error for which no error number exists yet has been detected during the initial self-test.
129 Argon Beamer E40+: maxium Beamer signals malfunction!
Same as 128.
132. maxium Argon Beamer needs software update!
System configuration error. If this message is displayed after updating the maxium software,
the maxium Beamer needs a software update as well. When using versions with bootable
software, such updating is automatically done by the ME402 after turning it on. In all other
cases, a bootable software version must be installed in the Beamer (on-time action). For procedure, contact Martin Service Center if necessary.
133. Argon Beamer function initialization attempt failed!
Communication problem with Argon Beamer, even though the Beamer has been connected and
recognized.
135. Implausible argon input pressure measurement result!
An input pressure problem has been identified.
140. Monopolar patient circuit controller missing!
System fault, same as 91.
V 5.0
189

Service Manual
147. No or insufficient input pressure
maxium Beamer message. The measured input pressure is too low or zero. Check gas connection and gas cylinder pressure.
150. Pulse generator CPLD missing or not accessible!
System fault. The pulse pattern generator cannot be accessed via the SPI bus. Provided the
SPI bus is not blocked, the fault is in the controller board.
This message may also occur if the self test recognizes a wrong HW configuration, particularly
if the message is displayed only occasionally during the initial self-test. In this case, either one
of the one-wire bus users has a fault or the one-wire bus communication has been disturbed,
e. g. by brief mains interruption during the power-on self-test.
151. Acoustic generator CPLD missing or not accessible!
System fault. The acoustic generator cannot be accessed via the SPI bus. Provided the SPI bus
is not blocked, the fault is in the controller board.
This message may also occur if the self test recognizes a wrong HW configuration, particularly
if the message is displayed only occasionally during the initial self-test. In this case, either one
of the one-wire bus users has a fault or the one-wire bus communication has been disturbed,
e. g. by brief mains interruption during the power-on self-test.
153. Pulse generator CPLD: Version incompatible!
The currently used program version of the pulse pattern generator is incompatible.
154. Acoustic generator CPLD: Version incompatible!
The currently used program version of the tone generator is incompatible.
154. CPLD initialization attempt failed!
System fault. While the CPLDs are accessible via the SPI bus, they cannot be described correctly. Provided the SPI bus is not blocked, the fault is in the controller board.
155. Bipolar impedance measurement of forceps currents faulty!
System fault. The signals of one or both impedance monitors are out of the specified range.
Fault in the bipolar board.
157. NMI: Supply voltage level too low, device inactive!
System fault. The auxiliary supply voltage of +15 V is too low. Either there is a short somewhere in the system that causes a voltage breakdown, or the fault is on the power manager
board or in the power section of the auxiliary supply on the main board.
158. Error 158: Hardware incompatible: main PCB
System configuration error. Following installation of a new main board, this board has been
found to be incompatible with the rest of the hardware during the initial self-test.
159. Error 159: Hardware incompatible: bipolar PCB
Same as 158, bipolar board.
160. Error 160: Hardware incompatible: monopolar PCB
Same as 158, monopolar board.
161. Error 161: Hardware incompatible: power controller
Same as 158, power manager board.
190
V 5.0

Service Manual
162. Error 162: Hardware incompatible!
Same as 158, non-identifiable or non-allocatable module.
163. Error 163: Blank hardware identification ROM(s) found!
System detected a one-wire user that has not been programmed yet. If this message is displayed after replacing a module, you forgot to program the identifier of this module.
164. Energy output blocked due to previous error
HF activation locked due to a previous fault that, however, has already been cleared in the
meantime. Turn off and restart unit.
167. Current blocked due to 4-kV voltage limitation (setup)
Just for user information, indicating that the HF output voltage has been limited to 4 kV via the
corresponding Service menu item. As a result, some monopolar coagulation currents with
higher output voltages are not available for use (even though they are displayed on the
screen).
169. Current not available for baby NE
Just for user information, indicating that the baby NE has been selected via the corresponding
Setup menu item (NE). As a result, some high-power currents unsuitable for pediatrics are
not available for use (even though they are displayed on the screen).
177. Self-test: Disconnect bipolar instrument at B2!
An impedance signal has been registered during the initial self-test for the bipolar impedance
monitor 2. If the error message was definitely not caused by a connected instrument or test
cable, then the bipolar board must be defective.
178. Int. A/D recording error 178: Complete data record missing
Signal processing error in A/D converter on controller board.
179. Unknown bip. instrument with XX identification connected!
Just for user information. The bipolar instrument recognition function detected an instrument
with identification XX (stands for an unknown numerical value indicated as a number), but no
device settings are stored for this ID. It may be that the settings of the device in question are
still unknown to the currently used software version. In this case, the device is treated like one
having no ID.
185. Error 185: User program couldnt be read correctly!
An error occurred while reading out a stored user setting.
187. Error 187: Monop. p. c. bootloader missing: HW progr. necessary!
This message can occur after updating the software. In such case, the new software attempted
to update the monopolar patient circuit controller, but this action failed because the patient
circuit controller still lacks a bootloader. Contact the Gebrder Martin Service Center!
188. Error 188: Beamer bootloader missing: HW progr. necessary!
This message can occur after updating the software or if an Argon Beamer is reconnected to
the maxium unit after its software has been updated. In such case, the new software attempted to update the Beamer, but this action failed because the Beamer still lacks a bootloader. Contact Gebrder Martin Service Center!
189. Error 189: Bipo p. c. bootloader missing: HW progr. necessary!
Updating the software of a subsystem failed. Turn unit off and restart it. If the error still persists, please contact the Gebrder Martin Service Center.
V 5.0
191

Service Manual
190. Error 190: VDC self-test failed!
System fault. The power controller supplying the HF generator fails to provide output voltage
during the initial self-test. This could be due to a defect in the power controller itself. In a first
step, check fuse F2. However, power controller failure could also be caused by a fault on the
main board or the power manager board.
If this error occurs in units with hardware versions HW00 to HW02 after the optical link has
been adjusted, then you probably forgot to move the jumper X6 on the monopolar board back
to its original position. In this case, the yellow LED FR or DCM lights up continuously, irrespective of HF current activation.
191. Error 191: Bipolar impedance detection failure at B1!
System fault. The bipolar impedance monitor 1 of the bipolar board II provides a value that is
out of the specified range. The fault is in the bipolar board.
192. Error 192: Bipolar impedance recognition failure at B2!
Same as 191, but relating to impedance monitor 2.
193. Error 193: A/D bipolar impedance timeout at B1!
System fault. A communication error occurred between the main controller and its A/D converter, disturbing the reading-in of the output signal of the impedance monitor 1 connected to
output B1. The fault is probably located on the controller board.
194. Error 194: A/D bipolar impedance timeout at B2!
Same as 193, but relating to output value of impedance monitor 2.
195. Self-test: CUT pedal activ. attempt prior to system start!
196. Self-test: COAG pedal activ. attempt prior to system start!
197. Self-test: Single-pedal activ. attempt prior to syst. start!
198. Self-test: Spare-pedal activ. attempt prior to syst. start!
199. Self-test: Activation source identification error at system start!
200. Self-test: CUT finger-switch activ. attempt at syst. start!
201. Self-test: COAG finger-switch activ. attempt at syst. start!
These messages are triggered by an attempt to activate HF current while the initial self-test is
still underway. In such case, HF activation is automatically blocked until the activation signal
effective during the self-test has turned passive again.
202. Error 202: D/A power monitoring self-test
System fault. An error has been detected when checking the output signal path for the reference setpoint value for the overdosage protective circuit. The fault is located on the controller
board or the power manager board.
203. Error 203: Fatal internal access violation (TRAPB)
System fault. An error has been detected in the execution of the main controllers operating
program. Such faults can be caused by internal disturbances, in which case they can be
cleared by switching the unit off and on again. If this does not help and the error message
reappears although no HF current has been activated, the controller board is defective.
204. Error 204: Power monitoring self-test
System fault. A fault has been detected during functional testing of the overdosage protective
circuit, located either on the controller board or the power manager board.
192
V 5.0

Service Manual
205. Error 205: K1 relay break failure!
System fault. A fault has been detected during functional testing of the overdosage protective
circuit, located either on the power manager board or the main board.
207. Error 207: Fatal system stack overflow!
Same as 203.
208. Error 208: Fatal RTX user stack overflow!
Same as 203.
209. Error 209: ROM checksum (Should/Is): 0x0000/0x0000
System fault. The checksum determined across the program memory during the initial self-test
did not match the required value. The setpoint value and the calculated value are filled in for
the above placeholders. Re-install the software in the extended programming mode (see section 5.3). If the error reoccurs, the program memory of the controller board is defective.
210. Error 210: ROM CRC (Should/Is): 0x00000000/0x00000000
Same as 209, CRC check.
211. Self-test monop.: Misplaced plug at output M1/M2!
A PIN error has been detected at output M1 or M2 during the initial self-test. This could be due
to a short at socket M1 or M2, caused by connecting defective or incompatible accessories. If
no accessories are connected and the error reoccurs upon restarting the unit, then the monopolar board is defective.
217. Self-test: Key stuck or pressed during start-up!
Button operation has been detected during the initial self-test. If the error persists after restarting the unit, it is caused by a device fault: one of the membrane keys, the front board or
the controller board may be defective.
218. Self-test: Rotary switch active during start-up!
Rotary switch operation has been detected during the initial self-test. If not operated by user,
then the rotary switch itself, the front board or the controller board may be defective.
233. Error 233: Communication to monop. subcontroller failed!
Same as error 92.
261. This locked program is not allowed to be deleted!
262. This locked program is not allowed to be overwritten!
Alerts user to the fact that the program he/she wishes to delete or overwrite is still locked and
must first be unlocked.
264. Error 264: Incompatible software versions!
This message can be displayed after updating the software but installing it on non-compatible
hardware. See section 5 and contact Martin Service Center if necessary.
298. Error 298: Device too cold, please remove power cord!
The unit has been stored in a place with very low ambient temperature; danger of moisture
condensation.
V 5.0
193

Service Manual
9.2
Module Status Lamps and Their Functions
The boards feature a number of indicator lights (LEDs) representing specific signals or indicating the presence of voltage. They can be used for recognizing faults.
9.2.1
Main Board
From HW02, the main board has a red LED B1 that indicates whether voltage is present at the
output of the PFC stage of the electrolytic capacitor C8. In units up to HW05, this LED is always on under normal conditions if the unit has been connected to the mains. From HW06, it
lights up only after the unit has been turned on. If this LED does not light even though mains
connection has been established, then either the mains input circuit or the B1 circuit itself is
defective. Frequently, the line fuse (located in mains connector socket) has been blown in this
case, but this is only a secondary fault caused by a PSU short.
9.2.2
Controller Board
Up to HW0q1, the controller board features a red heartbeat LED; from HW02, this LED is
green. Under normal conditions, it flashes continuously at a frequency of 1 Hz to indicate correct execution of the operating program of the main controller. Certain error/fault conditions
are indicated by changes in the flashing regime (periodic flash sequences followed by pauses)
as follows:
1 pulse:
non-used
2 pulses:
RAM test error; cannot be consistently written with 0
3 pulses:
RAM test error; cannot be written with bit pattern
4 pulses:
Trap B interrupt
5 pulses:
Device ID of graphics controller cannot be read.
All of these error messages indicate a fault in the core of the controller. If reprogramming (i.e.
updating the software) does not help, the controller board must be replaced.
The controller board versions I and II (C40-1926, C40-2217) of units with hardware status
HW00 to HW03 additionally feature a red LED that lights up continuously but has no indicating
function.
Controller board III (C40-2327), used in units with hardware status HW04 or higher, has a red
LED that is off in normal operation. If it lights up, this means that the protective circuit of the
converter powering the serial interfaces and the footswitches has been tripped due to overload. The serial interfaces and the footswitches function no longer in this case. If the overload
has not been caused by connecting a plug with incompatible pin assignment to a serial interface, then one of the interfaces is defective and the controller board must be replaced.
9.2.3
Power Manager Board
The LEDs located on the power manager board indicate the following operating and error
conditions:
VH: Green LED hidden behind the protective cover in the upper left section of the board. It
lights up continuously in normal operation to indicate presence of the line-side auxiliary supply
voltage generated by the step-up converter. If the auxiliary supply voltage (VH) is missing
194
V 5.0

Service Manual
(LED off), this means either that the PFC stage is inoperative, that VH has been shorted or that
the VH generator circuit is defective.
15V FR
DC xxxx
VH
X11
DCM
5V
SFH 350 V
WDC
X8
RELUSO
X7
USO
PSO
X9
GND
101
101
X6
DCM
CNY65
V415 J 19
PR UR
PSO
GND
X5
X10
CNY65
V415 J 19
S1
CNY65
V415 J 19
200071-10
0.125mH
2.0 A
10
WD5
C40-2169
0406 /034 VXX
10
X3
I2
X4
PVW
10
LEDs.dsf 17.08.08
The fault is on the power manager board or on the main board.

DCB
DC -
USO
DCM
X7
xxxx
PSO
xxxx
X11
SFH 350 V
VH
DCM
X8
USO
5V
15V
X9
GND
X13
DCB
10
101
SFH 350 V
WDC
PSO
X14
CNY65
V415 J 19
REL
S1
CNY65
V415 J 19
10
101
200071-10
0.125mH
2.0 A
10
C40-2337
2606/001 VXX
CNY65
V415 J 19
10
WD5
I2
X4 X3
X10
X5
GND
PVW
LEDs.dsf 17.08.08
WDC: Green LED hidden behind the protective cover, indicating that the prestabilized output
voltage provided by the step-up converter is present within the normal tolerance range. This
LED does not light up continuously; in fact, it is switched on and off periodically at a frequency
of 130 Hz. As the human eye cannot perceive such rapid changes, however, the LED seems to
light up continuously with medium brightness. If it remains dark or is unusually bright, this
V 5.0
195

Service Manual
indicates that the stabilized DC+ direct voltage is outside of the tolerance range or the detection circuit itself is defective. In normal operation, DC+ has a value of 390 V. If the tolerance
range is exceeded, the WDC LED remains dark; if the voltage drops below the threshold, it
lights up brighter than usual. This is caused by a fault either in the corresponding regulator on
the power manager board or in the actual-value sensor on the main board.
15V: Green LED that indicates presence of the auxiliary supply voltage of +15 V. The control
system of the ME402 cannot work without this auxiliary voltage. If this voltage is not available,
this can be due to a fault in the auxiliary PSU located on the main board (check fuse F1), or to
failure of the corresponding voltage regulator on the power manager board, or to a short
somewhere in the 15V supply circuit.
5V: Green LED indicating presence of the auxiliary supply voltage of +5V. This voltage is derived from the +15V voltage. If it is not available even though the +15V is present, no sound
is available and some bipolar board functions will be missing. This can cause error messages
concerning some bipolar board functions to be displayed, even though the fault is not located
on the bipolar board. A missing +5V voltage can be caused by a short in the +5V circuit or by
a defect in the voltage regulator on the power manager board.
FR: Yellow LED indicating that one of the regulators on the monopolar board is active after
monopolar current has been activated.
PR: Green LED indicating that the HF power limitation function is active after HF current has
been activated.
UR: Red LED indicating that the voltage regulator for the VDC output voltage of the power
controller is active.
REL: Red LED indicating that overdosage protection relay K1 on the main board has been
tripped. In normal operation, this LED is always on, except in certain phases of the initial selftest.
196
V 5.0

Service Manual
9.2.4
Monopolar Board
The monopolar board has two interfaces for finger switch signal transmission to the HF output
sockets M1 and M2, plus a section that is connected to the NE and also contains the microcontroller of the monopolar patient circuit. The following signals are indicated by monopolar board
LEDs:
CT1: Yellow LED that lights up if the yellow finger switch (for cutting) is operated on an electrode handle connected to M1.
CG1: Green LED that lights up if the blue finger switch (for coagulation) is operated on an
electrode handle connected to M1.
PIN1: Red LED. If it comes on after monopolar HF current has been activated, this indicates
that HF current passes through the finger switch interface connected to M1 because the 4mm
connector of an instrument cable has been wrongly plugged into one of the control contacts
instead of inserting it in the left part of the HF socket. During high-voltage coagulation, this
LED may also come on as a result of crosstalk (feedover) in the handle cable when using
finger switch activation. In this case, however, it does not signal a fault. If no HF current has
been activated and this LED comes on, it indicates that both finger switches have been operated.
CT2: Yellow LED that lights up if the yellow finger switch (for cutting) is operated on an electrode handle connected to M2.
CG2: Green LED that lights up if the blue finger switch (for coagulation) is operated on an
electrode handle connected to M2.
PIN2: Red LED. If it comes on after monopolar HF current has been activated, this indicates
that HF current passes through the finger switch interface connected to M2 because the 4mm
connector of an instrument cable has been wrongly plugged into one of the control contacts
instead of inserting it in the left part of the HF socket. During high-voltage coagulation, this
LED may also come on as a result of crosstalk (feedover) in the handle cable when using
finger switch activation. In this case, however, it does not signal a fault. If no HF current has
been activated and this LED comes on, it indicates that both finger switches have been operated.
V 5.0
197

Service Manual
xxxx
COG1
530-030 10
CUT1
530-030 10
OE
ACTI
COM
FAIL
HBT
530-030 10
SFH350 V
PIN1
REG
X6
HM12-1A83-06-UL
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
HM12-1A83-06-UL
501
C40-2224
1506/017 VXX
530-030 10
101
CUT2
COG2
PIN2
530-030 10
530-030 10
SFH756 V
530-030 10
10
CRB
HBT
COG1
10
530-030 10
ACR DCR
PIN1
CUT1
xxxx
GND
ACTI
COM
FAIL
ME402 Monopolarmodul 2 LEDs.dsf 19.08.08
NEI
530-030 10
HM12-1A83-06-UL
CUT2
COG2
PIN2
530-030 10
10
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
HM12-1A83-06-UL
C40-2281
1806/012 VXX
530-030 10
101
530-030 10
ME402 Monopolarmodul 3 LEDs.dsf 19.08.08
REG: From HW00 to HW02, the monopolar boards I and II feature this yellow LED. It indicates
that the boards DC regulator is active. Along with the REG LED, the FR LED located on the
power manager board lights up as well. By setting the jumper to its alternative position on
plug connector X6, it is possible to bypass the regulator, which causes the REG LED to light up
continuously. This procedure is used to adjust the operating point (transfer characteristic) of
the optical link with trimmer DCM on the power manager board in units with hardware versions
HW00 to HW02.
If you forget to move the jumper back to its original position on X6 after the adjustment has
been made, the power controller will be blocked as a result. An error message (error 190:
VDC self-test failed) will then be displayed during the initial self-test.
DCR: From HW03, the monopolar board (version III or higher) features this yellow LED that
lights up brightly to indicate that the DC regulator on the monopolar board is active. Along
198
V 5.0

Service Manual
with the DCR LED, the FR LED located on the power manager board lights up as well. If the
DC regulator is not active, the DCR LED glows only faintly. However, it is never fully dark.
ACR: From HW03, the monopolar board (version III or higher) features this red LED that lights
up brightly to indicate that the AC regulator for the HF output voltage on the monopolar board
is active. Along with the ACR LED, the FR LED located on the power manager board lights up
as well. If the AC regulator is not active, the ACR LED glows only faintly. However, it is never
fully dark.
DCR and ACR can only light up in normal operation if monopolar HF current has been activated. If one of these two LEDs lights up brightly, even though no current has been activated,
this indicates a fault on the monopolar board. In this case, it is not possible to generate HF
output power, as the power controller is blocked and an error message is displayed during the
initial self-test. A possible explanation is that the Care Cut or Care Coag current is still set to
setpoint 0. In this case, the setting must be changed to deblock the power controller.
HBT: Green LED that flashes at a frequency of 1 Hz to indicate that an operating program is
being executed in the monopolar board microcontroller. If this LED is not flashing while other
LEDs are on, either the operating program stored in the program memory is incompatible (due
to update failure), or there is a hardware defect on the monopolar board.
ACTI: Yellow LED that lights up if HF current has been activated. It also comes on when activating bipolar current.
COM: Red LED signaling interruption of the SPI bus communication between the main controller and the monopolar board controller. As the self-test of the monopolar board controller is
very much shorter than that of the main controller, this LED lights up with interruptions (when
communication with the controller in the monopolar applied part is checked during the selftest) until the main controllers self-test is completed. If it is still on although the LED HBT is
flashing, this signals an SPI bus communication problem caused by interruption of an SPI bus
signal on the monopolar board, the bipolar board, the controller board or the main board, with
the latter being the most likely candidate (optocouplers U1 to U4). If communication is resumed after an interruption, the LED goes out again.
FAIL: Red LED signaling that the microcontroller in the monopolar applied part detected a
fault during the self-test. Die FAIL LED remains on even after the error or fault has been
cleared. It goes out only after a new initial self-test has been carried out following reset.
CRB: Green LED signaling (in HW03 or higher) that the power controller has been blocked via
the optical link. If CRB is on, the FR LED on the power manager board is on as well and no HF
power can be emitted.
V 5.0
199

Service Manual
9.2.5
Bipolar Board
Up to HW05, the bipolar board has two sections in which signals are indicated via LEDs; from
HW06 onwards, there are three sections of this kind. The first of them is the interface for the
finger switch signals; the second section refers to the impedance monitors; and from HW06,
the bipolar board III has a dedicated microcontroller that also uses LEDs to indicate operating
states. Whereas only finger switch signals are indicated on the bipolar board I (HW00 and
HW01), the bipolar board II (from HW02) and the bipolar module III (from HW06) provide indicators for the operating states of the two impedance monitors as well.
IMP2
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
STS 0434
C89-0170
PBRM08470
UPR.10KV
F2
530-030 10
IMP2 IMP1 IC
X9 X10 X11
530-030 10
530-030 10
GND
X12
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BCT BCG
10
10
C40-1930
4904/015 VXX
STS 0448
1278639
STS 0448
1278639
IMP1 IC
10
F1
BCT: Yellow LED indicating finger switch operation for activating cutting current via an instrument connected to the bipolar output B2.
BCG: Green LED indicating finger switch operation for activating coagulation current via an
instrument connected to the bipolar output B2.
The bipolar board II additionally features the following LEDs:
OC1: Yellow LED indicating that the impedance monitor 1 has been set for adjustment with the
source circuit open.
CC1: Green LED indicating that the impedance monitor 1 has been set for adjustment with the
source circuit closed.
OC2: Yellow LED indicating that the impedance monitor 2 has been set for adjustment with the
source circuit open.
CC2: Green LED indicating that the impedance monitor 2 has been set for adjustment with the
source circuit closed.
PULS: Green LED that lights darkly when the output signals of the impedance monitors are
generated as pulse groups (normal operation); it lights up brightly when the output signals are
generated as continuous oscillation (for monitor adjustment). To switch the monitors to adjustment mode, you can either move the jumper to its alternative position on the X8 plug connector (pin header) or connect the pins 5 and 6 of plug connector X24 with each other
200
V 5.0

Service Manual
(adjustment of UGL1, UGL2 using bipolar test adapter). If the PULS LED is off, both impedance monitors are switched off.
X2
10
10
X2
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
STS 0448
1278639
CC1
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
OC1
STS 0448
1278639
10
CC2
OC2
STS 0521
C89-0170
PBRM08470
UPR.10KV
530-030 10
530-030 10
530-030 10
X24
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
X4
C40-2155
3805/045 VXX
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BCT BCG
10
X15
X16
GND
GND
PULS
X8
ME402 Bipolarmodul 2 LEDs.dsf 21.08.08
The bipolar module III consists of two boards combined to form a unit. In contrast to the previous modules, both bipolar outputs (B1 and B2) now support the finger switch and instrument
recognition functions.
530-030 10
BCG2
530-030 10
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
HF
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
X2
10
BCT2
B1
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
X3
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
B2
BE12-2A85-P-BV466
X4
530-030 10
BCT1
530-030 10
BCG1
530-030 10
530-030 10
530-030 10
530-030 10
ME402 Bipolarmodul 3a Xnummeriert.dsf 08.03.09
BCT1: Yellow LED indicating finger switch operation for activating cutting current via an instrument connected to the bipolar output B1.
BCG1: Green LED indicating finger switch operation for activating coagulation current via an
BCT2: Yellow LED indicating finger switch operation for activating cutting current via an instrument connected to the bipolar output B2.
V 5.0
201

Service Manual
I2C
X8
I2O
F2C F2O
I2C
I2O
KS2
F2C
F2O
F1C F1O
I1C
I1O
KS1
F1C
F1O
I1O
HBT ACTI COM FAIL DCB UB IB
X9
X6
xxxx
SFH756 V
I1C
BCG2: Green LED indicating finger switch operation for activating coagulation current via an
The daughterboard features the following LEDs:
I1C: Green LED indicating that the impedance monitor 1 connected to B1 is operated with
closed source circuit.
I1O: Yellow LED indicating that the impedance monitor 1 connected to B1 is operated with
open source circuit.
F1C: Green LED in front of the trimmer for adjusting the operating frequency of impedance
monitor 1 with closed source circuit. Always lights up together with LED I1C in normal operation.
F1O: Yellow LED in front of the trimmer for adjusting the operating frequency of impedance
monitor 1 with open source circuit. Always lights up together with LED I1O in normal operation.
I2C: Green LED indicating that the impedance monitor 2 connected to B2 is operated with
closed source circuit.
I2O: Yellow LED indicating that the impedance monitor 2 connected to B2 is operated with
open source circuit.
F2C: Green LED in front of the trimmer for adjusting the operating frequency of impedance
monitor 2 with closed source circuit. Always lights up together with LED I2C in normal operation.
F2O: Yellow LED in front of the trimmer for adjusting the operating frequency of impedance
monitor 2 with open source circuit. Always lights up together with LED I2O in normal operation.
HBT: Green heartbeat LED of the bipolar patient circuit controller. Flashes during normal operation.
ACTI: Yellow activation LED. Indicates that bipolar HF current has been activated.
COM: Red LED indicating the status of the communication with the main controller via the SPI
interface. Lights up in the event of an error/fault.
FAIL: Red LED that lights up if one of the self-tests of the bipolar controller fails. It remains on
even after the fault has been cleared.
DCB: Yellow LED indicating that the DC regulator is active during HF current activation.
202
V 5.0

Service Manual
UB: Red LED indicating that the HF output voltage regulator is active during HF current activation.
IB: Green LED indicating that the HF output current regulator is active.
9.3
Faults in the Power Supply System of the ME402
Unit cannot be turned on: The ME402 shows no response after pressing the ON-OFF button
(power switch); both the screen and the indicators remain dark.
Provided a fault in the power cord or the building installation can be ruled out, you should first
check the fuses located in the power supply socket. If both fuses have been blown and are
black inside, a short in the mains input circuit is likely. In fact, it is highly probable that the
transistor of the step-up converter has been shorted. In this case, the main board must be
taken out and either repaired or replaced. If the unit is still inoperable after replacing the main
board and the fuses, the power manager board is defective as well.
If both device fuses are OK or only one has been blown without being blackened inside, the
fault has likely been caused by a mains input circuit overload (due to a fault in the power electronics system powered by the mains input circuit) or by a fault in the signal section of the
power manager board. To check this, replace the blown fuse (if applicable) and try to restart
the unit.
Attention! Never remove or insert the power manager board as long as the unit is
connected to the mains because this could destroy the semiconductors of the mains
circuit!
If, with the power cord connected, the green VH LED lights up after pressing the ON-OFF button, this means that the PFC stage is working. Together with VH, the WDC LED will light up as
well in this case. A voltmeter connected between the measuring point DC- and the left side
of fuse F1 or F2 must then indicate a direct voltage DC+ of 390 V.
If the two LEDs VH and WDC are off (dark) and no voltage can be measured at F1/F2, then
the mains input circuit is interrupted, with the fault located either in the power supply socket,
the main board or the connecting cable between these two components.
If the two LEDs are off and only a voltage in the range of the mains voltage peak (approx.
325 V in a 230-V supply network, approx. 165 V in a 115-V supply system) can be measured
at F1/F2, then the input controller either does not work or cannot be switched on. This can be
checked with the S1 switch located on the power manager board, which is connected in parallel to the ON-OFF switch located on the front panel. If the unit can be turned on with this
switch, then the path of the ON-OFF switch is interrupted or the switch itself is defective. This
path leads from the power manager board to the main board to the controller board, and from
there via the connecting cable to the front board (to which the switch is connected). However, if operating S1 generates no response, this may mean that the fault is in the power
manager board. If replacing the power manager board does not help, the fault must be on the
main board.
If the VH LED is on but the WDC LED is off, this indicates a fault in the input controllers control circuit. In this case, the voltage measured across DC- and F1/F2 significantly deviates
from 390 V. This indicates a fault in the power manager board.
V 5.0
203

Service Manual
If both LEDs, VH and WDC, are on or light up intermittently while the green LEDs +15V and
+5V remain dark, then the 15-V auxiliary supply voltage of the intermediate circuit either
broke down or has been shorted. First check the F1 fuse protecting the auxiliary voltage
supply. If blown, replace the fuse (M0.125A, i.e. 125-mA, medium time-lag). Caution! The
fuse is located in the primary part of the power supply section, carrying voltage to
ground even in switched-off condition as long as the unit is connected to the mains!
If, upon starting the unit, the +15V LED lights up either briefly or continuously, this indicates
a short in one of the switching circuits powered by +15V. Therefore, you need to locate the
faulty circuit. Chances are that the short is located either on the power manager board itself or
on the controller board. In such an event, the rectifier diodes on the power manager board
(which are located next to the version number) can get unsoldered and displaced, resulting in
a short. However, the short as such is only a sequential or secondary fault.
If the +15V LED remains dark and F1 is blown immediately again, this indicates a short in the
primary section of the auxiliary voltage supply circuit and the main board needs to be replaced
in this case. Frequently, however, such a short is merely a sequential fault caused by overload
due to overload on the secondary side.
If the +15V LED is on but the unit shows no visible response, then the fault is in the controller
board.
If the +15V LED is on but the +5V LED remains dark, this indicates a fault in the 5-V auxiliary
voltage supply, either in its generation or due to a short. Although screen contents are available in this case, the unit cannot be activated because important functional groups are not powered.
If, especially after performing repairs or safety checks, the unit can no longer be switched off,
you probably forgot to set the jumper X10 back to its 2-3 basic position on the power manager board. The 1-2 position is used to ensure that the unit comes on again after power interruption during automated safety tests (which would not be the case otherwise).
9.4
Faults in the HF Generator and the Energy Flow Path of the

ME402
If the ME402 can be operated normally but only little or no HF output power is available at the
four outputs without any error message being displayed, this indicates a fault in the power
controller or the HF generator or the drive circuit.
In standby mode, the three LEDs FR, PR and UR are off (dark). As soon as the unit is activated without load, the UR LED lights up to indicate that the voltage regulator is active. When
activating cutting current at nominal load, the green LED PR comes on to indicate that the
power controller is active. When selecting Pure Cut 400 and activating the cutting current at
no-load, a direct voltage of 140 V can be measured across the measuring points VDC (X15)
and GND (X16) on the main board, with UR lit.
If, upon activation, only very little or no direct voltage is present at the VDC measuring point,
this can have several reasons: no direct voltage generated, or a short occurred, or the overdosage monitoring circuit interrupted the current path between the power controller and the HF
generator. It may also be that HF output was blocked by a monitoring (e.g. NE alarm) function
in the normal course of operation. This must be checked as well.
204
V 5.0

Service Manual
If the yellow FR LED is on even in non-activated state, you forgot to reset the X6 jumper to its
original position on the monopolar board following calibration of the optical link for the arc regulators deviation (or control error) signal. If FR is on although X6 is in the correct position,
this indicates a fault either on the monopolar board or on the power manager board. If FR
goes out upon interrupting the optical link (i.e. disconnecting the fiber at one end), the fault is
on the monopolar board.
If, upon activation, the green PR LED comes on although no external load is connected to the
output, this indicates a short either in the HF generator or in the rectifier of the power controller. As the nominal (output) power is then wasted inside the defective stage, the latter heats
up strongly and can thus be easily located. In this case, the main board must be replaced.
If the overdosage protective circuit responds, this releases the relay K1 on the main board. As
a result, the REL LED lights up on the power manager board upon activation. If the relay dropout is a little delayed after activation, the monitoring circuit interprets this as caused by excessive output power. If the relay is no longer switched off after disconnecting the load from the
HF output, you should check the power controllers basic setting for correctness (for procedure,
see section 9.1). If the relay is still switched off or the setting turns out to be correct, then
there is probably a fault on the power manager board or less likely on the main board or
the controller board. If the relay dropped out even prior to activation, then you should measure the voltage present between the DC- measuring point on the power manager board and
the left ends of the main-board fuses F1/F2. If the measured direct voltage deviates from
390 V by more than 10%, the fault is in the input controllers control circuit, very likely to be
found on the power manager board.
If, upon activation, a voltage can be measured across the measuring points VDC and GND on
the main board but no HF power is available at the output, this indicates a fault either in the
drive circuit of the generator bridge or the drive circuit of the output relays. The latter is likely
if only one output or only one type of adjustment (high-impedance current or low-impedance
current) is affected. The driving signals for the generator bridge are accessible at the two measuring points GT1 and GT2 on the main board. The measured value must be approx. 7 V at
both terminals when activating Pure Cut current. If the signal is missing at one or both of
these measuring points, this indicates a fault on the controller board. If only one of the two
(monopolar or bipolar) channels is non-functioning, the fault is located either on the monopolar
or bipolar board or on the controller board. And if only one type of adjustment is working, the
fault is on the main board or the controller board.
9.5
Activation Path Faults
If the HF current cannot be activated through one of the activation paths while all of the other
paths are functioning correctly, a basic fault in the HF generator can be ruled out.
As a general rule, an HF activation path is in proper working order if the associated activation
signal can be heard.
If an HF output cannot be activated via the footswitch assigned (provided a fault in the footswitch itself can be ruled out), it is very likely that the fault is located in the SIP/SOP interface
on the controller board. In such a case, the ME402 cannot be activated through either one of
the two footswitch sockets.
V 5.0
205

Service Manual
If only coagulation current (blue pedal) but no cutting current (yellow pedal) can be activated,
check whether the X500 jumper on the controller board is set correctly or whether an Erbe
footswitch intended for ACC or ICC units has possibly been connected. While KLS Martin and
Erbe ICC footswitches have the same type of connector, the pin assignment is different. You
can adjust the ME402 to one or the other of these footswitches by simply resetting the X500
jumper on the controller board I or II. For controller boards III, the jumpers on plug connector
X3 must be set as appropriate.
If one or both monopolar HF outputs (M1 and M2) cannot be activated manually, you should
check the finger-switch interface circuits on the monopolar board. Upon operating the yellow
pushbutton on a handle connected to the M1 or M2 monopolar HF output, the yellow CUT1
LED for M1 or CUT2 for M2 must light up on the monopolar board (this can be more easily
checked from the rear because the boards upper side is hidden). Similarly, the green COG1
LED for M1 or COG2 for M2 must light up on upon activation of the blue handle pushbutton. If
one of these LEDs remains dark or lights up only faintly, this probably indicates a fault in the
monopolar board or the socket board. However, it can also be that the cable connection (individual conductor loop) between the main-board transformer T12 and the monopolar board is
not OK.
In addition to the above-mentioned LEDs for cutting and coagulation current activation, each
of the two finger switch control circuits on the monopolar board features a red LED PIN1 or
PIN2, respectively which indicates wrong current flow through the finger switch control if
the instrument cable has been incorrectly plugged into the HF output socket M1 or M2. These
LEDs may also light up faintly or fully when activating a finger switch (no fault condition).
However, a fault is indicated if they light up during current activation via the footswitch.
If automatic current activation by tissue contact is not possible, you need to check the impedance monitors (located on the bipolar board) for proper functioning. To do this, connect a
voltmeter to the measuring points GND and IMP1 or IMP2, respectively (in the case of bipolar board I, these are separate measuring points; in the case of bipolar board II, the voltage is
present at pins 9 and 10 of plug connector X24, to be measured with a bipolar measuring
adapter). With the HF circuit open, the measured voltage must be approx. 5 V (bipolar
board I) or 4.5 V (bipolar board II), provided an auto-coag current has been selected for the
output. When shorting the circuit, the measured value must be below 0.5 V. If it is significantly
higher, the cause may be incorrect adjustment. However, if the short-circuit value cannot be
set as described in section 10.4, or if the signal does not respond to external shorting at all,
the fault is in the bipolar board. If the impedance monitor works normally but activation is still
impossible after shorting the circuit, then the fault is either in the signal transmission line between the bipolar board and the controller board or in the signal processing section of the controller board.
206
V 5.0

Service Manual
10
Settings and Checks & Tests
As all spare part modules have been pretested and adjusted at the factory, the correct basic
setting is guaranteed when replacing an electronics module, so no special adjustment is necessary. Nonetheless, certain safety checks and tests are mandatory after any repair to verify
correct reassembly of the unit.
10.1
Adjusting Positions of the ME402
All ME402 adjustments are made via adjustable resistors (trimmers) or via switches. Adjustment is necessary for the following functions:
Setting the setpoints for the output power regulator and the regulator for the powercontroller output voltage, both located on the power manager board.
Setting the operating point of the fiber-optic (optical) receiver on the power manager
board.
Setting the operating point of the HF output voltage regulator on the monopolar board
(from HW04).
Setting the operating point of the NE monitor on the monopolar board.
Setting the operating frequencies and output signals of the two impedance monitors on the
bipolar board.
Basic setting of the bipolar instrument recognition function on the bipolar board.
10.2
Setting the Power Manager Board
Upon replacing the main board, the power manager board or the controller board, it is necessary to check the basic setting of the two regulators for generator operating voltage and power
limitation, as well as the setting of the monopolar optical receiver (and from HW06, the setting
of the bipolar optical receiver as well). If a fiber-optic transmission link (optical link) to the
power manager board has been interrupted, it is always necessary to check the basic setting of
the optical receiver for correctness.
The following tools and working aids are needed for these tasks:
HF power meter (e.g. KLS Martin EPM3). This instrument should at least allow setting the
following resistances: 50 , 100 , 300 , 400 and 600 .
Monopolar test leads (connecting cable from NE socket to HF power meter with shorted
jack plug, and laboratory cable with 4mm plugs for connecting the active electrode to the
power meter).
Voltmeter with a measuring range of up to 200 V at a minimum.
Adjusting screwdriver.
V 5.0
207

Service Manual
10.2.1
Power Manager Boards I and II in HW00, HW01 and HW02
The voltage regulator is active if the generator provides no power or less power than required.
Voltage regulator action is indicated by the red LED UR lighting up on the power manager
board. Checking and adjusting is done as follows:
Connect voltmeter to measuring points VDC and GND on main board.
Using the test cable, connect HF power meter to HF unit, then set resistance to 400
leaving the load circuit open (do not set power meter to ON!).
Select Pure Cut current and set it to 200 W.
Activate Pure Cut current without load. Use trimmer USO on power manager board to set
the direct voltage to +140 V at VDC. The red LED UR must light up during this process.
If the voltage deviates significantly from +140 V, check the test setup and the settings on the
portable testing set as well as the unit for correctness.
Setting to 200W at 400 Ohm with Pure Cut 200, green LED PR must light
Change jumper X6 at the monopolar board to upper position 2-3.
Setting to 0W with Pure Cut, yelow LED FR must light
VH
DC -
SFH 350 V
PSO
DCM
WDC
X1
X2
The power regulator is always active when the generator operates within the normal range of
adjustment during cutting. When using coagulation currents, this regulator is not always active
(depending on type of current used). If active, this is indicated by the green LED PR lighting
up on the power manager board. Checking and adjusting is done as follows:
Close load circuit of the HF power meter already connected and set it to a resistance of
400 (set power meter to continuous operation and ON).
Activate Pure Cut current. Use the PSO trimmer to set the indicated HF output power to
200 W (707 mA). The green LED PR must light up during this process.
208
V 5.0

Service Manual
If power setting is not possible, please check and make sure that the settings are correct on
both the portable testing set and the HF unit. If the settings are correct, but the red LED UR
lights up, the voltage setting may be too low.
The arc regulator is active only while cutting tissue using the cutting currents Pure Cut, Uro
Pure Cut, Soft Cut or Care Cut. It is not possible to activate this regulator via the HF power
meter with its ohmic (non-reactive) load, as the direct-voltage component typically associated
with the cutting process cannot be generated in this case. To obtain a control signal to which
the optical link can be adjusted, it is therefore necessary to change the signal path:
Check the screw connection at both ends of the optical fiber for tightness. The screws may
only be finger-tightened; do not use tools!
Move jumper X6 next to the sender (transmitter) of the fiber-optic transmission link on the
monopolar board to position 2-3 (set jumper to upper position). The yellow LED below the
optical transmitter on the monopolar board, as well as the yellow LED FR on the power
manager board, must come on as a result.
When rotating trimmer DCM clockwise, the LED FR remains bright; when rotating it counterclockwise, the LED grows darker. Adjust trimmer DCM to a point where the FR LED just
starts growing darker.
Activate monopolar cutting with the previous Pure Cut setting (200 W). Rotate trimmer
DCM counterclockwise until the power meter indicates HF power, then rotate trimmer DCM
clockwise until the HF output power reading just reaches zero.
Reset jumper X6 next to the fiber-optic transmitter on the monopolar board to position 1-2
(move jumper back to lower position).
If it is not possible to set the trimmer so that the HF output power can be adjusted all the way
down to zero, check the optical fiber for proper connection. It is likely that the fiber has not
been fully inserted into the screw connection on one side. If mounted correctly, the fiber end
penetrates into the connection for approx. 17 mm. And if the HF unit does not deliver any HF
output power while the yellow LED FR lights up continuously, you likely forgot to re-set jumper
X6 on the monopolar board.
10.2.2
Power Manager Boards III (from HW03) and IV (from HW06)
From HW03 onwards, the HF output voltage for most monopolar currents with the generator
at no-load is no longer limited by the internal voltage of the regulator USO, but by the new
HF output voltage regulator located on the monopolar board (identifiable by the yellow LED
DCM). To set USO, the regulator on the monopolar board therefore must first be disabled. As a
result, the checking and adjusting procedure differs a little from that applicable to power manager boards I and II:
Disconnect the optical fiber from the monopolar board. This ensures that the output voltage
regulator cannot be activated.
Connect voltmeter to measuring points VDC and GND on the main board.
V 5.0
209

Service Manual
Using the test cable, connect HF power meter to HF unit, then set resistance to 400
leaving the load circuit open (do not set power meter to ON!).
Activate Pure Cut current without load. Use trimmer USO on the power manager board to set
the direct voltage to +140 V at VDC. The red LED USO must light up during this process.
If the voltage deviates considerably from +140 V, check the test setup and the settings on the
portable testing set as well as on the unit for correctness.
Disconnect optical fiber from monopolar board.
Set to VDC = 140V with Pure Cut 200 without load, red LED USO lights
Set to 200W at 400 Ohm with Pure Cut 200, green LED PSO lights
Reconnect optical fiber to monopolar board.
Set to 0W at 100 Ohm with Care Coag 0, yellow LED DCM
USO
PSO
Not used
DCM
PVW
X1
X2
The power regulator is always active when the generator operates within the normal range of
adjustment during cutting. When using coagulation currents, this regulator is not always active
(depending on the type of current). If active, this is indicated by the green LED PR lighting up
on the power manager board. Checking and adjusting is done in the same way as for power
manager boards I and II:
Close load circuit of the HF power meter already connected (set power meter to continuous operation and ON).
Activate Pure Cut current. Use trimmer PSO to adjust the indicated HF output power to
200 W (707 mA). The green LED PSO must light up during this process.
210
V 5.0

Service Manual
If power setting is not possible, please check and make sure that the settings are correct on
both the portable testing set and the HF unit. If the settings are correct, but the red LED UR
lights up, the voltage setting may be too low. If the error message Err 56 is displayed soon
after current has been activated, the fault protection circuit has been triggered because the
power setting is too high. In this case, rotate trimmer PSO fully counterclockwise, switch unit
off and on again to clear the fault, and then set the power, starting from bottom of range.
The arc regulator is active only during the process of tissue cutting using the Pure Cut, Uro
Pure Cut, Soft Cut and Care Cut cutting currents. It is not possible to activate this regulator via
the HF power meter with its ohmic (non-reactive) load, as the direct-voltage component typically associated with the cutting process cannot be generated in this case. To obtain a control
signal for adjusting the optical link, the DC regulator located on the monopolar board is set to
its lowest control position by adjusting the setpoint to zero and setting an actual-value offset:
Reconnect the optical fiber to the monopolar board, inserting it fully (17 mm) into the
connector, then finger-tighten screw. Do not use a tool!
Select Care Coag on ME402 and set it to an output power of 0. The yellow LED DCR located on the monopolar board only faintly glowing to this point must now light up together with the yellow LED DCM on the power manager board.
When rotating the DCM trimmer clockwise, the DCM LED remains bright; when rotating
the trimmer counterclockwise, it grows darker. Adjust trimmer DCM to the point that the
LED DCM just starts growing darker when rotating the trimmer counterclockwise.
Set power meter to 100 . Activate monopolar coagulation, leaving Care Coag set to 0.
Rotate trimmer DCM counterclockwise until the power meter indicates a low HF power level, then rotate trimmer DCM clockwise until the HF output power displayed just reaches zero. The VDC voltage will drop below 1 V during this process.
Thereafter, set Care Coag higher than 0 to ensure that HF power is available for
subsequent measurements!
If it is not possible to adjust the trimmer so that the HF power can be regulated down to
zero, a likely cause is that the optical fiber has not been fully inserted into the screw connection on one side. If mounted correctly, the fiber end extends into the connector for approx. 17 mm.
From HW06, the bipolar board also features regulators that are connected to a second fiberoptic receiver using a second optical fiber. To adjust this second receiver, proceed as follows:
Select the Micro Coag bipolar current on the ME402 and set its output power to 0. This causes the yellow LED BRDC on the bipolar board and the yellow LED DCB on the power manager
board to light up.
When rotating trimmer DCB clockwise, the DCB LED remains bright; when rotating the
trimmer counterclockwise, it grows darker. Adjust trimmer DCB to the point that the DCB
LED just starts growing darker when rotating the trimmer counterclockwise.
Activate the Micro Coag current and rotate trimmer DCB first counterclockwise until a
VDC voltage of approx. 8 V is displayed, then rotate the trimmer clockwise until the
VDC voltage drops just below 1 V.
Thereafter, set Micro Coag higher than 0 to ensure that HF power is available for
subsequent measurements!
V 5.0
211

Service Manual
Disconnect optical fiber from monopolar board.
Set to VDC = 140V with Pure Cut 200 without load, red LED USO lights
Set to 200W at 400 Ohm with Pure Cut 200, green LED PSO lights
Reconnect optical fiber to monopolar board.
Set to VDC < 1V with Care Coag 0, yellow LED DCM lights
Set to VDC < 1V with Bipolar Micro Coag 0, yellow LED DCB lights
VH
USO
DCM
DC -
PSO
DCM
SFH 350 V
SFH 350 V
WDC
10.3
Setting the Monopolar Board
When replacing the monopolar board, the setting of the fiber-optic transmission link (optical
link) must be checked and adjusted if necessary. Preadjustment is not possible in this case, as
the efficiency of both the optical transmitter and the sensitivity of the receiver are subject to
high manufacturing tolerances, which causes high spread in the coupling of the two components. The neutral electrode monitor, in contrast, has been factory-preset, so the setting
usually needs to be checked for correctness only.
The following tools and working aids are needed for this task:
Voltmeter
Adjusting screwdriver
From monopolar board III: HF power meter (e.g. KLS Martin EPM3). This instrument should
at least allow setting the following resistances: 50 , 100 , 300 , 400 and 600 .
From monopolar board III: monopolar test leads (connecting cable from NE socket to HF
power meter with shorted jack plug, and laboratory cable with 4mm plugs for connecting
active electrode to power meter).
Optional: NE test plug (NE plug with built-in 270 resistor).
212
V 5.0

Service Manual
10.3.1
Setting the Monopolar Boards I and II for HW00, HW01 and HW02
With this module, only the NE monitor has an adjusting position. Spare parts are delivered
preset, so no adjustment is necessary when replacing the board. Following replacement,
however, the optical link must be readjusted following the procedure described in
section 10.2.1.
To check the board setting, connect a voltmeter to the measuring points NEI and GND located
on the upper edge of the monopolar board. GND of the monopolar board is not connected
to GND of the main board!
SFH350 V
REG
CG1
CT1
CT2
C40-2224
1506/017 VXX
CG2
With the monitoring circuit open (no NE connected), a voltage of 4.3 V 0.1 V must be
present at NEI. Use trimmer NE to adjust the voltage to 4.3 V.
When inserting a 270 test plug, the NE indicator slide displayed on the screen must at
least partially move into the yellow field. (It may be necessary to enable the slide function first in the Setup menu, item NE.)
When inserting a shorting plug (monopolar test lead), the NE indicator must disappear
from the screen and the green non-split NE symbol must de displayed instead.
If the slide of the NE indicator moves unsteadily to and fro, this may be caused by a loose
contact in the NE monitoring circuit (e.g., the contact force of the NE socket may be insufficient). If the fault cannot be corrected by adjusting the contact spring, the socket must be replaced.
V 5.0
213

Service Manual
10.3.2
Setting the Monopolar Boards III (from HW03) and IV (from HW06)
When removing or replacing this module, the setting (transfer characteristic) of the optical link
and from HW04 upwards the operating point of the HF output voltage regulator must be
checked for correctness. Spare boards are delivered with the NE monitor preset, so no readjustment is necessary in this case.
Setting the operating point of the voltage regulator (for HW04 or higher) should obviously be
done after the transfer characteristic of the optical link has been checked/adjusted according
to section 10.2.2. Proceed as follows:
Select Care Cut current at output M1 and set it to 1 (minimum). Set the HF power meter
to 600 .
Activate Care Cut at output M1 and set trimmer UA so that the HF output current just
reaches its minimum level of approx. 35 mA. The red LED ACR (monopolar board) and
the yellow LED DCM (power manager board III) must light up during this process.
FAIL
CG1
CT1
STS 0612 LF
C89-0169
PBRM0846
UPR 10KV
CT2
CG2
ME402 Monopolarmodul 3.dsf 26.06.07
To check the setting of the NE monitor, a voltmeter must be connected to the measuring
points NEI and GND.
With the monitoring circuit open (no NE connected), a voltage of 4.3 V 0.1 V must be
present at NEI. Use trimmer NE to adjust the voltage to 4.3 V.
When inserting a 270 test plug, the NE indicator slide must at least partially move into
the yellow field. (It may be necessary to enable the slide function first in the Setup menu,
item NE.)
When inserting a shorting plug (monopolar test lead), the NE indicator must disappear
from the screen and the green non-split NE symbol must de displayed instead.
214
V 5.0

Service Manual
If the slide of the NE indicator moves unsteadily to and fro, this may be caused by a loose
contact in the NE monitoring circuit (e.g., the contact force of the NE socket may be insufficient). If the fault cannot be corrected by adjusting the contact spring, the socket must be replaced.
10.4
Setting the Bipolar Board
Each of the two bipolar HF outputs has a monitor that measures impedance between the two
electrodes. The results are used as inputs from which the main controller calculates a criterion
for switching off the HF current (Auto Stop function) or activating the HF current (Auto Start,
Auto Start/Stop functions). Replacement (spare part) boards are delivered with these monitors
preset, so no readjustment is necessary.
Up to and including HW05, only the output B2 incorporates an instrument code recognition
function; from HW06, both bipolar outputs (B1 and B2) have this capability. The corresponding
operating points are also preset on spare boards and need not be adjusted.
To check the settings, the following tools and working aids are required:
Voltmeter
Adjusting screwdriver
Bipolar test cable
Bipolar test adapter
Optional from bipolar board II: bipolar test adapter (only for checking and adjusting the
impedance monitor and the instrument recognition function)
V 5.0
215

Service Manual
10.4.1
Setting the Bipolar Board I for HW00 and HW01
Spare boards are delivered fully preset.
X4
X3
X2
530-030 10
530-030 10
530-030 10
GND
BCT BCG
X1
To check the impedance monitors, proceed as follows:
Select the Macro Stop or Micro Stop currents for the two bipolar coagulation channels.
Connect voltmeter to GND (X12) and IMP1 (X10). Short the contacts of socket B1 using
the bipolar test lead (make contact between the two 4mm plugs). Use trimmer F1 to set
IMP1 to minimum voltage.
Remove short-circuit, then set voltage to 5.0 V using trimmer IMP1. Alternatingly operate
the blue channel selector buttons of outputs B1 and B2. The voltage displayed on the voltmeter will change slightly during this process. Adjust IMP1 so that a setting of at least
5.0 V is displayed when selecting both B1 and B2.
Connect voltmeter to GND (X12) and IMP2 (X9). Short the inner contacts of socket B1
using the bipolar test lead (make contact between the two 4mm plugs). Use trimmer F2 to
set IMP2 to minimum voltage.
Remove short-circuit, then set voltage to 5.0 V using trimmer IMP2. Alternatingly operate
the blue channel selector buttons of outputs B1 and B2. The voltage displayed on the voltmeter will change slightly during this process. Adjust IMP2 so that a setting of at least
5.0 V is displayed when selecting both B1 and B2.
To check the setting of the instrument recognition function if necessary, proceed as follows:
Connect bipolar test adapter to socket B2. Set instrument code resistance of 68 k.
Connect voltmeter to GND (X12) and IC (X1).
Use trimmer IC to adjust voltage to 0.8 V. Please note: This voltage differs from that
for bipolar board II.
216
V 5.0

Service Manual
Special adapters are required for connecting the KLS Martin bipolar test adapter to the International (i) and Erbe (e) socket modules. These adapters can be obtained from the
Gebrder Martin Service Center on request.
If a bipolar coagulation current without an automatic function has been selected for an output,
the voltage must drop to approx. zero (0 V) at the test point (IMP1 or IMP2) belonging to the
output.
10.4.2
Setting the Bipolar Board II from HW02 to HW05
Replacement boards are delivered fully preset.

Impedance monitor setting is a little more time-consuming for bipolar module II than it is for
bipolar module I, as the measuring signals are collected via connector X24 and a test adapter
is needed to connect a voltmeter to connector X24. However, it is also possible to pick up the
signals directly at the contacts of the connector if a sufficiently fine test tip or test terminal is
used.
With this module, there are two different regimes for setting the impedance monitors. Board
versions V00 and V01 are set to resonance with the source circuit open, whereas versions V03
and higher are set to resonance when the source circuit is closed. The version number is indicated on the label with module number C40-2155. The board is available as a spare part
only as version 03 or higher, i.e. set to resonance with closed source circuit.
To check the settings of the impedance monitor of a bipolar board version V00 or V01 (resonance with open source circuit) in case of need, proceed as follows:
Select the Macro Stop or Micro Stop current at the two bipolar coagulation channels and set
them to minimum power.
Connect the bipolar test adapter to X24 on the bipolar board and the voltmeter to the
test adapter, then set switch to UGL1 (alternative procedure: move jumper at X8 from position 2-3 (bottom) to position 1-2 (top) and connect voltmeter to X24.8 and GND (X16)).
The PULS LED (B6) lights up as a result.
V 5.0
217

Service Manual
X3
X2
BCT
X4
STS 0508
1278639
R51
STS 0508
1278639
SC1
B4
B3
B7
UGL2
B8
SC2
530-030 10
X24 IC
530-030 10
530-030 10
C40-2155
0405/010 V00
X8
S3
S2
1
2
3
S1
B6
X1
Set switch S2 to the following basic position: 1=ON (towards board), 2=OFF (away from
board), 3=ON (same as 1), 4=OFF (same as 2).
Frequency adjustment of impedance monitor 1, with source circuit open. Set test
adapter switch to UGL1 (alternatively: Connect voltmeter to measuring points GND (X16)
and UGL1 (X24.8)), then operate the blue channel selector button at B2. Set hexadecimal code switch S1 to maximum voltage (approx. 4.5 V). This maximum should range between the end positions 0 (arrow pointing downwards to 6 oclock position) and F (arrow
pointing to half past five). If this is not the case, the range must be changed using the
two right-side switches of S2. The two switches together form a binary value ranging between 0 and 3. If the maximum is below the setting 0 at S1, a smaller binary value must
be set at S2; if it is above the setting F, a higher value must be set.
Frequency adjustment of impedance monitor 2, with source circuit open. On test

adapter, set switch to UGL2 (alternatively: Connect voltmeter to measuring points GND
(X16) and UGL2 (X24.7)), then operate the blue channel selector button at B1. Set hexadecimal code switch S3 to maximum voltage (approx. 4.5 V). This maximum should range
between the end positions 0 (arrow pointing downwards to 6 oclock position) and F (arrow pointing to half past five). If this is not the case, the correct range must be set using
the two left-side switches of S2 (follow description above).
Operating point adjustments for impedance monitor 1: Set test adapter switch to
position IMP1 (alternatively: Reset jumper at X8 from position 1-2 (top) to position 2-3
(bottom), then connect voltmeter to measuring points GND (X16) and IMP1 (X24.10)).
218
V 5.0

Service Manual
Adjusting no-load point 1, with source circuit open: Operate one of the channel selector buttons at output B2. Use trimmer OC1 to set a voltage of 4.6 V, verifying that the
yellow LED next to this trimmer lights up.
Adjusting no-load point 1, with source circuit closed: Operate one of the channel selector buttons at output B1. Use trimmer CC1 to set a voltage of 4.5 V, verifying that the
green LED next to this trimmer lights up.
Adjusting short-circuit point 1: Connect bipolar test cable to B1, then short cable and
operate one of the channel selector buttons at output B1. Use trimmer SC1 to set a voltage of 0.4 V.
Operating point adjustments for impedance monitor 2. Set test adapter switch to
position IMP2 (alternatively: Connect voltmeter to GND (X16) and IMP2 (X24.9)).
yellow LED next to this trimmer lights up.
green LED next to this trimmer lights up.
Adjusting short-circuit point 2: Connect bipolar test cable to B2, then short it and operate one of the channel selector buttons at output B2. Use trimmer SC2 to set a voltage of
0.4 V.
To check the impedance monitor settings for board versions V02 or higher (resonance at
closed source circuit) in case of need, proceed as follows:
Select the Bipol Macro Stop or Bipol Micro Stop current at the two bipolar coagulation
channels and set them to minimum power.
Connect the bipolar test adapter to X24 on the bipolar board, then connect voltmeter
to test adapter (alternative procedure: Move the jumper at X8 on the bipolar board from
position 2-3 (bottom) to position 1-2 (top)). The PULS LED (B6) must light up as a result.
Set switch S2 to the following basic position: 1=ON (towards board), 2=ON (same as 1),
3=ON (same as 1), 4=ON (same as 1).
Frequency adjustment of impedance monitor 1, with source circuit closed. Set test
adapter switch to position UGL1 (alternatively: Connect voltmeter to measuring points
GND (X16) and UGL1 (X24.8)), then operate the blue channel selector button at B1. Set
hexadecimal code switch S1 to maximum voltage (approx. 4.5 V). This maximum should
range between the end positions 0 (arrow pointing downwards to 6 oclock position) and
F (arrow pointing to half past five). If this is not the case, the range must be changed using the two right-side switches of S2. The two switches together form a binary value ranging between 0 and 3. If the maximum is below the setting 0 at S1, a smaller binary value
must be set at S2; if it is above the setting F, a higher value must be set.
Frequency adjustment of impedance monitor 2, with source circuit closed. Set test
adapter switch to position UGL2 (alternatively: Connect voltmeter to measuring points
GND (X16) and UGL2 (X24.7)), then operate the blue channel selector button at B2. Set
V 5.0
219

Service Manual
hexadecimal code switch S3 to maximum voltage (approx. 4.5 V). This maximum should
range between the end positions 0 (arrow pointing downwards to 6 oclock position) and
F (arrow pointing to half past five). If this is not the case, the correct range must be
searched using the two left-side switches of S2 (follow description above).
X3
X2
BCT
X4
R51
STS 0508
1278639
SC1
B4
B3
B7
UGL2
B8
SC2
530-030 10
530-030 10
530-030 10
X24 IC
STS 0508
1278639
X8
S3
S2
1
2
3
S1
B6
X1
position IMP1 (alternatively: Move jumper at X8 from position 1-2 (top) back to position
2-3 (bottom), then connect voltmeter to measuring points GND (X16) and IMP1
(X24.10)). The PULS LED (B6) glows only faintly as a result.
yellow LED B3 next to the trimmer lights up.
green LED B4 next to this trimmer lights up.
Adjusting short-circuit point 1: Connect bipolar test cable to B1, then short cable and
operate one of the channel selector buttons at output B1. Use trimmer SC1 to set a voltage of 0.4 V.
Operating point adjustments for impedance monitor 2. Set test adapter switch to
position IMP2 (alternatively: Connect voltmeter to measuring points GND (X16) and
IMP2 (X24.9)).
yellow LED B7 next to the trimmer lights up.
220
V 5.0

Service Manual
green LED B8 next to this trimmer lights up.
Adjusting short-circuit point 2: Connect bipolar test cable to B2, then short it and operate one of the channel selector buttons at output B2. Use trimmer SC2 to set a voltage of
0.4 V.
If the instrument recognition settings need to be checked, proceed as follows:
Connect bipolar test adapter to socket B2. Set instrument code resistance to 68 k.
Set switch of bipolar test adapter to position IC (alternatively: Connect voltmeter to measuring points GND (X16) and IC (X24.1)). Use trimmer IC to adjust voltage to 1.00 V.
Attention: This value differs from the one applicable to bipolar board I (HW00, HW01)!
Switch off instrument code resistance of 68 k and set 33 k instead. The voltage should
then be 1.70 V 0.15 V.
10.4.3
Setting the Bipolar Board III (from HW06)
The spare board is delivered completely set. However, the setting (transfer characteristic) of
the optical link to the power manager board must be checked for correctness (for procedure,
see section 10.2.2) after removing or replacing this module. The operating frequencies of the
bipolar board III are again set with trimmers, with separate procedures for the open source
circuit and the closed source circuit. The instrument recognition function, which is now available for both bipolar outputs, is self-calibrating, so no readjustment is necessary.
To check and adjust the impedance monitor settings in case of need, proceed as follows:
Select the Bipol Macro Stop or Bipol Micro Stop current at the two bipolar coagulation
channels and set them to minimum output power.
Connect the bipolar test adapter to X8 on the bipolar board, then connect the voltmeter
to the test adapter and set the switch to UGL1 (alternative procedure: Connect voltmeter
to pins 8 and 5 of connector X8, then connect pins 5 and 6 with each other).
Frequency adjustment of impedance monitor 1, with source circuit closed and

open. Operate blue channel selector button at B1. Use trimmer FCC1 (located on pickup
board behind X8) to adjust the UGL1 value to maximum. During this process, a green
LED must light up above trimmer FCC1. Thereafter, operate the blue channel selector button at B2, then use trimmer FOC1 to adjust the value of UGL1 to maximum again. A
yellow LED must light up above trimmer FOC1 during this process.
Frequency adjustment of impedance monitor 2, with source circuit closed and

open. Set bipolar test adapter to UGL2 (alternatively: Connect voltmeter to pins 7 and 5 of
connector X8, then connect pins 5 and 6 with each other). Operate blue channel selector
button at B2. Use trimmer FCC2 (located on pickup board in front of X8) to adjust the
UGL2 value to maximum. During this process, a green LED must light up above trimmer
FCC2. Thereafter, operate the blue channel selector button at B1, then use trimmer FOC2
to adjust the value of UGL2 to maximum again. A yellow LED must light up above trimmer FOC2 during this process.
V 5.0
221

Service Manual
OC1
FOC1
OC2
FOC2
position IMP1 (alternative procedure: Connect voltmeter to pins 10 and 5 of connector X8
and break the connection previously established between pins 5 and 6).
Adjusting no-load point 1, with source circuit closed: Operate blue channel selector
button at output B1. Use trimmer CC1 to set a voltage of 4.5 V for IMP1. A green LED
must light up above this trimmer during the process.
Adjusting no-load point 1, with source circuit open: Operate blue channel selector
button at output B2. Use trimmer OC1 to set a voltage of 4.5 V for IMP1. A yellow LED
Adjusting short-circuit point 1: Operate blue channel selector button at output B1.
Connect the two 4mm sockets at B1 with each other, then use trimmer SC1 to set a voltage of 0.4 V for IMP1.
position IMP2 (alternative procedure: Connect voltmeter to pins 9 and 5 of connector X8;
no connection between pins 5 and 6).
Adjusting no-load point 2, with source circuit closed: Operate blue channel selector
button at output B2. Use trimmer CC2 to set a voltage of 4.5 V for IMP2. A green LED
must light up above this trimmer during the process
222
V 5.0

Service Manual
Adjusting no-load point 2, with source circuit open: Operate blue channel selector
button at output B1. Use trimmer OC2 to set a voltage of 4.5 V for IMP2. A yellow LED
Adjusting short-circuit point 2: Operate blue channel selector button at output B2.
Connect the two 4mm sockets at B2 with each other, then use trimmer SC2 to set a voltage of 0.4 V for IMP2.
10.5
Checking HF Output Power
After repairs and as part of the periodic safety checks, it is mandatory to check the HF output
power for a number of representative types of current. This requires an HF power meter (e.g.
KLS Martin EPM3). This instrument should allow setting at least the following resistances:
50 , 100 , 200 , 300 , 400 and 600 . The reference values to be used for comparison are the values measured initially as indicated in the Works Test Report (supplied with the
unit). The measured HF output power values should not deviate by more than 20% both from
these reference values and from the specified nominal output values.
Connect the HF power meter to socket M1 (using a handle) and to the NE socket. Set power meter to 400 . Select the Pure Cut current for M1 and assign both the yellow and the
blue pedal to M1.
Set an output power of 10 W and activate the current. Check the reading on the power
meter.
meter.
meter.
Select the Blend Cut current, set an output power of 320 W and activate the current. Check
the reading on the power meter.
Select the Desiccation current and set an output power of 120 W. Set the power meter to
100 . Activate the current, then check the reading on the power meter.
Attention: In HW00 and HW01 units, this value may have changed more than other values due to software update.
Select the Contact Coag current and set an output power of 250 W. Set the power meter to
100 . Activate the current and check the reading on the power meter.
Select the Forced Coag current and set an output power of 150 W. Set the power meter to
300 . Activate the current and check the reading on the power meter.
For HW00 and HW01 units, select the Macro Spray current and set an output power of
150 W. Set the power meter to 1200 . For HW02 and higher-version units, use the Spray
Coag current and 600 . Activate the current and check the reading on the power meter.
Thereafter, activate the current and slowly but steadily reduce the output power down to
2 W, thereby verifying the correspondingly steady change that should take place in the
value displayed on the power meter. Pay attention to internal (transient) disturbances!
V 5.0
223

Service Manual
If the deviation is high in HW00 and HW01 units for this operating mode (P < 120 W or P >
180 W), you can switch to an alternative table via the Setup menu item (select Service
and enter the service access code 2020) as described in section 4.1.5. There are three
tables available (SPR0, SPR1, and SPR2), with SPR0 representing the basic (default) setting. If SPR0 provides insufficient power, you should switch to SPR1. If this still gives you
less than 120 W, select SPR2. As a rule, you should select the table that is best suited for
compliance with the specified tolerance range of 120180 W. Such deviations are caused
by a weakness in the driving circuit of the HF generator, which can be corrected by a hardware change if switch-over to another table will not help.
Connect the monopolar handle to output M2, then assign the blue pedal to M2 and select
the Macro Spray current for this output, setting an output power of 150 W. Activate the
current and check the reading on the power meter. The value displayed on the power meter should be identical to the M1 value, with deviation limited to 1 W at a maximum.
Connect the B1 bipolar output to the HF power meter using the bipolar test cable (for the
international socket module, use laboratory cables; for the Erbe e module, use an adapter). Select Bipol Pure Cut at B1 and assign the yellow pedal, then select 300 on the
power meter. Set output power to 1 W and activate the current. Check the reading on the
power meter.
Set output power to 120 W and activate the current. Check the reading on the power meter.
Select Micro Coag at B1 and assign the blue pedal. Attention: A software change has
occurred here! For software versions up to 0.331b (only used in HW00 and HW01), 200
are used for adjustment; from software version 1.336, the resistance value has been reduced to 50 . Therefore, be aware that the adjustment value to be used is no longer identical with the one specified in the Works Test Record! Set output power to 50 W and activate the current. Check the reading on the power meter. The specified tolerance limit of
20% (regarding both the nominal value and the reference value measured initially) must
be complied with in either case (200 and 50 ).
Select Macro Coag at B1, then select 50 on the power meter. Set output power to 120 W
and activate the current. Check the reading on the power meter.
If the measured values deviate significantly from the values measured initially, the unit is
probably defective. For safety reasons, the unit must be withdrawn from use and the cause of
the malfunction investigated and removed before it may be clinically used again.
10.6
Checking Compliance with High-Frequency Leakage Current

Limits
After repairs and as part of the periodic safety checks, it is mandatory to check the highfrequency leakage currents for compliance with the values measured initially (tolerance range:
20%) as well as with the specified limits.
Set HF power meter to 200 and connect one side to the ground conductor. Select Super
Blend 250 W and Macro Spray/Air Beam 150 W for M1 und M2, respectively.
224
V 5.0

Service Manual
Insert shorting plug into NE socket und connect active output of M1 to power meter using
test cable. Assign both the yellow and blue pedal to M1. Activate cutting. The permissible
limit is 100 mA.
Activate coagulation. The permissible limit is 100 mA.
Connect test cable to NE socket and activate first cutting and then coagulation. The measured HF leakage current value shall not deviate from the value measured initially (reference value) by more than 20% and at the same time shall not exceed the upper limit of
100 mA, either.
Insert shorting plug into NE socket and connect M2 to power meter using the laboratory
cable. Assign both the yellow and blue pedal to M2. Activate cutting. The measured HF leakage current value shall not deviate from the value measured initially by more than 20%
and at the same time shall not exceed the upper limit of 100 mA, either.
Activate coagulation. The measured HF leakage current value shall not deviate from the
value measured initially (reference value) by more than 20% and at the same time shall
not exceed the upper limit of 100 mA, either.
Connect test cable to NE socket and activate cutting first, and then coagulation. The measured leakage current value shall not deviate from the value measured initially by more than
20% and at the same time shall not exceed the upper limit of 100 mA, either.
Select Bipol Blend Cut 120 W and Macro Coag 120 W for B1 and B2, respectively, on the
unit to be tested. Connect one pin of the bipolar output to the power meter (for Martin
coaxial socket, use adapter).
Assign both the yellow and blue pedal to B1. Activate cutting. The measured HF leakage
current value shall not deviate from the value measured initially (reference value) by more
than 20% and at the same time shall not exceed the upper limit of 77 mA, either.
Connect test cable to the other pin, then repeat measuring process.
Connect test cable to one pin of the bipolar output B2 (for KLS Martin test cable, use coaxial socket on adapter).
Assign both the yellow and blue pedal to B2. Activate cutting. The measured HF leakage
current value shall not deviate from the value measured initially (reference value) by more
than 20% and at the same time shall not exceed the upper limit of 77 mA, either.
Connect test cable to the other pin, then repeat measuring process.
V 5.0
225

Service Manual
11
Recurrent Safety Checks according to IEC/EN 62353
As prescribed by IEC/EN 62353, the following safety checks and tests must be performed on
the unit after repairs, and periodically at least every 24 months, by qualified persons who have
the necessary training, knowledge and practical experience to carry out such work properly,
responsibly and independently. If the ME402 is used in conjunction with an MB402 maxium
Beamer, then the Beamer must be checked as well.
A: Visual inspection and functional checks
1. Rating plate and label legibility: All information provided on the rating plates of the maxium and (if applicable) the maxium Beamer must be clearly legible. The same applies to
the rear-side labels, especially the nominal value information for the device fuses (T6.3A)
located in the units power supply socket. On the MB402 (Beamer), the information on the
permitted pressure range provided next to the gas inlet must be clearly legible.
2. A copy of the Operating Instructions must be available for the current version of the system. Updated manuals can be obtained through the Gebrder Martin Service Center.
3. Enter the software version number (V X.XXX) as indicated on the initial screen displayed
upon switching on the unit in the Test Record sheet. Pay attention to potential error messages during the initial self-test.
4. Check both screen illumination tubes or proper functioning (uniform illumination of the
screen). Check symbols and pictograms for clarity and correct color rendition (blue and
yellow).
5. Visual inspection of all connectors: Check the HF connecting sockets M1, M2, B1 and B2
plus the NE socket for potential damage or defects. On the maxiums rear panel, check
the footswitch sockets, the equipotential bonding pin and the maxium Beamer connecting
socket for potential damage and firm seat. Disconnect the power cord from the units power supply socket and check the socket for potential damage and firm seat. Besides, remove
the line fuses from the connector socket assembly and verify the fuse rating for correctness
(T6.3 A, i.e. slow-blow). On the rear panel of the maxium Beamer, check the socket for
the connecting cable to the maxium unit for potential damage and firm seat. Check the
gas inlet, decompression pin and equipotential bonding pin for firm seat. On the Beamers
front panel, check the gas outlet for potential damage and firm seat.
6. As far as possible, check the cables of all reusable accessories used with the unit(s) for
insulation and plug damage.
7. With the unit turned on, check the sealed buttons (membrane switches) on the front panel
of the maxium for proper functioning. Upon operating a channel selector button, the red
frame must jump to the channels Power field if the channel has already been selected, or
this action selects the channel in the first place. Check all eight channel selector buttons.
Also, verify that upon pressing the MENU button, the (bar-type) selection cursor is displayed at the top of the list on the right side of the display (first item highlighted).
8. Functional check of the rotary switch and its backlighting system: Upon selecting a cutting
channel, the backlight must be yellow, and if you select a coagulation channel, the backlight must be blue. Operating the MENU button must change the color of the backlight ring
to white. Rotate the switch to verify that the power value indicated for the selected channel
226
V 5.0

Service Manual
can be changed in this way. Press the switch to verify that the axial pushbutton function
(axial click) is OK. A normal amount of pressure must suffice to perform the click and carry out the function (red frame disappears).
9. Checking the current activation feature, the activation indicators and the acoustic activation
signal for proper functioning: Deactivate the NE alarm with the shorting plug, then connect
the electrode handle successively to M1 and M2 and operate the two finger switches in
each case. This must activate the HF current. At the same time, the activation LED belonging to the respective output (M1 or M2) must come on in the color of the activated operating mode (i.e. yellow or blue), and the activation signal must also be heard. In the case of
multifunctional connectors, alternative accessories should be checked as well, inasmuch as
they are also used. Connect the dual-pedal footswitch to the large footswitch socket, then
check that the channels assigned to it are correctly activated when operating the yellow or
blue pedal, respectively (if necessary, assign the footswitch pedals first). Thereafter, connect the single-pedal footswitch to the small footswitch socket and verify that operation of
the footswitch activates the channel assigned (again, assign footswitch first if necessary).
Connect the bipolar test cable to the bipolar outputs B1 and B2 (one after the other), then
select a coagulation current with auto-start function and set it to minimum power in each
case. Now check that bipolar coagulation current is activated when shorting the banana
plugs and deactivated when opening the contact. Subsequently, connect the bipolar test
adapter to output B2 and verify that current can be activated with the finger switches on
the handle.
10. Checking the neutral electrode monitoring system for proper functioning: When the NE
connecting socket is open, the split neutral electrode symbol must be displayed in red and
the slide of the graphical NE indicator (which must first be enabled via the menu if not displayed yet) must be at the left end of the bar graph. Upon activating a monopolar channel
(via an electrode handle connected to M1 or M2), the intermittent NE alarm signal must
now be clearly heard. Insert the shorting plug. The non-split (single-plate) NE symbol must
now be displayed in green and the slide symbol must disappear. Insert the test plug with a
resistance of 270 . The slide of the bar-type NE indicator must now be in the range of the
yellow field.
11. If a maxium Beamer is connected, switch off the maxium HF unit, then disconnect the
argon gas supply line from the maxium Beamer (if applicable) and turn on the maxium
again. The Standard program must now be displayed without argon current and the Beamer indicator must remain dark. Select an argon-supported current on one of the monopolar channels. The Beamer indicator must now turn red. If necessary, the maxium unit
must first be configured for maxium Beamer operation via the Argon menu item. Reconnect the gas supply line to the gas inlet of the Beamer. The self-test must now be started.
Upon its completion, the indicator must turn green.
12. Operate the PURGE button. This must activate a gas flow without HF current for 3 seconds.
This function is used to clear the air from the applicator prior to use.
13. Checking Beamer activation and Beamer activation indicators for proper functioning: Select
an argon-supported cutting current and an argon-supported coagulation current on the
maxium, then activate them one after the other. Upon activation, the Beamer indicator
must light up either yellow or blue, depending on the type of current activated.
V 5.0
227

Service Manual
14. Checking the Beamers argon gas flow for continuous increase: Usually, an argon-calibrated
flow meter will not be available. Anyway, as the user will control the gas flow according to
the observed surgical result rather than by (abstract) measured values, it is enough simply
to check the continuous adjustability of the gas flow. Connect an argon applicator to the
Beamer, not to the maxium HF unit! Now activate an argon-supported current at flow
rates of 0.3 l/min, 1 l/min, 3 l/min and 10 l/min in this sequence and verify by ear (judging
by the blowing noise) that the gas flow increases adequately from step to step.
B. Safety measurements according to IEC/EN 62353

The IEC/EN 62353 standard specifies two different procedures that can be used for verifying
electrical safety. One option are direct measurements based on the type approval standard
EN 60601. This procedure utilizes the mains voltage used for operating the unit under test to
check the safety-relevant isolating distances for compliance with standard specifications. The
second option are equivalent measurements, in which case the safety-relevant isolating distances are loaded with a voltage source integrated into the test instrument.
The direct measurements are frequently carried out with an automated safety tester that
switches the mains voltage off and on several times during the automatic testing procedure.
Note, however, that the hardware versions 00 and 01 of the maxium require a special procedure because the unit remains switched off after a power interruption. You have two options
here either to perform the measurements manually, in which case the unit under test must
be switched on manually after each power interruption, or to set jumper X10 to position 1-2
on the power manager board. While the latter option keeps the unit switched on permanently,
it requires you to open the unit, of course. As from hardware version 02, the unit remains
switched on after a power interruption, provided the interruption does not exceed 4 seconds.
Alternatively, the checks can be performed by way of equivalent measurements in the meaning
of IEC/EN 62353. In this case, it is not necessary to move the jumper on the power manager
board. All applicable measurements should be performed either as direct or equivalent measurements.
For the recurrent (periodic) safety checks, the following measurements must be carried out:
1. Measure protective conductor resistance between the protective conductor (PE) contact and
the equipotential bonding pin of the maxium, or between the protective conductor contact
and any other touchable part of the unit connected to the protective conductor, using a
current of 200 mA at a minimum. The resulting value shall not exceed 0.2 measured at
the units mains connector socket, and 300 mA measured at the plug of the power cord.
2. Ground leakage current, normal case: Direct measurement of the current in the protective
conductor of the power cord without fault simulation. The measured value shall not exceed
1.5 times the value measured initially (reference value) as indicated in the Works Test Report supplied with the unit. At the same time, it shall not exceed the absolute upper limit of
500 A, either. Not applicable when using the equivalent measurement procedure.
3. Ground leakage current, single fault: Direct measurement of the current in the protective
conductor of the power cord while simulating an interruption of the ground-related phase N
(this switches off the unit). The measured value shall not exceed 1.5 times the value
measured initially (reference value) as indicated in the Works Test Report supplied with the
unit. At the same time, it shall not exceed the absolute upper limit of 1,000 A (1 mA),
228
V 5.0

Service Manual
either. This value is usually twice as high as the measured normal-case ground leakage
current. Not applicable when using the equivalent measurement procedure.
4. Contact current (housing leakage current), normal case: Defined as that current which
flows from the maxiums equipotential bonding pin, as well as from any externally touchable part of the unit, to ground. As this current path constitutes a parallel path to the protective conductor, its value is undefined because it depends on the variable relationship between the two part grounding resistances involved. The measured value shall not exceed
the upper limit of 100 A. For equivalent measurement, this current is defined as the current which driven by a test voltage source flows between the mains input socket and
the protective conductor or any externally touchable part of the maxium. The measured
value shall not exceed 1,000 A (1 mA).
5. Contact current (housing leakage current), single fault protective conductor: This is equivalent to the directly measured normal-case ground leakage current because the test path
now functions as a protective conductor. The measured value shall not exceed 1.5 times
the value measured initially (reference value) and not exceed the absolute maximum of
500 A, either. Not applicable when using the equivalent measurement procedure.
6. Contact current (housing leakage current), single fault mains: Defined as the directly
measured current flowing from the equipotential bonding pin of the maxium, as well as
from any externally touchable part of the unit, to ground upon interrupting the groundrelated phase N (which switches off the unit). As this current path constitutes a parallel
path to the protective conductor, its value is undefined because it depends on the variable
relationship between the two part grounding resistances involved. The measured value
shall not exceed the absolute upper limit of 500 A. Not applicable when using the equivalent measurement procedure.
7. Patient leakage current, normal case: For direct measurement, this is the current flowing
from the instrument connectors M1, M2, B1, B2 and NE to ground in non-activated condition. A limit value of 10 A shall apply.
When using equivalent measurement, this is the current which driven by a test voltage
source flows from the applied parts to externally touchable parts of the maxium and to
the mains input socket of the unit. A limit value of 50 A shall apply.
In both cases, the measurements can be performed by paralleling several connectors as
long as such parallel connection does not lead to a measured value that exceeds the specified limit value. Should this be the case, the monopolar and the bipolar applied part must
be tested separately and the highest value measured entered in the Test Record sheet.
Please note that shorting the bipolar output B1 or B2 will cause an error message during
the self-test performed after switching on the unit. This leaves two options: Either you can
use test cables connected to only one pin of the outputs B1 and B2, or you can perform the
measurement manually after the initial self-test has been completed. In this latter case,
however, no current with auto-start function must have been selected!
8. Patient leakage current, single fault protective conductor: Direct measurement of the currents from the instrument connectors M1, M2, B1, B2 and NE to ground in non-activated
condition and with the protective conductor interrupted. The upper limit not to be exceeded
is 50 A. Besides, the provisions given under item 7 shall apply. Equivalent measurement
not possible.
V 5.0
229

Service Manual
9. Patient leakage current, single fault voltage at applied part: Direct measurement of the
currents from the instrument connectors M1, M2, B1, B2 and NE to ground in non-activated
condition after a ground-related test voltage has been externally applied to the
maxiums connectors via the power meter! The upper limit not to be exceeded is
50 A. Besides, the provisions given under item 7 shall apply. This test corresponds to the
equivalent measurement performed according to item 7 above.
C. Measuring output power

The HF output power should be measured and verified for exemplary currents. This is intended
to check the HF current paths of all available outputs (M1, M2, B1 and B2) for proper functioning.
All safety checks and related results must be documented in the equipment log!
230
V 5.0

Service Manual
Inspector: ____________________________________
Consec. No.: ___________________
Test Record Direct measurement acc. to DIN EN 62353
ME402 maxium , maxium Beamer and accessories

SW version: ______
ME402 only
maxium No.: _____________________

Beamer No.: _____________________
ME402 with MB402 maxium Beamer
A: Visual inspections & functional tests
Comments
OK
not OK
OK
not OK
OK
not OK
1. Readability of rating plate and labels ......................................................

2. Valid version of Operating Instructions (user manual) ...........................................
3. Observation of initial self-test of ME402 ....................................................
4. Visual inspection of display screen and illumination .............................................
5. Visual inspection of all connectors (accessories, power cord) and fuses
6. Visual inspection of accessories............................................................................
7. Functional test: Channel selector buttons and MENU button.............................
8. Functional test: Rotary switch and backlight .............................
9. Functional test: HF activation and activation indicators .................................
10. Functional test: Neutral electrode monitoring .......................................
11. Observation of initial self-test of maxium Beamer .................................
12. Functional test: PURGE function of maxium Beamer .....................
13. Functional test: Beamer activation and activation indicators ..............
14. Functional test: Steady argon flow increase with Beamer .........
B. Protective conductor resistance & LF leakage currents, direct measurement Measured values:
1. Protective conductor resistance (max. 0.2 in unit, max. 0.3 w. power cord):
_________
2. Ground leakage current, normal case (max. 500 A): .......................................
_________ A
3. Ground leakage current, single fault (max. 1000 A): ....................................
_________ A
4. Contact current, normal case (max. 100 A): .......................................................
_________ A
5. Contact current, single fault protective conductor (max. 500 A): .................
_________ A
6. Contact current, single fault mains (max. 500 A): ........................................
_________ A
7. Patient leakage current, normal case (max. 10 A): .............................................
_________ A
8. Patient leakage current, single fault protective conductor (max. 50 A): .......
_________ A
9. Patient leakage current, voltage at applied part (max. 50 A): .....................
_________ A
C. Output data measurement
*HW00: 1200; from HW01: 600
Power:
Output M1, Pure Cut set to 10 W at 400 (10 W 2 W) ..............................
_________ watts
Output M1, Pure Cut set to 100 W at 400 (100 W 20 W) ........................
_________ watts
_________ watts
Output M1, Contact Coag set to 250 W at 100 (250 W 50 W) ................
_________ watts
Output M1, Macro Spray set to 150 W at 1200/600 * (150 W 30 W) .......
_________ watts
_________ watts
Output B1, Bipolar Pure Cut set to 10 W at 300 (10 W 2 W) ..................
_________ watts
Output B1, Bipolar Pure Cut set to 50 W at 300 (50 W 10 W) ................
_________ watts
Output B1, Macro Coag set to 120 W at 50 (120 W 24 W) .....................
_________ watts
_________ watts
Unit checked on: _____________________
V 5.0
by: ___________________________________
231

Service Manual
Inspector: ____________________________________
Consec. No.: ___________________
Test Record Equivalent measurement acc. to DIN EN 62353 maxium No.: _____________________
ME402 maxium , maxium Beamer and accessories

SW version: ______
ME402 only
Beamer No.: _____________________
ME402 with MB402 maxium Beamer
A: Visual inspections & functional tests
Comments
OK
not OK
B. Protective conductor resistance & LF leakage currents, equivalent measurement
Measured values:
OK
not OK
1. Protective conductor resistance (max. 0.2 in unit, max. 0.3 w. power cord):
_________
OK
not OK
1. Readability of rating plate and labels ......................................................

2. Valid version of Operating Instructions (user manual) ...........................................
3. Observation of initial self-test of ME402 ....................................................
4. Visual inspection of display screen and illumination .............................................
5. Visual inspection of all connectors (accessories, power cord) and fuses
6. Visual inspection of accessories............................................................................
7. Functional test: Channel selector buttons and MENU button.............................
8. Functional test: Rotary switch and backlight ......................
9. Functional test: HF activation and activation indicator lights .....................
10. Functional test: Neutral electrode monitoring .......................................
11. Observation of initial self-test of maxium Beamer ...................................
12. Functional test: PURGE function of maxium Beamer ......................
13. Functional test: Beamer activation and activation indicators ................
14. Functional test: Steady argon flow increase with Beamer .........
4. Contact current, normal case (max. 1,000 A): .................................................... _________ A

7. Patient leakage current, normal case (max. 50 A): ............................................. _________ A
C. Output data measurement
*HW00: 1200 ; from HW01: 600
Power:
Output M1, Pure Cut set to 10 W at 400 (10 W 2 W) ..............................
_________ watts
_________ watts
_________ watts
Output M1, Contact Coag set to 250 W at 100 (250 W 50 W) ................
_________ watts
_________ watts
_________ watts
Output B1, Bipolar Pure Cut set to 10 W at 300 (10 W 2 W) ..................
_________ watts
Output B1, Bipolar Pure Cut set to 50 W at 300 (50 W 10 W) ................
_________ watts
_________ watts
_________ watts
Unit checked on: _____________________
232
by: ___________________________________
V 5.0

Service Manual
Test Report
Test Report
Inventory No.:
____________________
Inspector:
Unit No.:
____________________
Beamer No.
____________________
Manufacturer: Gebrder Martin GmbH & Co. KG
Holder of certificate:
Type of unit: Electrosurgical unit

Designation: ME402 maxium/with Beamer
Year of manufacture:
______________
Test specifications: EN 62353 (direct measurem.) EN 62353 (equiv. measurem.)
Test results:
For measured values, see Test Record overleaf.
Non-conforming test items:
No defects found, or only deficiencies that are not safety-relevant.

The unit(s) can be still be kept in operation.
The unit(s) can be used again after the above-mentioned defects have been removed.
The defects found require maintenance or repair before the unit(s) is/are used again,
or else patients, users or third parties might be at risk.
Date:
Signature:
Next check scheduled for:
____________
____________________
_____________________
V 5.0
233
KLS Martin Group

Karl Leibinger GmbH & Co. KG
78570 Mhlheim Germany
Tel. +49 74 63 838-0
info@klsmartin.com
KLS Martin France SARL

68000 Colmar France
Tel. +33 3 89 21 66 01
france@klsmartin.com
KLS Martin L.P.

Jacksonville, Fl 32246 USA
Office phone +1 904 641 77 46
usa@klsmartin.com
KLS Martin GmbH + Co. KG

79224 Umkirch Germany
Tel. +49 76 65 98 02-0
info@klsmartin.com
Martin Italia S.r.l.

20059 Vimercate (MB) Italy
Tel. +39 039 605 67 31
italia@klsmartin.com

Representative Office Russia
121471 Moscow
Tel. +7 (499) 792-76-19
russia@klsmartin.com
Stuckenbrock Medizintechnik GmbH

78532 Tuttlingen Germany
Tel. +49 74 61 16 58 80
verwaltung@stuckenbrock.de
Nippon Martin K.K.

Osaka 541-0046 Japan
Tel. +81 6 62 28 90 75
nippon@klsmartin.com

Representative Office China
201203 Shanghai
Tel. +86 21 2898 6611
china@klsmartin.com
Rudolf Buck GmbH

78570 Mhlheim Germany
Tel. +49 74 63 99 516-30
info@klsmartin.com
Martin Nederland/Marned B.V.

1270 AG Huizen The Netherlands
Tel. +31 35 523 45 38
nederland@klsmartin.com

Ein Unternehmen der KLS Martin Group
Ludwigstaler Str. 132 78532 Tuttlingen Germany
Postfach 60 78501 Tuttlingen Germany
Tel. +49 7461 706-0 Fax 706-193
info@klsmartin.com www.klsmartin.com
Date of Release: 08.10

90-169-62-50 Printed in Germany Copyright by Gebrder Martin GmbH & Co. KG Alle Rechte vorbehalten
Technische nderungen vorbehalten We reserve the right to make alterations Cambios tcnicos reservados Sous rserve de modifications techniques
Ci riserviamo il diritto di modifiche tecniche Revision Number: V 5.0

Maxium

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Maxium

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrosurgical Unit

with maxium Beamer

Version 5.0-EN (08.10)

Valid from HW00 up to HW06

KLS Martin maxium / maxium Beamer

Product Liability & Warranty ......................................................... 6

General Information .............................................................................. 6

Transportation and Packaging ....................................................... 7

Users Inspection .................................................................................. 7

Warnings & Safety Instructions ..................................................... 8

Service Functions ........................................................................ 9

Beamer Parameters ........................................................................................ 13

Status Information ......................................................................................... 25

maxium Update ............................................................................................ 31

Updating the Operating Program ........................................................... 32

Aids Required for the Update ...........................................................................32

Normal Software Updating Procedure ................................................................ 32

Extended Software Updating Procedure ............................................................. 33

The marFlash Program ....................................................................................35

Updating the Subsystems of the ME402 and MB402 ............................................36

Readout and Transfer of the Units Settings ............................................ 36

Transfer from one ME402 Unit to Another (Back2Back) .......................................36

The maxiumPC Program ..................................................................................38

Transfer from a maxium Unit to a PC or Vice Versa (Back2Laptop) .....................39

Hardware and Software Statuses, Spare Parts Lists ........................ 39

Hardware Configurations HW00 and HW01 ........................................................ 41

Hardware Configuration 02 ..............................................................................53

Hardware Configuration HW03 .........................................................................62

Hardware Configurations HW04 and HW05 ........................................................ 71

Hardware Configuration HW06 .........................................................................83

KLS Martin maxium / maxium Beamer

Software Status and Software Version Numbers...................................... 94

General Information ....................................................................................... 94

Software Version 0.247 ...................................................................................95

Software Version 0.251 ...................................................................................95

Software Version 0.257 ...................................................................................95

Software Version 0.263 ...................................................................................95

Software Version 0.296 ...................................................................................95

Software Version 0.305 ...................................................................................96

Software Version 0.311 ...................................................................................96

Software Version 0.325 ...................................................................................97

Software Version 0.331 ...................................................................................97

Software Version 0.331b .................................................................................99

Software Version 1.336 ...................................................................................99

Software Version 1.343 ................................................................................. 100

Software Version 1.345 ................................................................................. 103

Software Version 1.346 ................................................................................. 103

Software Version 2.360 ................................................................................. 103

Software Version 2.361 ................................................................................. 108

Software Version 2.368 ................................................................................. 109

Software Version 2.369b ............................................................................... 109

Software Version 3.370 ................................................................................. 110

Replacing Modules and Components on the ME402 ....................... 112

Opening and Closing the Unit ............................................................. 112

KLS Martin maxium / maxium Beamer

Technical Description of the ME402 with MB402 Option ................. 130

General Information .......................................................................... 130

Power Supply Units (PSUs) ............................................................................ 131

HF Generator ............................................................................................... 148

Monopolar Applied Part ................................................................................. 149

Bipolar Applied Part ...................................................................................... 155

The Main Controller and its Interfaces ............................................................. 159

Front Part .................................................................................................... 168